Home

Roland CDX-1 user manual

1. CEN E E 1 Make sure that your sound reproduction system i e amp or headphones is correctly connected 2 As described in Turning On the Power p 33 turn on the power of the CDX 1 3 Insert the demo disc as described in Inserting a disc p 35 4 Press the STATUS of the audio tracks enough times to get them to light in green 5 Setthe AUDIO TRACK faders 1 8 to the 0 dB position 6 Lower the MASTER fader 7 Press PLAY gt The song will play back 8 Raise the MASTER fader to adjust the volume 9 Press STOP W Playback will stop Press ZERO Mid and then press PLAY B J once again and playback will start from the beginning of the song Adjusting the overall volume MASTER fader Use the MASTER fader to adjust the overall volume The stereo left right balance can be adjusted with the master balance Adjusting the headphone volume The volume of the headphones connected to the phones jack is adjusted with the phones knob Tf the MASTER fader is lowered you will hear no sound even when you turn up the volume with the phones knob e Use of the Demo Disc supplied with this product for any purpose other than private personal enjoyment without the permission of
2. Record external audio sources directly to a CD R disc without using the audio tracks gt Recording an external audio source to a CD R disc p 161 This completes your original audio CD What you need to do to create your own CD Listening to the demo disc Here s how to play back the demo disc and listen to the demo song Playing the demo disc MULTITRACK CD AUDIO SAMPLE WO THe MASTERING TOOLS E TIME SO C1 Mic2 LINEL R DIGITAL 0 o Gtr Bs r DiscLab RR a R a CK CD RECORDER INPUT JO S IRKSTATION SELECT SIMUL I 7 SAMPLE PADS SEQUENCING LOOP EFFECTS LEVEL PATTERN UNDO DELAY REVERB ON OFF TEMPO DISPLAY UTILITY REDO NO YES MASTER TRK O C Ooo Oo Co EDIT wv mx tC S TRACK EDIT PAD RHYTHM GUIDE EXIT AS ENTER CJ X Fal PAD REI STATUS C IATCH PAD BANKS 1 64 MASTER HHHAHHBE Titi hobo T j j 4 46 _ FES ASUL LOLS
3. 1 Press STOP Mf to stop demo song playback The eight pads will light Pads that are lit contain audio samples sounds Press a pad that is lit The audio samples of that pad will sound You can press up to four pads simultaneously to layer their sounds Go ahead and press pads to hear their sounds NEM If the STATUS of all audio tracks is lit in green all pads will be dark while the audio tracks are playing back and pressing the pads will not produce sound If you extinguish STATUS for a pair of audio tracks 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 8 you will be able to play pad sounds gt Playing pads while audio tracks play back p 69 Playing back the sequence track 46 SEQ PLAY i ON OFF i Press STOP If to stop demo song playback Press PAD SEQUENCING SEQ PLAY SEQ PLAY will light and the Sequence Play GSR EWES Seto List screen appears E ng I E dF a Press ZERO 4 to return the SONG POSITION to 0001 01 000 beginning of the song Press PLAY P The sequence track will play back Press STOP W Playback will stop Press ZERO I 4 and then press PLAY once again and playbac
4. MIDI Sequencer 2 Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon Parameter icon 4 HE 3 Press CURSOR gt to select the MIDI pei HIDI PARAMETER N F HARE S0HG V 2TE HIDI 4 Press YES ENTER The MIDI settings screen appears 5 Press CURSOR U to move the cursor to HIDI WI aie File Sync Out line HHC Hode Y Sanc OUt 154 Using the CDX 1 with other MIDI devices 6 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select MTC Sync Out Select whether or not the synchronization signals that will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT THRU connector Off Synchronization signals will not be output MTC MIDI Time Code will be transmitted 7 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to MTC Type line MMC Mode Src OWT Y HTC Tyre 8 Turn the TIME V ALUE dial to select the MTC type 30 29N 29D 25 or 24 Sync MTC Type MTC Type Check the specifications of the MIDI sequencer you are using and match the MTC setting of the CDX 1 and your MIDI sequencer 30 30 frames per second non drop This format is used for audio devices such as tape recorders and for NTSC format black and white video 29N 29 97 frames per second non drop This format is used for NTSC format color video 29D 29 97 frames per seconds drop frame This format is used for NTSC format r broadcast color video 25 25 frames per second T
5. Pad Bank 1 Pad Bank 2 Pad Bank 3 Pad Bank 63 Mi em fe Pad Bank 64 Switching pad banks 1 Press the PAD BANKS The Pad Bank List screen appears MEM In step 2 you can press a pad 1 8 to select pad banks 1 8 2 Select the pad bank 1 64 by turning the TIME V ALUE dial At this time a pad in which a sample has been recorded lights While turning the TIME VALUE dial allowing you to check whether or not there is a sample 3 Press YES ENTER The pad bank will change 54 Recording a sound to a pad Sampling Naming a pad bank Each of the 64 pad banks can be given a name of up to ten characters If you have assigned names to the pad banks it will be easier to select the desired bank For clarity you may wish to use pad bank names like the examples given below e Types of samples Examples DrumLoop1 Male Voice SFX e Dates on which you sampled Examples Jan 1 01 5 12 pm9 30 1 Select the pad bank to which you wish to assign a name refer to the preceding section 2 Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice Alternatively you can press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons FAD FARAMETER P Se apa E J D Q fe g gt a 2 fe a Sj w aalsa OFTIM DIVIDE TRIM D Q 3 Press CURSOR _ gt to select the Bank aes ae EAN FARAVETERN Parameter icon EFT STRETC
6. PUSH O00 220 000 O i o oo000000 MIDI Sound Module ER DODO Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon Press CURSOR gt to select the MIDI ROO ON icon HER H HARKE S0HG 2YSTE HIDI Press YES ENTER The MIDI settings screen appears Press CURSOR to move the cursor to HIDI Rhvth h li a Pads Rz Ch 1 ythm ch line RxMOLe Padi 450 2 Rhath Ch Turn the TIME V ALUE dial to set the MIDI channel 1 16 If you select OFF note messages of the rhythm guide will not be transmitted Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen How the rhythm guide sounds correspond to note numbers 158 If your external MIDI sound module is GS or GM compatible you can use it without further settings If it is not compatible with either of these you will need to make settings on your external MIDI sound module to change the sounds that correspond to each note number For details on making these settings refer to the manual of your MIDI sound module Using the rhythm guide p 116 NEM If you are using an external MIDI sound module to play the rhythm guide use the controls of the external MIDI sound module to adjust the volume level CD direct recording Recording to a CD R disc CD Recorder The CDX 1 can record an external audi
7. 00 00 CD RECORDER I will blink writing ready mode PTE ieee Il OE You can select the mastering tools patch and adjust the input level in CD burning screen before writing to the CD R disc However you can not test listening Press PLAY gt Writing to the CD R disc will begin When writing is completed correctly the screen will ask Do you want to finalize a CD If you wish to finalize the disc press YES ENTER The screen will indicate Now Processing and the disc will be finalized When finalization is completed the disc tray will open If you wish to add another song press NO EXIT Finalize will not be executed and the disc tray will open Finishing the CD Burning 1 Press CD BURNING or NO EXIT A message of You ll lose MASTER TR Are you sure appears Press YES ENTER CD burning mode will finish CD BURNING will go dark Press NO EXIT stay on CD burning mode For details on the mastering tools refer to Adjusting the mastering tools p 134 z Track At Once p 18 Finalize p 204 For details of saved Song settings refer to Saving Song settings on a CD RW disc p 126 MEMO Data is written to the CD R disc at 1x speed If you wish to add other songs to the CD R disc and execute Finalize later refer to Finalizing a CD R disc p 136 MEM Finalization will require approximately 1 minutes 135
8. Duration Www A A A 00000000 Wave Wave Offset End Point In both Offset and End point are indicated by 8 digits values likewise the sample reading start points p 78 The amount of time indicated by 00000001 is 1 3000 of a second This does not change with tempo and measure length gt _ 2 os o oc ok 0 oO no on 5 9 a3 so 4 N ADJUST TIMIHG Tr C J Havedtrtset 000000 WaveEnd OOOO 2524 WaveOffset This specifies and changes the starting point for reading the waveform data of sample The specified point is placed at the position determined in Adjust Timing Start in the second screen WaveEnd O This specifies and changes the end point for reading the waveform data of sample If LOOP END was the If this point is before the end of the segment resulting from the Duration setting in sampling mode used during Adjust Timing in the second screen then even though still within the phrase the SEM e OLE a select a value smaller than that sound stops fixed value If a pad contains a looped sound recorded in Realtime Step Recording then the end point of the loop on the track is designated Adjusting the volume setting for each phrase The upper right of the Sequence Track Edit screen shows the volume of each phrase By highlighting this value and turning the TIME VALUE dial to change it you can adjust the volume of the selected phrase 0 100
9. Insert effect algorithm list Available types of modulation and their effect Parameter full name Setting Function FLG FLANGER Flanger The flanger effect gives a twisting jet airplane like character to the sound Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the flanger effect on off Rate Rate 0 100 Determines the rate of the flanging effect Depth Depth 0 100 Determines the depth of the flanging effect Manual Manual 0 100 Adjusts the center frequency at which to apply the effect Resonance Resonance 0 100 Determines the amount of resonance feedback Increasing the value will emphasize the effect creating a more unusual sound Separation Separation 0 100 Adjusts the diffusion The diffusion increases as the value increases Effective when stereo output is used CHO CHORUS Chorus A sound witha subtly shifted pitch is added to the direct sound making the final output sound thicker and broader Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the chorus effect on off Rate Rate 0 100 Adjusts the rate of the Chorus effect Depth Depth 0 100 Adjusts the depth of the Chorus effect Pre Delay Pre Delay 0 5 50 mS Adjusts the time needed for the effect sound to be output after the direct sound has been output Effect Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the effect sound MEMO Best results will be achieved when stereo output is used PH PHASER Phaser By adding
10. The value prior to the change will reflect the volume that was specified for the pad you pressed when recording p 90 93 A setting DUP ation 2 053 of 100 is the volume at which the sound was sampled 105 Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence Edit on Sequence Play List screen Quick Edit 106 It is convenient to select a phrase to edit seeing whole part of Play List Press PAD SEQUENCING SEQ PLAY SEQ PLAY lights and the Sequence Play SEG PLAY LIST Bee ieee List screen appears TSEL m AZT wA BEL EE pe MEMO Press CURSOR At this time the STATUS of all audio tracks will go dark A cursor appears on box A of Tr SEL track SEG FLAY select Tr SEL ak Press CURSOR Q U to move the cursor to the Tr SEL track select box of the sequence track A D that you wish to edit Use the REW lt q FF PP or the TIME VALUE dial to select the phrase that you wish to edit The currently selected phrase will be highlighted in black Press YES ENTER A mini menu appears SEG FLAY Tr SEL gr de T Poz Press CURSOR Q U to select the menu and press YES ENTER At this time press NO EXIT a mini menu disappears Menu displayed on screen and operation of those are as follows MOVE Moving a phrase Move p 98 step 8 9 PASTE Pasting a phrase at a different location Paste p 99 step 8 9 CUT
11. dp 219 A AC AIDAL TOR JAC ri 30 ACOUSTIC GUT PAIRS venien T 192 ACOUSTIC MD Le oeren TN 188 Adj st TMA cossiensa ea 104 Adjust PIO ICON crea 104 AUDIO CD Mdai searen 28 AUDIO CD PLAYER indicator ou eeeeeeeee 25 AUDIO CD RECORDER indicator eee 25 andio sample ne siss c3 acasnsaeidaasabatnostangoeaervaeognlaadveanaiins 54 AUDIO TRACK faders essseeeseescesensssesesssssceresesseesoss 23 AUDIO TRACK RECORD indicator eee 26 AUTO PUNCH DUO cercen eraa 27 B Balanced connection sarianu cose Sesacibieeee 204 Bank TASC aa E ae ee meaesoeas cates 65 ProChain ease ees 66 Bank Erase COn eRe na Oe ee OnE SRO AO Ser 65 Bank Parameter icon o cceeececccccceesscsccccesessscesccesseeeesess 55 Dank PPOteChOM ICOM se A Gathecteuaitese 66 S Ye Gl oe ree ite aE Ie TRIER CLC Ee Ie NA ERENT Te 54 Ba Ta RES Renan are AOn ee ee arom SPERM POP ORR ESTEE Ra 80 Basic screen Dig TNE SCEE enian sansa neeies 37 POSt fAGEr SCLEEH seiiesacosaieseaccictiovehelasiateieoxeaeds 37 Pref ader SCHEIN scence a 37 Sequence Play List Screen ccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeee 37 Song Information screen sissisvievieciisennivvanactaeiians 37 BASS MD Faea a a IEA MAL COTES Ey 190 BASS MUL nir Une rn Oar eRe Rte Ae 194 EINT EET A EAAS N EE AE IA EEN E 29 BOUNCE B HON srein enaA S 26 BEN sa nersiscnestictastesttsisiesa a a a 77 BEM Deals per Mun Ue a cwricdsnemvieemeuetooie 204 BUS VIN GICALOR mennaan aa 28 C Cerena lee
12. Path 1 Sample audio materials from a sampling CD clip audio collection or load Windows WAVE files and assign the sounds to pads gt Sampling to a pad p 56 Freely combine pad sounds to create your song Record the pad operations on the sequence track gt Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence p 88 On the audio tracks record sounds from connected instruments or what is played back by the sequence track gt Recording your performance p 119 Recording the sequence playback sound on an audio track p 108 MIX DOWN O as BTR gt MASTER oac Anoo OOo AGC GOG Oa ooo0oo0oo0oo0oo0oo ojo o O Combine the performances recorded on multiple audio tracks to two channel stereo mixdown gt Preparing to write a CD R disc Mixdown p 132 CD BURNING p
13. STANDARD The data on the disc will merely be invalidated logically Normally you should select this Approximately 10 minutes will be required Press CURSOR to move the cursor to Data Type line Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the data type For details on data types refer to the column What is the data type on this page Recommended CD R CD RW discs p 19 Ore The CDX 1 uses a sample rate of 44 1 kHz It is not possible to change the sample rate MEM CDX 1 carries out the followings when formatting discs e Insert CD RW disc to improve preciseness of writing e Reserve area for recording e Reserve area to save data of pad sequence Thus it take sometime to complete formatting Prepare for recording Multtrack recording 7 Press YES ENTER NO RE A message of Format OK appears in the SS l 8 pp Initialize all data e It is not possible to change ACTEREN Format ok the data type while you are working on the song e After you execute format it is 8 Press CURSOR gt to select OK and press YES ENTER Mpo o pissy UNDO REDO The format is executed When formatting is completed the display will show a p 138 to revert to the state message of Completed before executing format If you press YES ENTER to select CANCEL the CD RW Format screen will e While formatting do not turn reappear off the power with unplugging the AC a
14. To set the pad bank number turn the TIME VALUE dial To set the pad number either press a pad or turn the TIME VALUE dial Source Specify the sample you wish to expand compress sample To Specify the pad to which the expanded compressed sample is assigned Tf the destination pad already has a sample a message of Overwrite appears If it is OK to overwrite the existing sample press YES ENTER 5 Press CURSOR Q U to move the cursor to Ratio Turn the TIME VALUE dial to specify the expansion compression in a range of 50 0 150 0 A setting of 100 0 is the same as the original length By selecting and setting New BPM new tempo in the line below you can specify the expansion compression in terms of the new tempo The Ratio and New BPM values always changes simultaneously 6 When you have finished making the settings press YES ENTER After a time the expanded compressed sample is assigned to the destination pad 7 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 1 Editing the sample of a pad Copying a sample to another pad Clipboard 2 By temporarily pasting a sample into the clipboard you can easily copy a sample from one pad to another Hold down the pad of the sample you wish to move the pad lights and press CLIP BOARD CLIP BOARD is illuminated If CLIP BOARD already contains a sample that is overwrited the existing sample Press CLIP BOARD t
15. and press CURSOR lt _ gt J and turn TIME VALUE dial to change the setting Start Setting the point where the beginning of the phrase on the sequence track Start 0001 03 05 measure beat tick Duration Setting the phrase length Durat ion 0 5 3 If required press CURSOR l repeatedly until the third screen is displayed and turn the TIME VALUE dial to change the value WaveOffset or WaveEnd For details refer to Offset and End Point p 105 below number of beats and ticks 10 When you are finished editing the sequence track press DISPLAY EDIT goes out extinguished and the display returns to the Basic screen MEM If SEQ PLAY is off press EDIT and it will be turned on lit automatically Also the STATUS of all audio tracks will go dark MEM In step 5 also press NO EXIT a mini menu disappears Ore The extend to which the Start and Duration of a phrase can be changed is limited by the phrase before and after it that is phrases on the same track cannot be overlapped In addition one beat as indicated here always means a quarter note 96 ticks This is not affected by the rhythm in each measure Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence Offset and End Point WaveOffset and WaveEnd the parameters selected in Step 9 determine which part of the waveform data is used for to a phrase Start M
16. ssssccsscsssssssscsssscseesssesssseseeeoess 70 Crossfading the pad samples you play Pad Crossfade cssscsssecssecssscssssccssesescesesessesesseoess 71 Making the sound continue even after you release the pad Hold e seeseessoesoessossosseeseossossesses 72 Usine TON casts sheen onscaasedetactdiins shise a a a a 72 Using Hold tor multiple samples casani n R T 72 Playing fepeatedl y LOO p MOM ass asesssads dotessehssesstestcestideapsbesase cated dsushess ounie aa ea aE EaR aaRS 73 Preventing specific samples from sounding simultaneously Mute Groups ssccsssesseees 74 Playing a sample from a connected foot switch eseesseeseessoseosseeseossosseesesesessesssossossoessossosseessessesses 75 Specifying the Function Of the Foot S Witch iaiiesiteipreicuttoceeceds thein ss Asiebabin selene tesvhalecysaeeatoess 75 Specifying the pad sample that will be played by the foot switch eee eee eeeees 75 Editing the sample Of a pad ccccccesscensecneecnseeeesenseeensseneseneesneees 76 Adjusting the volume of a sample Sample Level csssscsscssscsssscsssessseessssssesessssssssessssssesons 76 Displaying the correct tempo of a sample ccscccccecssnccescssenccsenssnccssesceneccsenscaccssecenccssonssacssens 77 Adjusting the start end points of the sound Trim Sample ssscsscssssssssssscsssesssesssessseeees 78 Whatare the Start Loop points and Length ore
17. 2 MIDI Machine Control E MIDI Machine Control Details STOP MCS Status Data Bytes Status FOH 7FH Dev 06H 01H F7H Byte Description FOH Status of System Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header Dev Device ID 10H or 7FH 06H MMC Command Message 01H STOP MCS F7H EOX End of System Exclusive Message If the device ID on the message was as same as that of the receiving 10H or 7FH the CDX 1 stops immediately PLAY MCS Status Data Bytes Status FOH 7FH Dev 06H 02H F7H Byte Description FOH Status of System Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header Dev Device ID 10H or 7FH 06H MMC Command Message 02H PLAY MCS F7H EOX End of System Exclusive Message If the device ID on the message was as same as that of the receiving 10H or 7FH the CDX 1 goes into the playback condition DEFERRED PLAY MCS Status Data Bytes Status FOH 7FH Dev 06H 03H F7H Byte Description FOH Status of System Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header Dev Device ID 10H or 7FH 06H MMC Command Message 03H DEFERRED PLAY MCS F7H EOX End of System Exclusive Message If the device ID on the message was as same as that of the receiving 10H or 7FH the CDX 1 goes into the playback condition after the locate operation FAST FORWARD MCS Status Data Bytes Status FOH 7FH Dev 06H 03H F7H Byte Description F
18. In order to make a Digital recording with CD player p 148 INPUT REC LEVEL knob This adjusts the volume of the input source or the recording level of the input source that you are recording Ifyou use the INPUT REC LEVEL knob to turn down the volume of the input source during recording the sound will be recorded in the audio track or pad at a low volume so that noise will be more apparent when you raise the volume of the audio track or pad for playback If you wish to lower the volume of the input source you are hearing use the MASTER fader or the phone knob to lower the volume 21 o 5 Oo J D n O 1S 5 n Panel Descriptions INSERT EFFECTS section Here you can make settings for the insert effect gt Using the insert effects p 141 Insert effect algorithm list p 175 INSERT EFFECTS COSM ON OFF PATCH CJ tJ r ON OFF button PATCH button ON OFF button This button switches Insert Effect on and off PATCH button Here you can switch the parameters displayed in the edit section and change the type of curve PHONES Section PHONES knob PHONES knob This knob adjusts the volume of the headphones LOOP EFFECTS section Here you can make settings for the loop effects gt Using the loop effects p 145 Mixer effect p
19. Q cE ce Qo v g D MO Shai v a S a8 o3 oe oS fab ie q gt Editing a recorded performance to create an audio CD Finalizing a CD R disc Here s how to finalize an original CD that you created so that it can be played on a NOTE conventional CD player Once APRI E bon keen 1 Insert the CD R disc that you wish to finalize uinglaed 1 imine Glee Gen be recorded to it 2 Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon Finalize p 204 3 Press CURSOR gt to select the CD R RW Disc icon 4 Press YES ENTER The CD R RW Disc Menu are displayed as icon 5 Press CURSOR gt to select the CD R heim CU FINA ey Finalize icon foy g ay a 4 FORMAT OFTIF EACKUPF FIHAL 6 Press YES ENTER The display will ask CD R finalize OK MEMO 7 Press YES ENTER once again Finalization will require imately 1 minutes The display will indicate Now Processing and finalization will be executed Ge When finalization is completed the CD Player screen appears If you press NO EXIT finalization will not be executed and you re returned to step 5 136 Taking full advantage of the CDX 1 More functions for the CDX 1 Undoing a recording editing operation When you record or sample a performance the recorded or sampled results may not always be as you expect Or you may make a mistake in editing In such cases
20. 2 LO FI BOX This allows you to model sounds that appear to be playing on an AM radio the sounds of old records played on an old fashioned gramophone and even extreme deformations of the sound produced by a Lo Fi Digital Parameter full name Setting LOFI Lo Fi Box Produces a lo fi sound Effect On Off Effect On Off Type Type OFF ON RADIO PLAYER DIGITAL E When RADIO or PLAYER is selected Tuning Tuning Wow Flutter Wow Flutter Noise Noise Filter Filter D E Balance Effect Balance E When DIGITAL is selected Pre Filter Pre Filter Sample Rate Sample Rate Bit Bit Post Filter Post Filter Effect Level Effect Level Direct Level Direct Level Modify Filter Modify Filter Cutoff Freq Cutoff Freq Resonance Resonance Gain Gain Ore 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 100 0 0 100 OFF ON OFF 1 2 1 382 OFF 15 1 OFF ON 0 100 0 100 raise the threshold of the noise suppressor Noise Suppressor LOFII He Function This parameter turns the lo fi box effect on off The sound will appear to be heard from an AM radio By adjusting Tuning you can model the sounds that occur when you adjust the tuning frequency of the radio The sound will appear to be heard from a gramophone The noise caused by scratches and dust on the record are is modeled This allows you to create a lo fi sound by lowering the sample rate and
21. Adjusts the depth of the Chorus effect Adjusts the time needed for the effect sound to be output after the direct sound has been output Adjusts the volume of the effect sound This parameter adjusts the delay time i e the interval for which sound is delayed This parameter adjusts the amount of feedback Changing the amount of feedback causes the number of time the delayed sound is repeated to change as well This adjusts the volume of the delay sound Adjust the volume of the reverb that is applied to the delayed sound For details on reverb refer to Reverb p 146 This parameter adjusts the delay time i e the interval for which sound is delayed This adjusts the volume of the delay sound REVERB Reberb This feature adds reverberation to the sound to model the size of space such as a hall and a room 174 Parameter full name Reverb Type Reverb Time Reverb Tone Setting ROOM HALL 0 1 10 12 12 Function Models the reverberation in a small room Models the reverberation in a concert hall This parameter adjusts the duration time of the reverb Adjusts the tone Insert effect algorithm list Here we will explain the effects used by each algorithm and the order in which they are connected The effect groups and the algorithms in each group are shown below To select the desired algorithm refer to the separate Effect patch list and switch to a patch that uses the des
22. Audio CD Fader Or FCO DisitalRec Turn the TIME VALUE dial clockwise Obey Copyright See Owner s Manual pleas asad onl eu l T appears in the display i ae eee eel Carefully read the condition for permission that are listed on the back cover of this manual and if you agree to the condition press YES ENTER Parameter of CD DigitalREC changes to ON Subsequently you will be able to use digital connections from a digital audio device such as a CD player If you do not agree with the terms press NO EXIT The setting will remain OFF and the System settings screen reappears Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen More functions for the CDX 1 To Prevent Digital recording with CD players 1 Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon 2 Press CURSOR gt to select the System icon TEMFO MARE 1 OHG Bee 3 Press YES ENTER The System settings screen appears 4 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to SS TEM FORGh Bee ee eT e e 1 w Foot 5H PLAY STOP CD DipItalREC Audio CD Fader ON TCD Diaital REC OH 5 Turn the TIME V ALUE dial to select OFF Subsequently it will not be possible to use digital connections from a digital audio device such as a CD player 6 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen S 91A P QIN 194 0 D S 4 O o a 149 More functions for the CDX 1 Prohibiting digit
23. Changing the tempo p 117 r E For details on setting the tempo map refer to Setting the tempo and rhythm pattern Measure Beat Tick or of the song Tempo Map p 117 Hour Minute Second gt Column Switching the Big Time display p 38 88 Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence The Relationship Between Sequences and Phrases The sequence tempo can be changed in the Rhythm Guide setting screen or Tempo O Map screen When the tempo is slowed down the interval during which the phrase In order to use the tempo sounds is lengthened Conversely increasing the tempo makes the interval map to specify the tempo you must change the way in which the rhythm guide is sounded gt Playing the rhythm guide according to the tempo shorter However in either case you cannot change the performance tempo of the phrases the tempo when the phrase is audio recorded themselves lt One measure worth of phrase T J5 1 Hello The phrase itself does not expand map p 118 or contract gt S O oF o Q o oc Q 0 S 7p ovn 50 aog jez 4D N A e ne eet r Tempo Down Se ee How recording works Phrases on Sequence are recorded as described below Play the sample selected for recording 1 From which measure beat and tick where the change to begin 2 Start from the position units from the beginning of the sample and 3 For beats and
24. Foot switch A switch that is operated by stepping on it Various operations can be performed by pressing a pedal instead of operating a button This permits operation even while both hands are occupied such as when you are playing an instrument 204 MIDI Frame This refers to the individual still images that make up a moving picture on a video recorder etc In the context of SMPTE time code or MTC a frame is a unit of time The frame rate selection determines whether a frame corresponds to 1 30th or 1 24th of a second gt Frame rate gt SMPTE time code gt MIDI time code Frame rate The number of frames per second in SMPTE time code etc Also refers to the type of time code indicated thereby The frame rate can be 30 39 97N non drop 29 97D drop 25 or 24 per second gt SMPTE time code gt Frame Initialize To restore the parameters of a device to their basic state Insert effect An effect that is used by inserting it directly into the signal path Examples of insertion effects include distortion equalizer compressor and wah Normally these are used without mixing in the original dry direct sound gt Loop effect Impedance The total resistance of an electrical circuit to an alternating voltage such as audio expressed in units of an Ohm Q When transmitting a signal the output impedance of the transmitting device must match the input impedance of the receiving device If not probl
25. For the audio tracks that you wish to play press STATUS to get the button to light in green Press ZERO KE to return the SONG POSITION to 00 00 00 00 beginning of the song Press PLAY gt to start playback Press STOP W The song stops Adjusting the volume of each track Use the AUDIO TRACK faders to adjust the playback volume of each audio track Silencing a specific audio track Mute 1 Press STATUS to extinguish the light The sound of that track will be silenced muted To hear the sound once again press STATUS to get it to light in green Saving Song settings on a CD RW disc OTE When BUSY indicator is lit CDX 1 is preparing for playback Thus the playback do not immediately start when it is lit In this case PLAY gt blinks A It is not possible to change the STATUS during the song is playing The following parameters can be saved on a CD RW disc e Mixer parameter e Maker parameter e Rhythm Guide parameter e Tempo Map parameter e Sequence parameter e Effects Location parameter e Song parameter e Master parameter Saving Song settings i 126 Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon Press CURSOR __ gt to select the CD R RW Disc icon ZAME Press YES ENTER The CD R RW Disc Menu are displayed as icon Make sure that the cursor is located at the nna SAVE SONG Save Song icon t BEE FORMAT OFTIM ERCK
26. Mid Ratio Middle Ratio 1 1 0 1 16 0 1 INF This parameter sets the ratio at which the output in the middle frequency band is increased when the input level has dropped below the middle threshold level High Ratio High Ratio 1 1 0 1 16 0 1 INF This parameter sets the ratio at which the output in the middle frequency band is increased when the input level has dropped below the High threshold level Low Attack Low Attack 0 100 ms This parameter sets the time until when the low frequency band expander starts working after the input level has exceeded the low threshold level Mid Attack Middle Attack 0 100 ms This parameter sets the time until when the middle frequency band expander starts working after the input level has exceeded the middle threshold level High Attack High Attack 0 100 ms This parameter sets the time until when the High frequency band expander starts working after the input level has exceeded the High threshold level Low Release Low Release 50 5000 ms This parameter sets the time until when the low frequency band expander stops working after the input level has dropped below the low threshold level Mid Release Middle Release 50 5000 ms This parameter sets the time until when the middle frequency band expander stops working after the input level has dropped below the middle threshold level High Release High Release 50 5000 ms This parameter sets the time until when the High frequency band expander s
27. NewPitch line Turn to TIME VALUE dial to set the interval of the pitch changing by semitone unit Press CURSOR to move the cursor to P Fine line Turn the TIME VALUE dial to make fine adjustments in one cent units 1 100th of a semitone to the amount of change from the original pitch Press CURSOR move the cursor to Grade line Turn to TIME VALUE dial to select the quality of the sound after the pitch changing process adjustable in three levels Grade can be set in three levels 1 3 to specify the quality of the resulting sound Higher settings will require more processing time Press YES ENTER After a while the changing pitch sample is assigned to the destination pad If the destination pad already contains a sample the Overwrite message appears If it is OK to overwrite the existing sample press YES ENTER If you do not want to overwrite the existing sample press NO EXIT Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen re Pitch Change requires more processing time than other sample editing operations Also the audio quality of the stretched sample may be inferior to that of the original sample NEM 1 semitone 100 cents Grade 1 2 3 lt lt For sound with a dull attack For sound with a sharp attack Making fine adjustments to the location at which a sample starts ends When you arrange samples in a sequence track to create a song you will s
28. Owner s Manual p 97 Nore When you carry out the Exchange Track procedure the entire contents of the sequence tracks will be exchanged It is not possible to specify a region of time that will be exchanged NEM The status data of the sequence tracks will also be exchanged Copying the contents of a sequence track Copy Track The contents of a sequence track can be copied to another sequence track When you execute the Copy Track operation the entire 1 Press PAD SEQUENCING EDIT contents of the sequence track will be copied It is not EDIT lights and the Sequence Edit menu are displayed as icons possible to copy only a 2 Press CURSOR lt 1 gt Itoselectthe HAAAY TRACK _ pope nena Copy Track icon a wr H a Eeo Mpg ley 3 Press YES ENTER The Copy Track screen appears Cory TRACK ak Fram Track COPI tOo Track B 4 Press CURSOR Q to move the cursor to Copy from Track 5 Turn to TIME VALUE dial to select the copy source track 6 Press CURSOR lJ to move the cursor to Copy from Track 7 Turn to TIME VALUE dial to select the track copy destination 8 Press YES ENTER The contents of the copy source sequence track is copied to the copy destination OTE track f the copy destination track has alread 9 Press DISPLAY return to the Basic screen BEQUCHICE TACK NAR ATCAY been recorded the entire contents will be lost Editing a specif
29. Recording will start at the moment you press a pad Press CURSOR J to move the cursor to Quantize Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select OFF Press PAD SEQUENCING CREATE CREATE will light and recording will begin as you specified in step 6 Press pads to record them When you are finish recording press PAD SEQUENCING CREATE CREATE goes out extinguished and the display returns to the Basic screen Return to the location at which you began recording and press PLAY gt to play back your performance and listen to the result HINT It is convenient to use the built in rhythm guide when recording If you record along with the rhythm guide you will be able to edit the track in units of measures and will also be able to synchronize the performance with an external device For details on the rhythm guide refer to Using the rhythm guide p 116 MED If SEQ PLAY is off press CREATE and it will be turned on lit automatically Also the STATUS of all audio tracks will go dark For details on the Quantize setting refer to Correcting timing inaccuracies while you record p 92 MED e In step 9 if you press STOP W CREATE will blink recording standby mode Then press CREATE once again recording will begin e After recording you can press UNDO REDO p 138 to return to the previous conditions Arranging audio samples to create a song S
30. The Pan settings screen appears 2 Press CURSOR lt _ toselectthe INPUT GIJ INPUT knob display 9 2 T N LED x 4 4 232 YY 5 3 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to set the pan 4 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen For details on the jack to use for connections and on the INPUT SELECT button refer to Panel Descriptions Rear panel p 30 and Panel Descriptions INPUT section p 21 MEM For details on adjusting the volume of the device connected to the OUTPUT jack refer to the operating manual for that device mem The pan you set here is automatically reflected in the pan of the recording destination audio track When you play back you will hear the same pan setting as when you recorded After recording you are free to adjust the pan setting of each audio track Setting the left right position pan of each audio track p 132 re When recording in stereo using SIMUL set the input pan to L100 the far left before you record If you set the input pan except for L100 the two input sources will be mixed and recorded 113 as D O D S D a a a D Q O R 2 Co Prepare for recording Multitrack recording Tuning an instrument Tuner The CDX 1 has a built in chromatic tuner function that allows you to tune your instrument quickly The built in tuner supports both guitar and bass guitar As an example
31. e 02 49 mi 49 z 9 QO Q e A F D 179 Insert effect algorithm list 3 VO GT AMP Vocal Guitar Amp This algorithm is for use when simultaneously recording a vocal and electric guitar For the guitar you can produce an amp sound using a preamp and speaker modeling E MIC Parameter full name Compressor Equalizer Noise Suppressor Delay COMP EG H ns ADL COMPHRAMP SP LAE ALY Compressor PreAmp Setting Speaker Noise Delay Modeling Suppressor Function COMP Compressor Compressor the entire output signals when the input volume exceeds a specified value Effect On Off Effect On Off Sustain Sustain Attack Attack Level Output Level OFF ON 0 100 0 100 0 100 EQ Equalizer A 4 band equalizer Effect On Off Effect On Off Low Gain Low Gain Low Mid Gain Low Mid Gain Low Mid Freq Low Mid Freq Low Mid Q Low Mid Q High Mid Gain High Mid Gain High Mid Freq High Mid Freq High Mid Q High Mid Q High Gain High Gain Level Output Level OFF ON 20 20 dB 20 20 dB 100 10 0 kHz 0 5 16 20 20 dB 100 10 0 kHz 0 5 16 20 20 dB 20 20 dB This parameter turns the compressor effects on off Adjusts the range time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain Adjusts the strength of the attack Larger values will result in a sharper attac
32. 1 8 8 8 Rock 1 OFF Value INPUT NORMAL INPUT REC DRY TRACK1 8 TRACK1 amp 2 7 amp 8 MASTER Value Mixdown Premastr LiveMix PopMix DanceMix KingMix HardComp SoftComp ClnComp DnceComp OrchComp VacalComp Accoustic RockBand Orchestr LoBoost Brighten DJsVoice PhoneVox Cassette Phono 24 12 dB Value L100 0 R100 211 gal pad lt pad 3 i 4 Eg ep va MIDI Implementation Model CDX 1 Version 1 01 Apl 16 2001 1 RECOGNIZED RECEIVE DATA E Channel Voice Message Note On Off Receive the note number which is designated with RxNote in the MIDI channel number which is designated with Pads Rx Ch in the UTILITY MIDI Status Second Third 9nH mmH HH n MIDI Channel No 00H 0FH ch 1 ch 16 00H 7FH 0 127 01H 7FH 1 127 00H NOTE OFF mm Note No ll Velocity Program Change Works as bank switch when MIDI channel number is set for playing the sample Status Second CnH ppH n MIDI Channel No OOH OFH ch 1 ch 16 pp Program No OOH 3FH 0 63 E Channel Mode Message All Sound Off Controller Number 120 Mutes all sounding notes in the MIDI channel number which is designated with Pads Rx Ch in the UTILITY MIDI Status Second Third BnH 78H 00H n MIDI Channel No OOH OFH ch 1 ch 16 All Note Off Controller Number 123 Mutes all sounding notes in the MIDI channel number which is desi
33. 100k ohms LINE 30k ohms Nominal Output Level Master Out 0 dBu Output Impedance Master Out 1k ohms Phones 22 ohms Recommended Load Impedance Master Out Phones 8 600 ohms 10 k ohms or greater Residual Noise Level Master Out 77 dBu or less INPUT LINE ASENS MAX AIHF A typ Interface Digital I O Coaxial Optical conforms to S P DIF Display 69 0 x 25 0 mm backlit LCD Connectors MIC In Jack 1 2 1 4 inch TRS phone type MIC In Jack 1 2 XLR type Guitar Bass Hi Z Jack 1 4 inch phone type Line In Jack L R RCA phono type Digital In Connectors Coaxial type Optical type Master Out Jack L R RCA phono type Digital Out Connectors Coaxial type Optical type Phones Jack Stereo 1 4 inch phone type Foot Switch Jack 1 4 inch phone type MIDI Connectors In Out Thru CD RW Drive x12 Write x10 Rewrite x32 Read Power Supply DC 12 V Supplied AC Adaptor PSB 2U Current Draw 2 8A Dimensions 456 0 W x 330 0 D x 94 0 H mm 18 W x 13 D x 3 3 4 H inches Weight 5 0 kg 11 lbs excluding AC adaptor Accessories AC Adaptor PSB 2U Owner s Manual Effect Patch List Demo Disc Songs Samples CD RW blank disc Option Foot Switch FS 5U BOSS Pedal Switch DP 2 0 dBu 0 775 Vrms In the interest of product improvement the specifications and or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice ep O cq O fab e
34. 75 Editing the sample of a pad The 512 samples 8 pads x 64 stored in the CDX 1 can be edited in a variety of ways such as by adjusting their volume or length Samples can be edited either by creating anew sample for another pad or by simply modifying the settings of the same pad Adjusting the volume of a sample Sample Level 76 The volume at which a pad plays when you press it can be adjusted separately for each pad This conveniently allows you to achieve the appropriate relative volume levels among your pads 1 Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice Alternatively press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons FAD FARAMETER Gy KB op E OIVIGE TRIM 2 Make sure that the cursor is located at the Stee FAD FARAMETER Pad Parameter icon E TT seid DIOTE TRIM 3 Press YES ENTER The Pad Parameter screen appears 4 Press the pad for which you wish to make settings The corresponding pad blinks MEMO 5 Press CURSOR L to move the cursor to FAD FARAH EFH 11i7 16 aema ii er a LOOF Point If you wish to make settings phen wees Lenasath lt End 00009615 for a sample of another bank Lewe 100 you must first switch to the desired pad bank gt Switching pad banks 6 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to set the volume The volume can be adjusted in a range of 0 100 This setting is also be used as the volume level p 54 whe
35. Adjusting the mastering tools p 134 When you are finished with test listening press STOP W If you wish to write to the CD R disc press CD BURNING and continue with the procedure Writing to a CD R disc p 135 Ore Once you carry out mixdown pad sequence held in internal memory of CDX 1 will be lost MEMO If you wish to cancel MIXDOWN MODE MIX DONW is lit press MIX DONW once again A You cannot listen the song in CD burning mode NEM If you press PLAY P to play back the master track form top each time MEM If you wish to redo mixing down press master track STATUS to make the button blink in red Return to step 2 of Mixing down above 133 Q cE 5 ce Qo v g D MO Shai v a S a8 o3 oe oS fab ie 4p Editing a recorded performance to create an audio CD Adjusting the mastering tools 134 The mastering tools are a convenient set of tools that divide the sound into high frequency mid frequency and low frequency ranges and make the volume consistent so that the audio CD can be created with the optimal levels There are 19 mastering tool patches so you can select the patch that is most appropriate for your situation If MASTERING TOOLS will turn on the data being written to the CD R disc will use the mastering tools In step 2 of Listen to the result of Mixing down above the Mastering track sc
36. Delete Sample se seessesssssessosssssseesosssosseessessecssessessessssssessoessssssssossssssossosssessessessse 65 Deleting samples MG viG Ua y ome nies EET N E 65 Deleting all samples of a pad bank Bank Erase uu eee cee eceeseeseeeeceeeeeeesecseesseseessseaseaeegs 65 Preventing accidental erasure of padS Bank Protect esseeseeseossosseesesssesseessossosseessossesseossossesses 66 Protecting UNprotectime a pad Dank onrossurae airesin EE NEN RERA ERSA 66 Saving Pad Sequence on a CD RW disc seessesseeseeseossesseoseosseeseessossesssessossesssoesosseoseesseeseessessesseessessess 67 More about Saving Pad Seguen E siorr a E EE E 67 Savine Pady Se GUC CE esri anr E easesie ns atoupriue Spd si maruacsuht aay toate ceneaueseeeeutearaaat 67 Loading Pad Sequence from a CD RW disSC eeseesseeseeseossoeseeseossoeseoseossessesssossesssessoesesssossesseeseessesses 68 Playing the pad samples cccccceseccesecenseceneeeesesensecenssonsesenseseneees 69 Basic Ways to play samples sennae seinere annee aa a e a tearm eE AEE TE 69 Pliye 2 SATIN IC oi aana A E E NE 69 Adjusting the Overall Sample Vote nanana E RET 69 Playing samples Simultaneous yesin ani aAa RE REIESE E EER AE EA 69 Playing pads while audiotracks play Dack ersen iia anr naa EO 69 Playing pads while you play back an audio CD sissssccssssesesstigesscasetnsevacsuseeceocitnacutiassebeasansdsantbes 69 Changing how a pad starts and stops sounding Pad Play
37. Effect Level Reverb Send Level Doubling Delay Time Effect Level Reverb Parameter name Reverb Type Reverb Time Tone Display PAN EQ StereoLink EQ On Off Low Gain Low Freq High Gain High Freq CHORUS DELAY DOUBL N SEND REVERB SEND Display Effect Type Rate Depth Pre Delay Effect Level Delay Time Feedback Effect Level Reverb Send Delay Time Effect Level Display Reverb Type Reverb Time Tone E Rhythm Guide Parameter Parameter name Rhythm Guide Auto On Off Beat Tempo Pattern Rhythm Guide Level Display Beat Tempo Pattern Level The settable range for Pattern will change depending on the Beat 208 Initial Value current panel setting current panel setting current panel setting current panel setting LINE L R OFF 0 dB 300 Hz 0 dB 4 0 kHz 0 IN TR1 8 PAD 20 RHYTHM 10 current panel setting Initial Value DELAY 10 10 10 0 mS 100 370 30 30 50 20 0 mS 100 Initial Value HALL 2 0 0 Initial Value OFF 4 4 120 00 01 60 Value 0 127 0 127 0 127 0 127 MIC1 MIC2 GUITAR BASS LINE L R SIMUL MUTE L100 0 R100 OFF ON OFF ON 12 12 dB 40 Hz 1 5 kHz 12 12 dB 500 Hz 18 0 kHz 0 100 0 100 0 100 Value CHORUS DELAY DOUBL N 0 100 0 100 0 5 50 0 mS 0 100 10 1000 mS 0 100 0 100 0 100 05 50 0 mS 0 100 Value ROOM HALL 0 1 10 0 12 0 12 Value OFF AUTO ON 1 1 8 1 1
38. Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the doubling effect on off Delay Time Delay Time 0 5 50 mS This parameter adjusts the delay time i e the interval for which sound is delayed Separation Separation 100 100 Adjusts the diffusion The panning of the direct sound and effect sound can be spread to left and right Effective when stereo output is used Effect Level Effect Level 0 120 This adjusts the volume of the delay sound NEM The best effect is achieved when stereo output is used 202 Insert effect algorithm list TRM TRM PAN Tremolo Pan Tremolo is an effect that creates a cyclic change in volume Pan cyclically moves the stereo position between left and right when stereo output is used Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the tremolo pan effect on off Mode Mode Selection for tremolo or pan And selection for the effect will use TRM TRI The volume will change cyclically Smooth change will be produced TRM SQR The volume will change cyclically Abrupt change will be produced PAN TRI The sound will be moved cyclically between left and right Smooth change will be produced PAN SQR The sound will be moved cyclically between left and right Abrupt change will be produced Rate Rate 0 100 Adjust the rate at which the effect will operate Depth Depth 0 100 Adjusts the depth of the effect S ATK SLO ATK Slow Attack This produces a volume swell effect violin lik
39. ITE upiana Lh OE standby mode 12 Press PLAY gt The sequence will play back and will begin being written to the CD R disc 13 To stop recording press STOP W 14 If you wish to finalize the CD R disc follow the procedure in Finalizing a CD R disc p 136 163 Memo 164 Appendices Troubleshooting If you encounter problems with the operation of the CDX 1 first check the following points If after these steps the problem is still unresolved consult your nearest Roland service center or authorized Roland distributor Problems with the sound There is no sound whatsoever Is the power of the CDX 1 or any connected device turned on Are all of the connections correct p 32 Is any of the connection cables broken Is the amp or mixer volume turned up Is the Master fader up The volume level of the instrument connected to the INPUT jacks MIC1 MIC2 GUITAR BASS LINE is too low Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor The input source cannot be heard Did you adjust the SENS knob Has INPUT SELECT been muted The INPUT SELECT indicator will be dark Has the INPUT REC LEVEL knob been set to MIN There is no sound from the audio tracks Are any audio track STATUS illuminated green Are the audio track faders up Are the audio tracks empty or re
40. OUT button esesnssssesensssssssenrsssssserssssssersesssesrresssssrreres 27 P PAD BAIN KS neuk tether N 54 Pad Danks mucna 54 PAD BANKS Button riene ea E 24 Pad Crossfade sar otic eneadneddednoas 71 Pad Pliye AN 70 PADRECC DUON svesssaceszcenstscettccncsacwet nts cebewcessanacedescienest 25 PAD X FADE putto aceno te an 24 PAD SEQ LEVELT d act svioieteiestriertctne tecieriuteeieeen 25 Paid eaaa tao Mi ee aa et a 54 AA cote EEEE E EE EAEE case EA E ATA 132 FAN BOHOM mironi a AAE 23 e EE E ATIE PEIEE E T ee E E E EES A TA A E A 99 Paste ICOM arisen ANA 99 Pae senecs secaaeansesntetanreaniancneates 141 PACA GbOse soles eae anoles ea 22 PATTERN TEMPO button 2 00 ccccccceeeeeeeeeees 23 PEAK IGICalOrs aenar eel les 21 PRONE Dy OC senseca R 31 PHONES FAC oranana a NE 31 PHONES RHOD aceia E ieee oa 22 phrase CANO sonan i E Dividing BASIE cuisean E aS Inserting MOINS ereen a N a PASTO eadi NE PLAY button Power a URATO E AE TA E tare E T ET 34 O Sao aaa 33 OW EIR Swit ieie oa N E 26 PrE TICC OP guroni o a T muioiianes 62 Preset patche S pniennn nanana 141 PEOVICW sisis a ius hgeastaats 139 Q Oane oaei n N REE 92 R Real tiie RECOLGIING ar aa Matas 90 REC CD RECORDER button 00 eee eeeeeecceeeeeeeeee 27 REO T 138 REPEAT DOOD sisari tiaren n eoanetaesiad 27 Repeat Han Ch On eren ae 51 FRES IA MINS 525s dvanteiennsvaynyssededadag akin sbinsvattnacidincsttsdiaetponds 63 Reverb aana N 146 IRE VERB DUWO primiers op
41. SCMS This is because the unit is intended solely for musical production and is designed not to be subject to restrictions as long as it is used to record works such as your own composi tions that do not infringe on the copyrights of others SCMS is a feature that prohibits second generation and later copying through a digital connection It is built into MD recorders and other consumer digital audio equipment as a copyright protection feature e Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copyright held by a third party Roland assumes no responsibility whatsoever with regard to any infringe ments of third party copyrights arising through your use of this unit About the License Agreement e The CDX 1 and its CD R capability are designed to allow you to reproduce material to which you have copyright or material which the copyright owner has granted you permission to copy Accordingly reproduction of Music CD or other copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner avoiding technical prohibiting features of second generation and later copying like SCMS or others constitutes copyright infringement and may incur penalties even in case such reproduction is for your own personal use and enjoyment private use Consult a copyright specialist or special publications for more detailed information on obtaining such permission from copyright holders Introduction Before you begin Check the contents
42. The beginning The end of f th th Looping from start point to end point R ai e y ARE LS AIV WW For the significance of each point and details on how to Cc gt change the setting refer to Adjusting the start end t t g 11 Start Point End Point points of the sound p 78 LOOP END The beginning The end of Looping from loop point to end point j a a h nee MEMO IVN If you wish to make settings for a sample of another pad D bank you must first switch to that pad bank p 54 t t t Start Point Loop Point End Point 7 If you wish to make settings for other samples press the appropriate pad and repeat steps 4 and 5 8 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 73 Playing the pad samples Preventing specific samples from sounding simultaneously Mute Groups Samples that do not need to sound simultaneously or that you do not want to be heard simultaneously can be assigned to the same mute group The CDX 1 has MEMO seven mute groups and samples that are assigned to the same mute group will not If you press two or more pads sound together with each other that are assigned to the same mute group the sample that was pressed first will be muted silenced Playing samples that are set to the same Mute group Example PAD 3 a Ny Press Release 1 a a ie PAD 2 M ooo uy Press i Release PAD 1 bw B 1 Press Release Press Release Time 1 Press PAD RECORDING TE
43. The number of samples that can be played simultaneously will not increase even if you sample in mono However mono sampling uses only half the memory of stereo sampling MEM When SEQ PLAY lights an audio CD is inserted and the Sequence function will automatically be turned off Also when you press SEQ PLAY turn on an audio CD will not be played back even if an audio CD is inserted au pad Es Q r 4 xe pad a sp pad 5 E O 02 Playing the pad samples Changing how a pad starts and stops sounding Pad Play 1 Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice Alternatively you can press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons FAD FARAMETER fe ae gi AM Be eae TRIM 2 Make sure that the cursor is located at the Stee FAD FARAMETER pad parameter icon F TT a _ OFTIM DIVIDE TRIM 3 Press YES ENTER The pad parameter screen appears 4 Press the pad for the sample for which you ll be making settings The selected pad blinks 5 Make sure that the cursor is located at the FAD FARAH EFH z117 16 Pad Play line Pad Play LoorF Mode OFF F Start Point 00000000 6 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to specify how the pad will sound Pad Play GATE Press the pad gt the sound begins Release the pad the sound stops TRIGGER Press the pad gt the sound begins The sound will continue even after you re
44. The rhythm guide can also be used as a metronome when you are not recording Playing stopping the rhythm guide Each time you press RHYTHM GUIDE ON OFF the setting will cycle in the order of auto blinking on lit gt off extinguished Blinking The rhythm will sound according to whether the song is playing or stopped Lit The rhythm will sound regardless of whether the song is playing Dark The rhythm will be stopped Adjusting the Volume of the Rhythm Guide 1 Press RHYTHM GUIDE PATTERN TEMPO The Rhythm Guide Setting screen appears 2 Make sure that the cursor is located at the TMCS Lewe PAN Level line Beat 4 4 Pattern Rock i Tehro a 170 00 3 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the volume 4 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Changing the time signature 1 Press RHYTHM GUIDE PATTERN TEMPO The Rhythm Guide Setting screen appears 2 Press CURSOR lU to move the cursorto BEEE Level 100 Beat line Beat 474 Pattern Rock 1 TemF a 170 00 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the desired time signature 4 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 116 Ry Setting the tempo and rhythm pattern of the song Tempo Map p 117 HINT The rhythm guide can also be used when you record pad operations on a sequence track gt Refer to Recording pad operations while you play the pads Realtime Recording p 90 HINT Effects ca
45. To cancel the operation press NO EXIT When initialization is complete you re returned to the Basic screen Basic operation of the CDX 1 OU jab ee O O D jab Oo gt Oo v D gt lt The meaning of each Initialize icon Initialize Global Parameters icon hae SLOGAL EFE IEEE GLOBAL MIRE ALL When you select this icon Global parameters p 40 will return to the factory settings Initialize Effect Patch icon REG What is a patch p 141 MINER ALL When you select this icon effect patches U001 U100 will be initialized to the factory settings MEMO Sa ae Mixer parameters refer to Initialize Mixer Parameters icon P the parameters that can be set in the screens accessed by pressing PAN EQ DELAY and REVERB GLOBAL FA When you select this icon the mixer parameters will be initialized to the factory settings Initialize All Parameters icon Joo gt om GLOEAL FA When you select this icon the global parameters effect patches and mixer parameters will all be initialized The display screen contrast will also be initialized to the factory setting 41 What you need to do to create your own CD Steps taken in producing an original CD The following introduces you to a number of paths that you could choose to follow in carrying out the steps needed to create your own original CD using a CD R disc
46. Ww O Q s D e D 3 217 Specifications CDX 1 MULTITRACK CD RECORDER AUDIO SAMPLE WORKSTATION Audio Data Format CDX 1 Original Format R DAC Maximum Polyphony Monaural x 8 Stereo x 4 Total Audio Tracks Number of Tracks 8 Maximum Simultaneously Playback Tracks 8 Maximum Simultaneously Recording Tracks 2 Data Type STANDARD LONG 1 LONG 2 Recording Time Data Type Time STANDARD About 15 minutes LONG 1 About 19 minutes LONG 2 About 23 minutes Audio Sample PAD Sample PAD 512 Phrases 8 PAD x 64 Bank Maximum Polyphony 4 Stereo Mono Memory Capacity 15 MB When expanding the Memory DIMM 128 MB 111 MB Data Type HIGH STANDARD LONG 1 LONG 2 Sampling Time Data Type Time HIGH About 5 minutes STANDARD About 7 minutes LONG 1 About 9 minutes LONG 2 About 11 minutes When expanding the Memory DIMM 128MB Data Type Time HIGH About 43 minutes STANDARD About 58 minutes LONG 1 About 69 minutes LONG 2 About 87 minutes Maximum number of phrases events to be memorized 2000 phrases 218 Signal Processing AD Conversion 24 bits 64 times oversampling DA Conversion 24 bits 128 times oversampling Sample rate 44 1 kHz Frequency Response 20 Hz 20 kHz 0 3 dB Nominal Output Level variable Guitar Bass Hi Z 26 dBu SENS MAX MIC 1 2 56 dBu SENS MAX LINE 0 dBu SENS MAX Input Impedance Guitar Bass Hi Z 1M ohms MIC 1 2
47. _ 2 os o oc ok 0 eo no on 50 a3 jez 4 N Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence Finely Adjusting the Timing of Each Phrase Adjust Timing 104 The positioning of phrases on the sequence tracks is determined with the following formats From which measure beat and tick number Start The length of expression in beats and ticks Duration The Adjust Timing function is for changing these values Adjust Timing comprises three screens The first screen is for selecting phrases and the second and third screen is changing settings Press PAD SEQUENCING EDIT EDIT lights and the Sequence Edit menu are displayed as icons Make sure that the cursor is located at the Adjust Timing icon Press YES ENTER The Adjust Timing screen appears ADJUST TIMING dk ak we EDIT DUF ation 7 010 Press CURSOR Q A sequence track select mini menu appears ADJUST TIMING ik a TRE EHT DUE Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the sequence track A D that you wish to edit and press YES ENTER A mini menu disappears Use the REW lt q FF PP or the TIME VALUE dial to select the phrase that you wish to adjust The currently selected phrase will be highlighted in black When the phrase to be adjust is highlighted press YES ENTER That phrase is selected and the Edit screen appears Press CURSOR O J to select Start or Duration
48. amp Press CURSOR lt __ gt to select the audio track for which you wish to make settings When you wish to use the loop effect to the PAD use CURSOR lt _ L gt to move the PAD NEM You can continue pressing CURSOR lt __ L gt and adjust the send level of the input source When the input source is recorded sampled adding of the loop effects the sound with the added effects is recorded sampled You can also continue pressing CURSOR __ gt and adjust the send level of the rhythm guide Turn the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the send level Turn the RTN LEVEL knob to adjust the return level Press LOOP EFFECTS REVERB once again A Reverb Setting Screen appears Reverb TYFe For details on the parameters refer to Mixer Bauere Tine effect parameter functions p 174 Tone Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen I For details on pan settings for an audio track refer to Setting the left right position pan of an audio track More functions for the CDX 1 Creating a backup CD RW disc If you have a CD RW disc that contains important performance data it is a good idea to copy it onto a another CD RW disc to create a backup before the data is lost or damaged Backing up song data on a CD RW disc Before you begin the backup you must obtain a CD RW disc that has been formatted on the CDX 1 gt Preparing a CD RW disc for use p 110
49. for example you can mix down sequence tracks and pads together with audio tracks or mix down only pads and or sequences Even if a CD RW disc is not inserted you can mix down just pads sequences if internal memory contains pads sequences When you mix down using pads sequences the time available for the mixdown will be the remaining amount of sampling memory For this reason if you need to perform lengthy mixdowns we recommend that you expand the memory The time available for mixdown can be checked in the Song Information screen Owner s Manual p 39 Press AUDIO TRACK RECORD MIX DOWN If the pads sequences contained in the CDX 1 s internal memory a message of Also use PAD SEQ for Mixdown appears MIX DOWN blinks If you press YES ENTER you will be able to use pads sequences and MIX DOWN will light If you do not want to use pads sequences press NO EXIT For the subsequent steps refer to step 1 of Mixing down Owner s Manual p 133 If you want to use sequence tracks press SEQ PLAY to make it light For sequence tracks that you want to include in the mixdown For details refer to Playing sequence tracks and audio tracks simultaneously Owner s Manual p 96 For audio tracks that you want to include in the mixdown press STATUS to make the button light in green Make sure that master track STATUS light in red Press ZERO to return the SONG POSITION to 00
50. p 73 to specify whether the sample are looped played repeatedly NEM While changing the end point or loop point in order to effectively edit even extremely long samples the beginning of the sound can be automatically switched to play not from the start point but from just before the end point HINT In step 6 if you press YES ENTER while the value of StartPoint is selected the sample to be changed sounds from the beginning goen gt al Press CENTER _ While listening this sound press YES ENTER again that time location is set as a start point automatically When the Length End or LoopPoint is selected you can set the end or loop point with the same procedure as above Editing the sample of a pad Automatically removing Empty Portion at the Beginnings and Ends of Samples This automatically removes any bank portions that may come before the sample starts ti play or after the sample is finished 1 Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice Alternatively press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons FAD FARAMETER Fg DA Ey in g SE Sallal OFTIH DIVIDE TRIM n D Se eita FARAM OFTIM DIVIDEN UIK 3 Press YES ENTER 2 Press CURSOR gt to select the Trim Senia TRIM ZON lat The Trim Sample screen appears TRIM SAMPLE Tar set Bank 1 LEW Threshold 4 Make sure that the cursor is located
51. will blink indicating that the current location has been registered as the repeat start point A palaces ZERO STOP PLAY CJC CD RECORDER If you wish to re do the registration press REPEAT A 4 gt B if the current location is the same as the repeat start point A and the registration will be cancelled If the current location is past the repeat start point A press REPEAT A lt gt B twice to cancel the registration 3 Turn the TIME VALUE dial or press REW lt q FF gt gt to move to the location where you wish to stop repeating 4 Press REPEAT A lt gt B REPEAT A lt gt B will light indicating that the current location has been registered as the repeat end point B REPEAT ZERO STOP PLAY CD RECORDER If you wish to re do the registration press REPEAT A lt gt B to cancel the registration and then re register starting with the repeat start point A 5 When you press PLAY P the region between the A and B points you registered will play repeatedly Canceling the registration 1 When REPEAT A lt gt B is lit press REPEAT A lt gt B once again REPEAT A lt gt B will go out The Repeat function will be cancelled and the repeat start point A and end point B registrations will also be erased 128 A The Repeat function and Punch in out recording cannot be used together MEM If you want to repeat at the location of a marker move to the l
52. you can have the setting for a pair of audio tracks linked so that they adjust in the same way This parameter turns the equalizer effect on off This sets the gain 12 to 12 dB for the low range equalizer shelving type This sets the center frequency 40Hz to 1 5 KHz for the low range equalizer shelving type This sets the gain 12 to 12 dB for the high range equalizer shelving type This sets the center frequency 500 Hz to 18 kHz for the high range equalizer shelving type CHORUS DELAY DOUBL N Chorus Delay Doubling Parameter full name Effect Type E When CHORUS is selected Rate Depth Pre Delay Effect Level E When DELAY is selected Delay Time Feedback Effect Level Reverb Send E When DOUBL N is selected Delay Time Effect Level Setting CHORUS DELAY DOUBL N 0 100 0 100 0 5 50 mS 0 100 10 1000 mS 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 5 50 mS 0 100 Function A sound with a subtly shifted pitch is added to the direct sound making the final output sound thicker and broader This creates a thicker sound by applying a delayed sound to the direct sound By adding a slightly time delayed sound to the direct sound this produces the impression that multiple sources are sounding together a doubling effect The delayed sound will be output from the side opposite to which the playback track has been panned Adjusts the rate of the Chorus effect
53. you can use the Undo function to cancel the result of the preceding operation and return the data to its original state Conversely you can use the Redo function to cancel the last performed Undo operation and go back to the recorded or edited data Undoing a recording or editing operation Undo When Undo is available UNDO REDO will light 1 Press UNDO REDO UNDO REDO will go out and the previous recording or editing operation will be undone Canceling the Undo Redo 1 Press UNDO REDO UNDO REDO will light and the previous undo operation will be undone 138 More functions for the CDX 1 Cueing to a precise locaton Preview When you are editing the performance of an audio track or sequence track there are times when you need to determine a precise editing location such as the beginning of a specific sound or the point where a break begins By using the Preview function you can search for the desired point while listening to the sound and adjust the location with great precision Adjusting the current location while listening to the preceding and or following sound Now Time Sound data 1second 1second PREVIEW PREVIEW TO FROM 1 For the audio track whose sound you wish to check press STATUS to make it light in green To play back a sequence track turn SEQ PLAY on Then in the Sequence Play List screen select the sequence track A D that you wish to play gt Playing
54. 1 089 a TRE Dur 7 Oso 5 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the sequence track A D that you wish to edit and press YES ENTER A mini menu disappears 6 Use the REW 44 FF PP or the TIME VALUE dial to select the phrase that you wish to erase The currently selected phrase will be highlighted in black 7 After you have specified the erase phrase press YES ENTER The specified phrase is erased 8 When you are finished editing the sequence track press DISPLAY EDIT goes out extinguished and the display returns to the Basic screen Mem If SEQ PLAY is off press EDIT and it will be turned on lit automatically Also the STATUS of all audio tracks will go dark MEM In step 5 also press NO EXIT a mini menu disappears EMD To cancel the erase press UNDO REDO p 138 after step 7 101 gt 3 _ 2 os o oc ok 0 eo no on 50 a3 jez 4 N Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence Inserting a phrase in another location Insert 102 If something has already been recorded at the insert destination subsequent phrases will be moved backward by the length of the phrase that is pasted Press PAD SEQUENCING EDIT EDIT will light and the Sequence Edit menu will be displayed as icons Press CURSOR gt to select the Insert Saa INSERT FHRASE N a Ge PIPI f HOLE FLIT FASTE Waki Press YES ENTER IHSERT P
55. 1 64 Pad Bank Protection Protect OFF OFF ON Sequence Parameter Parameter name Display Initial Value Value Sequence play ON OFF OFF OFF ON Sequence track status OFF OFF ON Pad Sequencing Parameter Parameter name Display Initial Value Value Recording Mode Select RecMode SEL REAL TIME REAL TIME STEP Sequence Track Select Tr SEL A A D Real Time Recording Parameter name Display Initial Value Value Quantize Quantize OFF MEAS J a Js D 3 A A OFF Start With Start W Cont1M Norm Cont1M Cont2M PAD Step Recording Parameter name Display Initial Value Value Step Step SMPL SMPL MEAS J J Js D Ds D As Duration Duration 100 1 100 Song Parameter Parameter name Display Initial Value Value Song Name Name 10 characters Marker Stop Marker Stop OFF OFF ON Tuner Parameter Parameter name Display Initial Value Value Pitch PITCH 440 435 445 LCD Contrast Parameter Parameter name Display Initial Value Value LCD Contrast LCD Contrast 8 0 15 System Parameter Parameter name Display Initial Value Value Big Time Display Time Disp TIME CODE TIME CODE MEASURE Foot Switch Foot SW PLAY STOP PLAY STOP PUNCH I O SAMPLER TRIG Audio CD Fader Audio CD Fader ON OFF ON CD Digital REC CD DigitalREC OFF OFF ON Digital Copy Protect D Copyprotect ON THRU ON WAVE file preview length Wave Preview 4sec lsec 10sec 210 Parameter List E MIDI Parameter Parameter name Display Rhythm MIDI Channel Rhy
56. COMP Compressor Compressor the entire output signals when the input volume exceeds a specified value Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the compressor effects on off Sustain Sustain 0 100 Adjusts the range time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain Attack Attack 0 100 Adjusts the strength of the attack Larger values will result in a sharper attack creating a more clearly defined sound Level Output Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume RNG Ring Modulator This creates a bell like sound The sound will be unmusical and lack distinctive pitches Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the ring modulator effect on off Frequency Frequency 0 100 This adjusts the frequency of the internal oscillator Effect Level Effect Level 0 100 This adjusts the volume of the effect sound Direct Level Direct Level 0 100 This adjusts the volume of the direct sound EQ Equalizer A 4 band equalizer Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the equalizer effect on off Low Gain Low Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the bass equalizer Low Mid Gain Low Mid Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the low midrange equalizer Low Mid Freq Low Mid Freq 100 10 0 kHz This parameter sets the central frequency for the low midrange equalizer Low Mid Q Low
57. De esser Useful for reducing sibilant or S sounds produced by a vocalist Effect On Off Effect On Off Sibilant Level Sibilant Level Level Level OFF ON 0 100 0 100 This parameter turns the de esser effect on off Adjusts the sensitivity relative to the input volume which controls how the effect is applied Adjusts the volume ENH Enhancer This effect enhances the definition of the sound and pushes it to the forefront Effect On Off Effect On Off Sensitivity Sens Frequency Frequency Mix Level Mix Level Low Mix Level Low Mix Level Level Level OFF ON 0 100 1 0 10 0 kHz 0 100 0 100 0 100 EQ Equalizer A 4 band equalizer Effect On Off Effect On Off Low Gain Low Gain Low Mid Gain Low Mid Gain Low Mid Freq Low Mid Freq Low Mid Q Low Mid Q High Mid Gain High Mid Gain High Mid Freq High Mid Freq High Mid Q High Mid Q High Gain High Gain Level Output Level OFF ON 20 20 dB 20 20 dB 100 10 0 kHz 0 5 16 20 20 dB 100 10 0 kHz 0 5 16 20 20 dB 20 20 dB This parameter turns the enhancer effect on off Adjusts the manner in which the enhancer will be applied relative to the input signals Adjusts the frequency at which the enhancer effect will begin to be applied The effect will be made apparent in the frequencies above the frequency set here Adjusts the amount of phase shifted
58. Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any device that will generate line noise such as an electric motor or variable lighting system The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after long hours of consecutive use This is normal and is not a cause for concern Before connecting this unit to other devices turn off the power to all units This will help prevent malfunctions and or damage to speakers or other devices Placement Using the unit near power amplifiers or other equipment containing large power transformers may induce hum To alleviate the problem change the orientation of this unit or move it farther away from the source of inter ference This device may interfere with radio and television reception Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers Observe the following when using the unit s CD RW drive For further details refer to Before Using Compact Discs p 10 O Do not place the unit near devices that produce a strong magnetic field e g loudspeakers O Install the unit on a solid level surface O Do not move the unit or subject it to vibration while the drive is operating Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight place it near devices that radiate heat leave it inside an enclosed vehicle or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit To avoid possible breakdown do not use the unit in a wet area such as an
59. If you do not want to overwrite the existing sample press NO EXIT 6 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen ie Compression expansion requires more processing time than other sample editing operations Also the audio quality of the stretched sample may be inferior to that of the original sample ore In case the expanding expanding level is in excess of 134 or less than 67 the sample will not be made correct tempo new sample Pitch Change Modifying the pitch of a sample to create a You can modify the pitch of a sample to create a new sample Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice Alternatively press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt FAD FARAMETER The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons ea Ay Pin TREIM Press CURSOR lt gt J to select the Pitch Change icon JAN FITCH CHAE N 1S Fan aa ait HREHLZ TRETCH MATCH Press YES ENTER The Pitch Change screen appears PITCH CHANGE Y HeuwP itch Press CURSOR WI lt gt to select the pad bank number and pad number for each item and specify the desired number for each To set the pad bank number turn the TIME VALUE dial To set the pad number either press a pad or turn the TIME VALUE dial Source Specify the sample whose pitch you want to adjust To Specify the pad to which the pitch adjusted sample will be assigned Press CURSOR to move the cursor to
60. Length End you want to adjust Press SCRUB SCRUB lights the Wave View screen appears The sound either before or after the point will play repeatedly FAD FRARAMETER sf 7 eae Be DIVIDE SI TRIM Stee FAD FARAMETER Ey C wD Emn OFTIM DIVIDE TRIM EFH 1i 02 A DLF Point 00000000D LoorF Point Y Lensth lt End gt oo00s 268 45 msec CMa Erie EEENEHEE While monitoring the sound and the screen turn the TIME VALUE dial to make fine adjustments to the point As necessary you can switch the region that is repeated or switch the screen display TO up to the current point FROM point CURSOR Q CURSOR V CURSOR lt _ CURSOR _ gt Press SCRUB Repeatedly play from a point 45 milliseconds before the current point Playback once from the current point to one second after the current Expand the waveform vertically amplitude axis Shrink the waveform vertically amplitude axis Expand the waveform horizontally time axis Shrink the waveform horizontally time axis SCRUB go out the Pad Parameter screen reappears Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Adjusting the crossfade time You can adjust the time over which two pads will be exchanged by the Pad Crossfade function Owner s Manual p 71 1 Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon 2 Press CURSOR lt IL gt to select the System ic
61. MUNI STEREO MULTI its previous state and your edits will be lost HINT Insert effects can be used on a specific audio track during playback or during mixdown p 133 gt Refer to Changing the insert effect connections p 144 MEMO If you use CURSOR LU to select GROUP then turn the TIME VALUE dial patches can be changed by groups MEM For further descriptions of each aigorithm s function please refer to p 175 203 MEMO If you wish to save the current effect settings perform the procedure described in Saving insert effect settings below More functions for the CDX 1 Saving insert effect settings You can assign a name patch name to the edited effect settings and save them Continue with this procedure after the preceding section Editing insert effect settings 1 In the screen that displays the effect block diagram press CURSOR UV a number of times to select NAME EEA WRITE NOTE 2 Press YES ENTER Song patch data is not saved The Patch Name input screen will appear immediately when you write it rather it is saved to CD RW disc when you save the song or 3 Use the TIME VALUE dial and CURSOR lt __ gt to input the desired patch name when you automatically turn 4 When you are finished inputting the patch name and editing the settings of each Suttle powa Mow tims teres effect press NO EXIT to return to the
62. Pad Sequence on a CD RW disc For details refer to Saving Pad Sequence p 67 NOTE In case any Pad Sequence is held in internal memory of CDX 1 it will be overwritten by those loaded from CD RW disc It is recommended to save Pad Sequence in internal memory to another CD RW disc before loading gt Saving Pad Sequence p 67 Playing the pad samples Basic ways to play samples Playing a sample Press a pad in which a sample has been recorded lit and it will play There are 3 kinds of how a pad starts stops sounding For details refer to Changing how a pad starts and stops sounding Pad Play p 70 Adjusting the Overall Sample Volume The overall monitoring volume of the samples you play from the pads can be adjusted by the PAD SEQ LEVEL fader and the MASTER fader To adjust the volume of an individual pad sample refer to Adjusting the volume of a sample Sample Level p 76 Playing samples simultaneously Up to four samples can be played simultaneously If you press more than four pads the sample of the pad you pressed last will be given priority and the sample of the pad that was pressed first will stop sounding Playing pads while audio tracks play back The number of sounds that can be played simultaneously is four stereo notes total for the audio tracks pads and sequence track Audio track playback takes priority over pad playback This means that if seven or more audio t
63. Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon 2 Press CURSOR lt lL gt to select the System icon TEMFO MARE 1 0HG Bee 3 Press YES ENTER The System Parameter screen appears 4 Press CURSOR lU to move the cursor to SYSTEM PARAM er i 5S0 ee a1 a hane Previell hs T Map LoadCinfirm line Fade Tine a T Har Loadconf ir raa 5 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select ON T Map LoadCinfirm Tempo Map Load Confirm ON You will be able to select whether the tempo data saved on the CD RW disc will be loaded OFF The tempo data saved on the CD RW disc will be loaded 6 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen If T Map LoadConfirm is ON Insert a CD RW disc on which pads sequences have been saved If internal memory contains pads sequences a message of Load PAD SEQ data will be displayed If you press NO EXIT at this time a message of Use song s tempo map use the tempo data of the song saved on the CD RW disc will be displayed Press either NO EXIT or YES ENTER to select whether to load the tempo data from the song on the CD RW disc NO EXIT The tempo data in internal memory will be preserved The tempo data of the song saved on the CD RW disc will not be loaded YES ENTER The tempo data of the song saved on the CD RW disc will be loaded The tempo data in internal memory will be overwritten 15 Using the tempo of a sample to mod
64. TEL 061 435400 HUNGARY Intermusica Ltd Warehouse Area DEPO Pf 83 H 2046 Torokbalint HUNGARY TEL 23 511011 IRELAND Roland Ireland Audio House Belmont Court Donnybrook Dublin 4 Republic of IRELAND TEL 01 2603501 ITALY Roland Italy S p A Viale delle Industrie 8 20020 Arese Milano ITALY TEL 02 937 78300 NORWAY Roland Scandinavia Avd Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N 0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL 273 0074 POLAND P P H Brzostowicz UL Gibraltarska 4 PL 03664 Warszawa POLAND TEL 022 679 44 19 PORTUGAL Tecnologias Musica e Audio Roland Portugal S A Cais Das Pedras 8 9 1 Dto 4050 465 PORTO PORTUGAL TEL 022 608 00 60 ROMANIA FBS LINES Piata Libertatii 1 RO 4200 Gheorghehi TEL 066 164 609 RUSSIA MuTek 3 Bogatyrskaya Str 1 k 1 107 564 Moscow RUSSIA TEL 095 169 5043 SPAIN Roland Electronics de Espa a S A Calle Bolivia 239 08020 Barcelona SPAIN TEL 93 308 1000 SWEDEN Roland Scandinavia A S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28 2 tr S 131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL 08 702 0020 SWITZERLAN D Roland Switzerland AG Musitronic AG Gerberstrasse 5 Postfach CH 4410 Liestal SWITZERLAND TEL 061 921 1615 UKRAINE TIC TAC Mira Str 19 108 P O Box 180 295400 Munkachevo UKRAINE TEL 03131 414 40 UNITED KINGDOM Roland U K Ltd Atlantic Close Swansea Enterprise Park SWANSEA SA7 9FJ UNITE
65. The specified phrase is cut ERASE The specified phrase is erased INSERT Inserting a phrase in another location Insert p 102 step 8 9 SPRIT Dividing the phrase at the current location Split p 103 step 6 7 ADJUST Finely Adjusting the Timing of Each Phrase p 104 step 7 8 When you are finished editing the sequence track press DISPLAY EDIT goes out extinguished and the display returns to the Basic screen Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence Deleting a sequence track An unwanted sequence track can be deleted as follows 1 Press PAD SEQUENCING EDIT EDIT lights and the S Edit displayed as i lights and the Sequence Edit menu are displayed as icons MEMO If SEQ PLAY is off 2 Press CURSOR gt to select the Erase ca ERASE TRAZE N pen ee eres EDIT and it will be turned Track icon 4 sicap Pura a on lit automatically Also the Pu Pu Ful ET SFLIT FASTE IHSERT STATUS of all audio tracks will go dark 3 Press YES ENTER The erase track setting screen appears ERASE TRACK x ok TrA m eee er auuu ee Erase Track amp 4 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to specify the track number you wish to delete gt 3 _ 2 D 5 o oc ok 0 eo no on 50 a3 jez 4 N 5 Press YES ENTER The sequence track will be deleted MEMO To cancel the erase sequence track press UNDO REDO EDIT goes
66. UIE JILL gt Effect on solid line Effect off dotted line OYE IN input MIX mixer and OUT output of the effect block are always on to select an effect and turn the TIME VALUE dial to turn the effect on off EKF HAHE WRITE These cannot be turned off 7 Press CURSOR QILU IIS I gt to select the effect whose parameters you want to edit and press YES ENTER The parameter setting screen for the selected IHFUT IMFPUL Gain effect appears InPUut Delay 10m5 Lo 5PFlit Fres S0OOHZ 8 Press CURSOR Q J to select a parameter and turn the TIME VALUE dial to edit the value For details on each parameter refer to Mastering Tools parameter list p 20 22 in this booklet 9 If you would like to edit another effect press NO EXIT to return to the previous screen and repeat steps 6 8 If you want to save the current effect settings perform the procedure described in Saving mastering tools settings below Edited effect settings are temporary If you return to the previous GESSa eS om os i i P OR HTK caT CMF screen without saving the edited patch TMP will be displayed InPrut ssn HE a in front of the patch name While TMP is displayed newly selecting a different patch will cause the edited patch to revert to its previous state and your edits will be lost 18 Saving the mastering tool settings You can assign a name patch name t
67. a recording editing operation p 138 Quick movement to a point You can assign a marker to a desired location point If you assign markers to locations such as the end of the opening or the beginning of a solo you will be able to move instantly to the point where you wish to begin listening gt Assigning markers within a song Marker p 129 13 Expanding the memory The CDX 1 comes with 32 MB of memory into which audio samples can be loaded However in some cases 32 MB of memory will be insufficient for loading large amounts of data In such a case you will have to add separately sold memory DIMM Memory can be expanded up to 128 MB Before expanding the memory consult with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor Precautions for expanding memory e Always turn the unit off and unplug the AC adaptor before attempting installation of the memory DIMM board Oo e Install only the specified memory DIMM board Remove only the Q specified screws e To avoid the risk of damage to internal components that can be caused by static electricity please carefully observe the following whenever you handle the board O Before you touch the board always first grasp a metal object such as a water pipe so you are sure that any static electricity you might have been carrying has been discharged O When handling the board grasp it only by its edges Avoid touching any of t
68. a sequence t 7 i r j E MEMO rack p 96 Lama TO is convenient when you 2 With playback stopped press PREVIEW TO or FROM to play back the sound wish to set the current location as described below to the beginning of a sound a Press TO and ee i convenient s5 when you wish to set the E Playback once from one second before the current location to the current location current location to the end of a a 5 Press FROM sound 3 x Playback once from the current location to one second after the current location P MEMO For an audio track you can press MARK to mark the current location so that it can 3 While listening to the sound turn the TIME V ALUE dial to make fine adjustments to the current location be easily found later gt Assigning a marker p 129 139 More functions for the CDX 1 Using Scrub to make fine adjustments in the cue location Scrub Preview 140 An extremely short region 45 milliseconds either before or after the current location will play back repeatedly This is called the Scrub function Now Time Sound data The Scrub Preview function will play back only audio tracks For the audio track that you wish to play press the STATUS to make it light in green Press SCRUB Scrub playback will begin While you listen to the sound and current time turn the TIME VALUE dial to move the current location in small steps and find the moment a
69. amount of boost or cut for the treble equalizer This parameter adjusts the volume after the equalizer stage NS Noise Suppressor This effect reduces the noise and hum Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON Threshold Threshold 0 100 Release Release 0 100 Nore This parameter turns the noise suppressor effect on off Adjust this parameter as appropriate for the volume of the noise If the noise level is high a higher setting is appropriate If the noise level is low a lower setting is appropriate Adjust this value until the decay of the sound is as natural as possible Adjusts the time from when the noise suppressor begins to function until volume reaches 0 High settings for the Threshold parameter may result in there being no sound when you play with your instruments volume turned down 182 Insert effect algorithm list DLY Delay This creates a thicker sound by applying a delayed sound to the direct sound Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the delay effect on off Delay Time Delay Time SINGLE 1 1400 mS This parameter adjusts the delay time i e the interval for which sound is delayed TAP 1 700 mS Feedback Feedback 0 100 This parameter adjusts the amount of feedback Changing the amount of feedback causes the number of time the delayed sound is repeated to change as well Effect Level Effect Level 0 120 This adjusts the volume of the delay sound E G
70. begin when you press PLAY gt p 61 NEM If you wish to do it over again press UNDO REDO p 138 after step 7 57 D 4 S Q Q pad ip a e pad xe pad a Recording a sound to a pad Sampling Loading a Windows WAVE file Some commercially available sampling CD audio clip collections copyright free designed for use in music production are mixed mode CDs that saving both audio D and WAVE files The CDX 1 lets you load these WAVE files and assign them to the on file p 207 pads 1 Insert a mixed mode CD AUDIO WAVE as described in Inserting a disc p 35 2 Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice Alternatively you can press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons 3 Press CURSOR gt to select the Load WAVE file icon 4 cal non HRMLZ STRETCH REWER 4 Press YES ENTER The Load WAVE file screen appears MLS REMAIN 43m2 Load To Bank 1 0 HIGH Tata Tyre CEHTERJ gt FILE LIST 5 Make sure that the cursor is located at the Load To line press CURSOR lt _ L gt to select the pad bank number and pad number and specifying the pad to which the newly loading sample is assigned Turn the TIME VALUE dial to set the pad bank number To set the pad number either press a pad or turn the TIME VALUE dial 6 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to Data Type lin
71. button This button assigns a marker at the desired location of the song When you press MARK a marker will be assigned to the current location of the song If you have registered a marker you will be able to jump instantly to the desired point in the song gt Assigning Markers within a song Markers p 129 SEARCH buttons SEARCH KK lt When the CD Player is in use gt If the song is stopped this button takes you back to the previous song If the song is playing it returns you to the beginning of the currently playing song gt Moving to the previous next track p 50 lt During multitrack recording playing gt This button takes you to the location of the previous marker gt Moving to the location of a marker p 129 e SEARCH lt When the CD Player is in use gt Jump to the next song lt During multitrack recording playing gt This button moves you to the location of the next marker G REW rewind button The song will rewind while you hold down the button Panel Descriptions FF fast forward button The song will fast forward while you hold down the button REPEAT button You can specify a region that you wish to hear and play it back repeatedly gt Specify a region and play it back repeatedly the Repeat function CD Player p 51 Repeatedly play back a specified region the Repeat function Multitrack recording p 128 Z
72. capability are designed to allow you to reproduce material to which you have copyright or material which the copyright owner has granted you permission to copy Accordingly reproduction of Music CD or other copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner avoiding technical prohibiting features of second generation and later copying like SCMS or others constitutes copyright infringement and may incur penalties even in case such reproduction is for your own personal use and enjoyment private use Consult a copyright specialist or special publications for more detailed information on obtaining such permission from copyright holders Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners Roland Corporation 02678356 01 10 A3 31N Roland C DX MULTITRACK CD RECORDER AUDIO SAMPLE WORKSTATION DiscLab Newly Added Functons Ver 1 5 As the result of recent upgrades the descriptions in the Owner s Manual may not accurately represent the performance of some of the features of the CDX 1 To make sure you are fully aware of the newly added functionality please read this booklet in conjunction with the Owner s Manual while you use the CDX 1 p CONTENTS Sample Pad Compressing expanding a sample according to the tempo at which playback was
73. checking takes approximately ten minutes to be completed You can abort DIMM checking by pressing NO EXIT Display screen is difficult to read Adjust the contrast as described in Adjusting the brightness of the screen display p 38 The two input sources are mixed and recorded when you record in stereo using SIMUL When recording in stereo using SIMUL set the input pan to L100 the far left before you record gt Setting the left right position pan of the input sound p 113 Pad Sequence was not saved to disc Did you save the pad sequence to disc before turning off the power gt Saving pads sequences p 67 Troubleshooting Unable to make Audio CD Are you using CD R disc It is impossible to make Audio CDs on CD RW disc or on unwritable CD ROM Audio CD Are you using CD R disc that has been finalized The data on the CD RW disc is corrupted or damaged Damaged data may be caused by the following Was the power turned off while the CD RW disc drive was operating Was a strong physical shock applied to the CD RW drive Damaged or corrupted data cannot be restored Ore In some cases by selecting FULL for the format type p 112 such disks may be used as blank disks However since these disks may be damaged or broken do not store important data on them z e Or 4 7 S e a 5 169 Major Message List Bank is pro
74. direct sound from the strings That is it adjusts the harmonic contents This adjusts the interference to the strings made by the top plate That is it adjusts the attack sense This adjusts the resonance of the sound caused by the body That is it adjusts the softness and fatness of the sound which is the typical characteristics of acoustic guitars This adjusts the volume of the acoustic guitar modeling COMP Compressor Compressor the entire output signals when the input volume exceeds a specified value 188 Effect On Off Effect On Off Sustain Sustain Attack Attack Level Output Level OFF ON 0 100 0 100 0 100 This parameter turns the compressor effects on off Adjusts the range time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain Adjusts the strength of the attack Larger values will result in a sharper attack creating a more clearly defined sound Adjusts the volume Insert effect algorithm list EQ Equalizer A 4 band equalizer Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the equalizer effect on off Low Gain Low Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the bass equalizer Low Mid Gain Low Mid Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the low midrange equalizer Low Mid Freq Low Mid Freq 100 10 0 kHz This parameter sets the central frequency for th
75. disc 1 Press the EJECT button The disc tray will open IfaCD RW disc is inserted in CDX 1 a message Save SONG before eject appears In this case see following process of If the display asks Save SONG before eject 2 Remove the disc from the disc tray 3 Press the EJECT button once more The disc tray will close The disc tray will also close if you press lightly on the front of the tray If the display asks Save SONG before eject When the CD RW disc is inserted in CDX 1 the massage Save SONG before eject For details of saved Song appears in the display settings refer to Saving Song settings on a CD RW disc 1 If you wish to save the song data press YES ENTER p 126 A message Processing appears and CDX 1 saves setting of SONG Parameter of Mixer effects etc in CD RW disc When saving is completed the disc tray will open If you press NO EXIT a message Eject disc not saved appears Press YES ENTER The disc tray will open without saving of data All the settings Mixer effects etc after inserting CD RW disc will be lost Press NO EXIT Removing disc will be canceled If the disc tray does not open If the power is turned off with the disc still in the drive such as due to a power failure the disc tray cannot be opened by pressing the eject button In this case you can insert a piece of wire to force the tray open 1 Turn off the power of th
76. guitar itself Level Level 100 100 This adjusts the volume of the acoustic processor MEMO Best results will be achieved when stereo output is used COMP Compressor Compressor the entire output signals when the input volume exceeds a specified value For details on the parameters refer to COMP above NS Noise Suppressor This effect reduces the noise and hum For details on the parameters refer to NS above 184 Insert effect algorithm list 6 COSM GUITAR AMP This is a multi effect designed for electric guitar This provides an amp sound using a preamp and speaker modeling 2 Chorus can be replaced one of the following effects Speaker o Compressor PreAmp Modeling ELG Flanger Phaser Suppressor Doubling 1 Equalizer can be replaced with Wah Tremolo Pan TWEE wa Parameter full name Setting Function a k j Slow Attack COMP Compressor Compressor the entire output signals when the input volume exceeds a specified value Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the compressor effects on off Sustain Sustain 0 100 Adjusts the range time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain Attack Attack 0 100 Adjusts the strength of the attack Larger values will result in a sharper attack creating a more clearly defined sound Level Output Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume P AMP Preamp Adjust the dis
77. hes cepacia ce eee eee 18 CP BUA s e R 135 CD BURNING Button screena 26 CD PUTIN SCCH rosaa n T 135 DAA REC eoo asrasaaae ypncnteaavarinessvaanati 148 CD iGive Gt TECORG ING arn ern 159 CD Player Screen arenan a seein 48 CD Recorder TUN CHO ernea elas oe 160 CD recordino Srecni soria eed aes 161 163 CRO R Gd Cesene ted SaceaesnatsasesGe nates Aone A a 18 CD R Fina Ze icon cae eet ee 136 CEERD CA O aa a aa 28 CD RW Backup CON ordan a 147 CORWS Cyr he aniy 18 CD RW Disc Format icon eesseseseesssssssessrssssseersressee 112 CTD RW indicalo has ass ose teased a E eleneems 28 CHORUS eee Oe ee et ee NT nn PRES ie Rr eae 174 CROT eos esses cee desist cies sede sees eos townie 145 CD OAL dimsen A ta naag eum 82 CLIPBOARD BUTON a ket ea 25 a ET E A E E E 204 C OANIALCONDECTOLS iui EN 31 Condenser microphone sesssessssesserssssesersesersersrseeses 204 CONTASE aa a OE ROT em 38 204 Cord HOOK arisi ana EN E RNE 30 COSM BASS AMP aoo an aE 196 COSM GUTAR AM seia treat tua nares uaisaes 185 CREATE DUON cerisanrecnini n 25 Create Reyers al yr ar A E E 86 Create Reversal ICON ennan ENN 86 CURSOR DUTON trienni a aa 28 CUl he carat Sue eta coake yas enmendate aes 100 CORIO asa vapstaep dot esses N T E E NRT 100 D PAT aano R N N 204 Data type multitrack recording gerei ENER 111 SAU MINE a a ua seein nam unneeas 60 DELA urcare n a amnesiac eataea ides 174 oE E E E E eaten es 145 BELAY DUNO airaa actos seseensaeraaoeaavgs 22 DELE TE PUN
78. macros 70 GUITAR BASS Jack ssniinsniioiete a elites 31 H FPG i A A EEE EE EEE EEA 60 Nie HM PCCANCe yaro a R 31 FA ONG EPEA EA AI A OEE A 72 HOLD B lleten susie ues 25 I TN DUTOIT deine ncoossasneansasseancanssilodtewndensbildeavinawpvebaveanoseeeedeos 27 italie daerenn a ivevetostaastons 40 Initialize All Parameters icon cceeeeeceeecccseseeeeeeeeeeee 41 Initialize Effect Patch icon occ ceeseseseececcccceceeesseeeeeee 41 Initialize Global Parameters icon sseseeeseeeneeneeeesssee 41 Initialize Mixer Parameters icon ccccccccccesseeeeeeeeeee 41 Mput Leve b saasa a a E N a 134 INPUT REC LEVEL Kino rennin arara 21 INPUT SELECT buttons oo ceeeeeeccceeeeeeeeees 21 INPUT SENS KitODs camiine TEA 21 insert effects sosai ntn a a aa a iaai 141 Insert ICON iauiac na E TAS 102 L SOIO Gs sira R E O A 78 COTS LIND aa date axel ac oat N E E AS 10 LINE DUON sosoran a 21 EINE JACK ranea ANN 31 Load PAD SEO ICOM surtunme a 68 Load WAVE file ICOM nenons iced iene Badal 58 POZE BOX a a 178 TEIN Cy gaia eset es Sel eae ene 60 111 LONG eats teh cesses ecetehaa tice daoteaast aca eeieas eee 60 111 Loop chalccemrereeeren er eC ere err ee rere tere ree rere 174 lOp eCo opan R S 145 LOOP MOJE siringni N 73 Loop PON eeuseerri o ana 78 ELOOP END maaa a oe 73 M MAR kanena a i a Gee aaeeee 29 MARK DORON brr AES 26 Master Palance esenea aaas 132 MASTER TAGer siurried a N aeettevancnes 29 MASTER Jack herni a a 31 WaS FOO AI
79. made possible by the concept of MIDI channels You can think of MIDI channels as being similar to television channels Although many broadcast channels are in the air at any one time many channels of MIDI data are moving through a single cable a television set receives only the channel to which it is set the MIDI device receives only the channel to which it is set The same is true in the case of MIDI If a transmitting device is set to MIDI channel 1 the MIDI messages will be received by receiving devices that are also set MIDI channel 1 MIDI Implementation Chart MIDI allows a wide variety of electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other However it is not necessarily the case that every device is able to transmit and receive every type of MIDI message Only MIDI messages that are supported by both devices can be conveyed For details on the MIDI functionality of the CDX 1 The operating manual of every MIDI device includes a MIDI implementation refer to MIDI Implementation chart This chart makes it easy to see the types of MIDI message that can be chart p 216 transmitted and received When you wish to connect two MIDI devices you should compare their charts to see which types of MIDI message can be conveyed between them S 91A P AIIN 19440 e D 5 Q Sy 4 O 5 E 151 Using the CDX 1 with other MIDI devices Switching MIDI OUT THRU 152 MIDI me
80. not be displayed 3 successively increase for settings of LOW MIDDLE and set to MIDDLE So normally set it to MIDDLE 196 Insert effect algorithm list E Speaker modeling The characters of the following types of speakers can be modeled Set the desired type for Speaker Type Microphone Well matched Speaker Type Cabinet Speaker Unit Setting preamp type AC Large Sealed enclosure 15 inch two units On Mic AC ac Open back enclosure 15 inch two units Off Mic AC AMG Open back enclosure 10 inch eight units On Mic amg Open back enclosure 10 inch eight units Off Mic On Mic models sound when a dynamic microphone is used Off Mic models sound when a condenser microphone is used SP Speaker Modeling This models the characteristics of various types of speakers Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the speaker modeling effect on off Speaker Type Speaker Type See the column on this page Selects the type of speaker that will be modeled Mic Setting Mic Setting CENTER 1 10 cm This models the microphone position CENTER models the condition that the microphone is set in the middle of the speaker cone 1 10 cm means that the microphone is moved away from the center of the speaker cone Mic Level Mic Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the microphone Direct Level Direct Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound EQ Equa
81. number by pressing a pad or by turning the TIME VALUE dial 5 Press YES ENTER The Normalize operation is executed Tf the destination pad already contains a sample the Overwrite message appears If it is OK to overwrite the existing sample press YES ENTER If you do not wish to overwrite the existing sample press NO EXIT 6 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 87 Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence What is a sequence You can create a song by consecutively playing pad samples The CDX 1 is able to record pad operations i e which pad was pressed in what order and how long Data for pad operations that have been recorded in this way is called a sequence The CDX 1 provides two ways of recording a sequence Realtime recording and step recording i When creating a sequence by arranging samples that are recorded to the pads the sounds comprising the sequence and the original samples do not effect each other directly For example if the sounds on the pad samples used as source material for a sequence are deleted those sounds once saved as a sequence are not lost About the sequence tracks The CDX 1 has four tracks A D for recording sequences When you access the Sequence Play List screen the arrangement of samples in a sequence track will be shown by the location and length of the boxes rectangles The vertical dotted lines in the screen indicate m
82. of Phase output will become monaural DLY Delay This creates a thicker sound by applying a delayed sound to the direct sound Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON Effect Type Type SINGLE TAP Delay Time Delay Time SINGLE 1 1400 mS TAP 1 700 mS Feedback Feedback 0 100 Effect Level Effect Level 0 120 200 This parameter turns the delay effect on off This is a simple delay The delayed sound is panned across the left and right channels This will be effective when stereo output is used This parameter adjusts the delay time i e the interval for which sound is delayed This parameter adjusts the amount of feedback Changing the amount of feedback causes the number of time the delayed sound is repeated to change as well This adjusts the volume of the delay sound Insert effect algorithm list 13 VOICE TRANSFORMER This is a multi effect designed for vocals Special effects can also be created using the Voice Transformer 1 Chorus can be replaced one of the following effects Voice Noise transformer Suppressor Chorus Delay Flanger HE CHO DL Phaser Lia EL F DEL Doubling Tremolo Pan Parameter full name Setting Function VT Voice Transformer This controls the formants allowing a variety of voice characters to be created Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the voice transformer effect on off Formant 1 Formant 1 100 100 Adjust the
83. of the Defretter It should be adjusted for the bass guitar you have until you get the harmonic changes to sound natural Attack Attack 0 100 This controls the attack of the Defretter Increasing the value will cause the harmonics to change more slowly thus producing a relatively attack less sound similar to a fretless bass Depth Depth 0 100 This controls the rate of the harmonics Increasing the value will increase the harmonic content and therefore will create a more unusual sound Level Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the defretter sound OCT Octave This adds a note one octave lower creating a richer sound Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the octave effect on off Octave Level Octave Level 0 100 This adjust the volume of the sound one octave below Direct Level Direct Level 0 100 This adjust the volume of the direct sound ENH Enhancer This effect enhances the definition of the sound and pushes it to the forefront Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the enhancer effect on off Sensitivity Sens 0 100 Adjusts the manner in which the enhancer will be applied relative to the input signals Frequency Frequency 1 0 10 0 kHz Adjusts the frequency at which the enhancer effect will begin to be applied The effect will be made apparent in the frequencies above the frequency set here Mix Level Mix Level 0 100 Adjusts the amount of phase shifted sound of the
84. on it Please use a new CD R disc Dose the CD RW disc have insufficient remaining capacity Please check the remaining available recording time p 39 Is INPUT SELECT button lit for the input source that you wish to record Has the Scrub Playback function p 140 been turned on The recorded or sampled sound is very distorted or noisy Is the input sensitivity set appropriatery If the input sensitivity is too high the recorded sound will the distorted If it is too low the input sound will be buried in noise Adjust the INPUT SENS knob as high as possible without causing the peak indicator to light Are the equalizer settings appropriate Some equalizer settings can cause the sound to distort even though the peak indicator dose not light Readjust the equalizer p 132 Is the distortion a result of mixing multiple audio tracks When bouncing tracks distortion can result from excessive levels caused by the addition of the sounds from multiple audio tracks during mixing Lower the audio track faders Isa distortion effect being applied to the sound Is any INPUT SENS knob not currently in use turned up To avoid additional noise completely turn down any INPUT SENS knob not in use The recording comes out in mono sound Is the sampling Type setting set to MONO p 61 Have you selected the STATUS of only one audio track for recording In order to record in stereo
85. operations or to layer the sounds of multiple pads in the same sequence track If you play two or more pads simultaneously only the last played pad operation will be recorded Realtime recording 90 1 10 Press PAD SEQUENCING CREATE CREATE blinks and a screen appears in which you can select the recording method and the recording destination sequence track Press CURSOR lt _ to select Realtime realtime recording CREATE SEG Realtime Use the TIME VALUE dial to select the sequence track A D that you wish to record If you re record over a previously recorded sequence track the pad operation data will be overwritten and the previous data will be lost After you have specified the recording method and the sequence track to be recorded press YES ENTER oe es Start ie agar sox Suantize OFF a The realtime recording setting screen appears Press ZERO 4 to make sure that the SONG POSITION in the screen indicates 0001 01 000 beginning Alternatively you can move to a desired location so that recording will start from that point Make sure that the cursor is locates at the Start w line Turn the TIME VALUE dial to specify how recording will begin Start w Start with Norm Recording will start at the moment you press CREATE Cnt1M Recording will start after a one measure count is heard Cnt2M Recording will start after a two measure count is heard PAD
86. or decreasing the number of bits Realtime modify filters connected in series allow you to reshape the sound freely This is a parameter for RADIO It models the sounds that occur when you adjust the tuning frequency of an AM radio This is a parameter for PLAYER It models the wow and flutter which occur when the speed of the turntable is not constant This models noise Adjusts the filter This adjusts the volume balance of the direct and effect sounds This filter decreases digital distortion By turning this off you can create an extremely lo fi sound that includes aliasing Modify the sample rate If this is turned off the sample rate will be the same as the sample rate of the currently selected song Modify the number of data bits If this is turned off the number of data bits will be unchanged This filter decreases the digital distortion produced by lo fi By turning this off you can create an extremely lo fi sound Adjust the volume of the lo fi sound Adjust the volume of the direct sound The sound is passed through a filter to remove unwanted sound according to the frequency specified by Cutoff Freq cutoff frequency The Modify Filter will not be used A Low Pass Filter will be applied to pass the sound that is below the specified frequency A Band Pass Filter will be applied to pass the sound that is in the region of the specified frequency A High Pass Filter will be applied to pass the sound
87. or coloured BLACK The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug Copyright e Unauthorized recording distribution sale lending public performance broadcasting or the like in whole or in part of a work musical composition video broadcast public performance or the like whose copyright is held by a third party is prohibited by law When exchanging audio signals through a digital connection with an external instrument this unit can perform recording without being subject to the restrictions of the Serial Copy Management System SCMS This is because the unit is intended solely for musical production and is designed not to be subject to restric tions as long as it is used to record works such as your own compositions that do not infringe on the copyrights of others SCMS is a feature that prohibits second generation and later copying through a digital connection It is built into MD recorders and other consumer digital audio equipment as a copyright protection feature Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copyright held by a third party Roland assumes no responsibility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of third party copyrights arising through your use of this unit About the License Agreement e The CDX 1 and its CD R
88. out are forbidden The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the unit must never be disassembled The symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle In the case of the symbol at left it means that the power cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet If this adaptor is used while it is emitting smoke generating a strange odor or making an abnormal noise it could cause fire or electric shock Turn off the main switch immediately then be sure to pull the power plug from the outlet After making sure that smoke is no longer emitted take it to your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page During a thunder storm do not touch the electric plug Doing so could cause electric chock Be sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied with the unit Also make sure the line voltage at the installation matches the input voltage specified on the AC adaptor s body Other AC adaptors may use a different polarity or be designed for a different voltage so their use could result in damage malfunction or electric shock Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord nor place heavy objects on it Doing so can damage the cord producing severed e
89. parameters refer to Mixer effect parameter functions p 174 7 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 145 More functions for the CDX 1 Reverb 146 Using the loop effect to create doubling One technique for spreading the backing guitar between left and right is to record the same backing performance twice on separate audio tracks and then pan the two tracks to left and right This is known as doubling The CDX 1 provides a DOUBL N doubling p 174 loop effect that lets you produce a doubling effect without having to record the same performance twice By using the DOUBL N doubling effect doubling can be applied to the mono recording of a channel after it has already been recorded Before you edit the parameters of the DOUBL N doubling loop effect set the pan settings of the audio track to far left or right Reverb consists of overlapping sounds reflected from the walls and floor For example if you clap your hands in a large room such as a church the wash of sound that lingers is the reverb The character of the reverb is affected by the size of the space room hall etc its shape and the materials of the wall or other reflecting surface Press LOOP EFFECTS REVERB A screen will appear in which you can adjust GENESEE TRACE S the volume send level that is sent fromthe 4 2 ted S A P ted ted OI pad and each audio track to the reverb 2 3 4 5 6 TFT
90. permission from copyright holders HINT Using the mastering tools You can use the mastering tools while recording an external input source For details refer to Adjusting the mastering tools p 134 If you wish to use the mastering tools press MASTERING TOOLS to turn it on lit In this case Pad Sequence is held in internal memory will not be playable Pad may be extinguished and or SEQ PLAY turn off CO RECORDER REMAIN 74 40 ae OO PTE ieee ele Lh OE It is possible to set mastering tools for each in CD recorder screen Press CURSOR lt L gt J to select MTK mastering tool patch and IN input level turn the TIME VALUE dial to adjust value For details on the mastering tools refer to Adjusting the mastering tools p 134 160 Recording to a CD R disc CD Recorder Recording an external audio source to a CD R disc Here we will explain an example using digital connections with an external MD recorder The CDX 1 has two types of DIGITAL IN connector coaxial and optical This allows the output of a external digital audio device such as a CD player DAT recorder or MD recorder to be recorded onto a CD R in digital form In order to record a digital audio signal into the CDX 1 it is not enough to simply connect the digital audio device to the OPTICAL IN or COAXIAL IN connectors To allow digital audio signals to be recorded you must make the setting described in Connec
91. program change are listed as one 1 greater than the values given in the above table A 7 bit byte can express data in the range of 128 steps For data where greater precision is required we must use two or more bytes For example two hexadecimal numbers aa bbH expressing two 7 bit bytes would indicate a value of aa x 128 bb In the case of values which have a sign 00H 64 40H 0 and 7FH 63 so that the decimal expression would be 64 less than the value given in the above chart In the case of two types 00 00H 8192 40 00H 0 and 7F 7FH 8191 Data marked nibbled is expressed in hexadecimal in 4 bit units A value expressed as a 2 byte nibble 0a ObH has the value of a x 16 b lt Ex 1 gt What is 5AH in decimal system 5AH 90 according to the above table lt Ex 2 gt What in decimal system is 12034H in hexadecimal of every 7 bit 12H 18 34H 52 according to the above table So 18 x 128 52 2356 lt Ex 3 gt What in decimal system is 0A 03 09 OD in nibble system OAH 10 03H 3 09H 9 ODH 13 according to the table So 10 x 16 3 x 16 9 x 16 13 41885 lt Ex 4 gt What in nibble system is 1258 in decimal system 16 1258 16 78 10 16 4 14 0 00H 4 04H 14 OEA 10 OAH According to the table So it is 00 04 OE OAH z 3 oS D 3 D 2 215 MIDI Implementation MULTITRACK CD RECORDER AUDIO SAMPLE WORKSTATION Date
92. screen 7 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 143 More functions for the CDX 1 Changing the insert effect connections By changing the connections of the insert effect you can meet the needs of a wide variety of situations For example you can apply effects to the playback of specific audio tracks or audio sample pads or adjust the sound during mixdown p 133 1 Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon 2 Press CURSOR gt to select the Effects location icon Pion N tity ia SYSTEM MIDI TUHER Nabiel 3 Press YES ENTER The Insert Mode setting screen appears EFFECT INSERT Insert Mode IMPUT NORMALS 4 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to switch the Insert Mode e INPUT NORMAL You will hear the sound that passes through the insert effect The sound that passes through the insert effect the same sound that AUDIO TRACK REC PAD REC you hear will also be recorded sampled Normally you will use this setting INPUT REC DRY You will hear the sound that passes through the insert effect The sound prior to passing through the insert effect i e the original sound will be recorded sampled Use this AUDIO TRACK REC setting when you wish to try various effects PAD REC after recording the sound e TRACK1 8 1 amp 2 3 amp 4 5 amp 6 7 amp 8 The insert effect will be applied to the audio tracks Use this setting
93. shows how these correspond to decimal numbers OAF DEFERRED ELAK PEAY 04H FAST FORWARD FF x P fas 4 ra z pen 05H REWIND REW dec hex dec hex dec hex dec hex 06H RECORD STROBE REC PUNCH IN 0 00H 32 20H 6A A0H 96 60H 07H RECORD EXIT PUNCH OUT 1 01H 33 21H 65 41H 97 61H 44H 01H LOCATE TARGET LOCATE 2 02H 34 22H 66 42H 98 62H 3 03H 35 23H 67 43H 99 63H 4 04H 36 24H 68 44H 100 64H Commands Transmitted 5 05H 37 25H 69 45H 101 65H Command Action 6 06H 38 26H 70 46H 102 66H 7 07H 39 27H 71 47H 103 67H 01H STOP STOP 8 08H 40 28H 72 48H 104 68H 9 09H 41 29H 73 49H 105 69H OT DERERRED REAT PERT 10 OAH 42 2AH 74 4AH 106 6AH 06H RECORD STROBE REC PUNCH IN 11 OBH 43 2BH 75 4BH 107 6BH 1D OCH 44 OCH 16 ACH 108 6CH 07H RECORD EXIT PUNCH OUT 13 ODH 45 2DH 77 4DH 109 6DH 44H 01H LOCATE TARGET LOCATE 14 OEH 46 2EH 78 4EH 110 GEH 15 OFH 47 2FH 719 4FH LLL 6FH 16 10H 48 30H 80 50H 112 70H 17 11H 49 31H 81 51H 113 71H 18 12H 50 32H 82 52H 114 72H 19 13H 51 33H 83 53H 115 73H 20 14H 52 34H 84 54H 116 74H 21 15H 53 35H 85 55H fe a 75H 22 16H 54 36H 86 56H 118 76H 23 17H 59 37H 87 57H 119 77H 24 18H 56 38H 88 58H 120 78H 25 19H 57 39H 89 59H 121 79H 26 1AH 58 3AH 90 5AH 122 7AH 27 1BH 59 3BH 91 5BH 123 7BH 28 1CH 60 3CH 92 5CH 124 7CH 29 1DH 61 3DH 93 5DH 125 7DH 30 1EH 62 3EH 94 5EH 126 7EH 31 IEH 63 3FH 95 5FH 127 7FH Decimal values such as MIDI channel bank select and
94. sound of the range set by Frequency that is to be mixed with the input Adjusts the amount of phase shifted sound of the lower range that is to be mixed with the input Adjusts the volume of the enhanced sound This parameter turns the equalizer effect on off This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the bass equalizer This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the low midrange equalizer This parameter sets the central frequency for the low midrange equalizer This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by Low Mid Freq A larger value results in a narrower range of change This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the high midrange equalizer This parameter sets the central frequency for the high midrange equalizer This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by High Mid Freq A larger value results in a narrower range of change This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the treble equalizer This parameter adjusts the volume after the equalizer stage 199 3 2 a 9 oe Q D D 3 D Insert effect algorithm list NS Noise Suppressor This effect reduces the noise and hum Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON Threshold Threshold 0 100 Release Release 0 100 va Modulation effect type This parameter turns the noise suppre
95. standby mode Press PLAY gt and recording will begin Press STOP If to stop recording A message of Keep take NO YES appears If you wish to save the take press YES ENTER When CDX 1 complete to save BOUNCE will go to dark and the STATUS of the selected recording destination tracks will go light in green If you press NO EXIT saving to CD RW discs will be cancelled Listen to the result of bounce recording Press audio tracks 1 4 STATUS to go dark mute Return to the location at which you began recording and press PLAY P gt to play back audio tracks 7 8 Ore Once performances have been bounce recorded to an audio track it will no longer be possible to adjust the volume pan or equalization of a specific instrument or vocal If you need to keep the option of individually adjusting pan equalization etc of an audio track you should not combine it with other tracks by bounce recording Adjusting the left right position pan of each audio track p 132 MEM In step 4 the INPUT SELECT button will automatically go dark If you wish to mix an input source as part of the bounce recording press an INPUT SELECT button to select the desired input source 125 J D O oQ OD a Xo o 3 oO lt D o jab Q jab Recording playing back a performance Playing back and stopping a recorded performance Playing back stopping i
96. that is above the specified frequency Adjust the cutoff frequency Adjust the resonance Adjust the volume level of the sound that has passed through the modify filter If an extremely low number of bits is selected loud noise may appear even when there is no sound depending on the input source In such cases 178 Insert effect algorithm list NS Noise Suppressor This effect reduces the noise and hum Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the noise suppressor effect on off Threshold Threshold 0 100 Adjust this parameter as appropriate for the volume of the noise If the noise level is high a higher setting is appropriate If the noise level is low a lower setting is appropriate Adjust this value until the decay of the sound is as natural as possible Release Release 0 100 Adjusts the time from when the noise suppressor begins to function until volume reaches 0 pOr High settings for the Threshold parameter may result in there being no sound when you play with your instruments volume turned down E Creating lo fi sounds Follow the steps below to create lo fi sounds essential to dance music including hip hop and DJ music Lo Fi Box Turn Pre Filter and Post Filter off e Set Sample Rate and Bit to relatively low values Note however an excessively low value for Bit may cause big noise even in the silent mode In that case increase Threshold Thresh of Noise Suppressor
97. the Owner s Manual Do not open or perform any internal modifica tions on the unit or its AC adaptor The only exception would be where this manual provides specific instructions which should be followed in order to put in place user installable options see p 15 Do not attempt to repair the unit or replace parts within it except when this manual provides specific instructions directing you to do so Refer all servicing to your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page Never use or store the unit in places that are e Subject to temperature extremes e g direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle near a heating duct on top of heat generating equipment or N are Damp e g baths washrooms on wet floors or are e Humid or are e Exposed to rain or are e Dusty or are Subject to high levels of vibration Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is level and sure to remain stable Never place it on stands that could wobble or on inclined surfaces ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING About the Symbols The A symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle In the case of the symbol at left it is used for general cautions warnings or alerts to danger The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried
98. the move destination press YES ENTER The specified phrase is moved 10 When you are finished editing the sequence track press DISPLAY EDIT goes out extinguished and the display returns to the Basic screen MEM If SEQ PLAY is off press EDIT and it will be turned on lit automatically Also the STATUS of all audio tracks will go dark MED In step 5 also press NO EXIT a mini menu disappears MEM To cancel the move press UNDO REDO p 138 after step 9 Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence Pasting a phrase at a different location Paste If something has already been recorded at the paste destination it will be overwritten by the pasted phrase 1 Press PAD SEQUENCING EDIT EDIT lights and the Sequence Edit menu are displayed as icons MEMO Lam gt If SEQ PLAY is off press S 2 eos CURSOR __ gt to select the Paste EDIT and it will be turned icon i i p on lit automatically Also the Z STATUS of all audio tracks will go dark of 3 Press YES ENTER 3 Wn The Paste Phrase screen appears POSTE PHRASE ao TEA eet Start 0004 01 05 DU ation 1 O059 4 Press CURSOR Q A sequence track select mini menu appears PASTE PHRASE SrHor Teh s 1 059 n Dur 7 Oso 5 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the sequence track A D that you wish to MEMO edit and press YES ENTER In step 5 also press Sn NO EXIT a mini me
99. the number of time the delayed sound is repeated to change as well Effect Level Effect Level 0 120 This adjusts the volume of the delay sound 5 ep 99 r e 9 e Q A Dy 3 n 193 Insert effect algorithm list 10 BASS MULTI Bass Guitar Mult This is a multi effect designed for bass guitar Appropriate for creating standard bass sound 3 Chorus can be replaced one of the following effects Compressor 1 Octave Enhancer Equalizer i Flanger Phaser Noise Chorus 3 Delay 1 Compressor can be replaced with Defretter Suppressor of DOFF Pitch Shifter Defretter i 2 Equalizer can be replaced with Wah Doubling Wah i Tremolo Pan Parameter full name Setting Function COMP Compressor Compressor the entire output signals when the input volume exceeds a specified value Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the compressor effects on off Sustain Sustain 0 100 Adjusts the range time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain Attack Attack 0 100 Adjusts the strength of the attack Larger values will result in a sharper attack creating a more clearly defined sound Level Output Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume DEFRET Defretter This models a fretless bass Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the defretter effect on off Sensitivity Sens 0 100 This controls the input sensitivity
100. ticks then mute the sample The data in 1 3 sets the phrase represented by the outlined rectangle displayed in the Play List screen Depending on the precess at the recording the data of item 1 and 3 are set In the case of recording the phrases on the song by pressing the pad the sample s start point p 78 is reflected to the data number which skip play the sample songs from the beginning in 2 This value can be changed with the Adjust Timing function p 104 Nore Depending on the actual sampling time or other factors the length of time of a sample on the PAD is determined In case the loop mode p 73 of sample is turned off the stops upon recording the edit point before the end point determined in 3 even if the apparent play length of 3 above is expanded with tempo down Thus the sound may stop even when the apparent phrase the outlined rectangle is indicated in the Sequence Play List screen 89 Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence Recording pad operations as you play pads Realtime Recording Realtime recording of pad operations is when the timing at which pads are pressed and released is recorded in the sequence track Since the actual sounds that you are hearing are not being recorded anew in the sequence track this does not reduce the remaining time available for recording Nor is it necessary to set the recording level However it is not possible to apply effects while you record pad
101. type can be set separately when recording each sample and the sampling time will be different if different data types coexist MEMO For multitrack recording you will select the data type when you format the CD RW disc p 110 Recording a sound to a pad Sampling Specifying stereo or mono Type MEMO You can specify whether the sound will be sampled in mono or in stereo Mono sampling requires only half the memory of stereo 1 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to EERE REMAIN 7m5s5 sampling However this has Type line TataTyee STAHDARD no effect on the number of TSF e MOO samples that can be played WT Start With MANUAL simultaneously Playing samples simultaneously 2 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select STEREO or MONO p 69 Automatically start sampling when sound is input Start with At the factory settings sampling will begin manually when you press PAD REC You can change this setting so that sampling will begin automatically when audio input is detected 1 Press CURSOR U to move the cursor to a HBTIE___FEMAIN __ mG se _ DataTure STANDARD Start with line T td dee mj Lm Y Start with Walkas D D x Q Q pad id a pad xe Q a 2 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select a value in the range of LEV 1 LEV 8 The value 1 8 specifies the volume at which sampling is to begin 1 is the mini
102. use high speed compatible CD RW discs that carry this logo The ISG 2 CDX 1 cannot use CD RW discs that are not high speed compatible ReWritable 2 Also we recommend that you use CD RW discs made by the following manufacturers whose products Roland has successfully tested for writing Ricoh Corporation Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation 19 Learning about CD R RW discs CD R RW disc handling and cleaning Disc handling Do not place a disc in direct sunlight for an extended period of time Hold a disc by inserting a finger in the center hole and pressing your thumb against the outer edge Be careful not to get fingerprints on or scratch the recording surface of the disc the green surface ao Do not drop or stack discs Do not place heavy objects on a disc or subject it to strong physical shock Do not affix stickers to the label surface of the disc If a disc is used with a sticker affixed read write errors can occur or the disc may be scratched When writing a title on the label surface of the disc use a soft tipped writing implement such as a felt pen To protect the disc keep it in its original case Disc cleaning If dust or dirt adheres to a disc gently wipe it off with a soft dry cloth Always wipe from the center of the disc outward toward the outer edge Never wipe the disc in the direction of rotation Panel Descriptions Top Panel INPUT section PEAK indicators I
103. value results in a narrower range of change This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the low midrange equalizer This parameter sets the central frequency for the low midrange equalizer This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by Low Mid Freq A larger value results in a narrower range of change This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the high midrange equalizer This parameter sets the central frequency for the high midrange equalizer This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by High Mid Freq A larger value results in a narrower range of change This parameter sets the type of the High frequency band equalizer Shelving type or peaking type This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the treble equalizer This parameter sets the central frequency for the high equalizer This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by High Freq A larger value results in a narrower range of change This parameter adjusts the volume after the equalizer stage This parameter turns the bass cut filter effect on off This parameter sets the frequency for cutting off undesired low frequency band sounds such as pop noise ENH Enhancer This effect enhances the definition of the sound and pushes it to the forefront Effect On Off Effect On Off Sensitivity Sensitivity OFF ON 0 1
104. when you wish to record the sound of an instrument or CD player connected to the LINE jacks SIMUL MIC1 MIC2 When you wish to record vocal and guitar simultaneously or when you wish to record two mics press MIC1 and MIC2 simultaneously Both buttons will light and can be recorded simultaneously Ifan instrument and mic are connected to both the GUITAR BASS jack and the MIC2 jack respectively the input from the GUITAR BASS jack will take priority The input from the mic connected to the MIC2 jack phone type XLR type cannot be recorded e DIGITAL Select this when you wish to record the sound of a CD player or MD player connected to the COAXIAL IN connector or OPTICAL IN connector When you press DIGITAL the connected connector COAXIAL IN or OPTICAL IN will be selected automatically If digital audio devices are connected only to coaxial connectors you can repeatedly press DIGITAL to cycle through lit COAXIAL IN is selected blink OFF mute If digital audio devices are connected to both the optical and coaxial connectors the input from the COAXIAL IN will take priority In this case you can repeatedly press DIGITAL to cycle through COAXIAL IN gt OPTICAL IN OFF mute Digital audio signals cannot be recorded simply by connecting a digital audio device to the OPTICAL or COAXIAL connector If you wish to recorded digital audio signals you must change the settings as described in
105. you must first exchange sequence tracks so that the desired tracks can be played back simultaneously For details refer to Exchanging the content of sequence tracks Exchange Track p 7 in this booklet 17 Editing the Mastering Tool settings You can edit the mastering tool settings while you listen to the mixdown Select one MEMO cat of the preset patches P01 P21 that is closest to what you have in mind and edit the You can also edit the atch settings P 5 mastering tool settings in the CD Burning screen or CD Mastering Tools Recorder screen However it The mastering tools are a convenient set of tools that divide the sound into high WA noe P a Po ie omer son the results of the mastering frequency mid frequency and low frequency ranges and make the volume tool beforewwnibine to hie OR consistent so that the audio CD can be created with the optimal levels disc 1 Instep 1 of Listen to the result of Mixing MASTERING TRACK down Owner s Manual p 133 the PO Mixdouwr INFULLEVE qd Mastering track screen appears 2 Make sure that MASTERING TOOLS lights in red If MASTERING TOOLS is dark press MASTERING TOOLS and it will go light in red Press CURSOR Q to move the cursor to MTK line 4 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the mastering tool patch that you want to edit 5 Press YES ENTER The mastering tools effect block screen appears 6 PressCURSOR CJID
106. you must select two audio tracks for recording p 119 When sampling the very beginning of the sound is missing Is the Start with setting p 61 value LEV 1 8 set too high The insert effects can not be applied Is INSERT EFFECTS ON OFF turned on illuminated p 142 Is the Insert Mode setting determining the insert effect connections set appropriately p 144 yore It is not possible to apply the insert effect to the sound played by the pads The loop effects can not be applied Is the effects send level for the pad and each audio track set to 0 Raise the effect send level as described in Editing the loop effect settings p 145 167 e D n DF e O Q Troubleshooting Cannot digitally record Have you made settings to allow digital recording from your CD player At the factory settings the CDX 1 cannot record the output of a digital audio device via the OPTICAL IN or COAXIAL IN connectors You must change the settings as described in In order to make a Digital recording with CD player p 148 Dose the sampling rate of the CDX 1 match that of the digital audio device Set the digital audio device to a sampling rate of 44 1kHz Dose the digital signal format match YOur digital audio device may use a non standard digital signal format Connect the CDX 1 to a digital audio device that supports S P DIF Problems with th
107. 00 Enhancer Freq Enhancer Frequency 1 00 10 0 kHz Mix Level Mix Level 24 12 dB 20 This parameter turns the enhancer effect on off Adjusts the manner in which the enhancer will be applied relative to the input signals Adjusts the frequency at which the enhancer effect will begin to be applied The effect will be made apparent in the frequencies above the frequency set here Adjusts the amount of phase shifted sound of the range set by Frequency that is to be mixed with the input Mastering Tools parameter list IN Input Specify the frequency points at which the original sound will be divided so that the expander compressor can be applied independently to the low mid and high frequency ranges Input Gain Input Gain 24 12dB This parameter sets the overall volume before entering expander compressor Input Delay Input Delay 0 10 ms This parameter sets the length of delay to add to the direct sound input Lo Split Freq Low Split Frequency 20 800 Hz This parameter sets the frequency at which the direct sound is split into three bands on the low frequency band side Hi Split Freq High Split Frequency 1 60 16 0 kHz This parameter sets the frequency at which the direct sound is split into three bands on the High frequency band side Effect of Input Delay under Input With ordinary compressors a moment of delay occurs to suppress a level over instance after it has been detected With
108. 00 00 00 beginning of the song Alternatively you can move to a desired location so that recording will start from that point Press PLAY gt Mixdown begins If you play samples pressing pads during mix down is processing the sample sounds in pads will be mixed down together However please be careful that sample sound dose not come out in case four stereo incl audio track and sequence track are outputted In such case the pads goes out When mixdown is finished press STOP W The screen will ask Do you want to burn a CD If you want to create an audio CD press YES ENTER and continue with the procedure Writing to a CD R disc Owner s Manual p 135 If you want to make sure that the result of mixdown press NO EXIT For details refer to Listen to the result of Mixing down Owner s Manual p 135 re When CD recorder screen or CD player screen is appearing you cannot switch to mix down eves pressing MIX DOWN MEMO If you mix down without a CD RW disc the Data Type will be Standard NEM If you mix down without a CD RW disc in step 1 a message of Also use PAD SEO for Mixdown will not appears NEM If you mix down without a CD RW disc step 3 will not be necessary re A sequence track and its corresponding audio track cannot be played back simultaneously If you are unable in step 3 to select an audio track that you want to mix down
109. 00000 1 2 3 4 5DB 6 7 8 Record in stereo When the input is stereo you will normally use two audio tracks to record the sound in stereo Press two STATUS in a combination of 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 8 A sound that is input in mono will become stereo if an insert effect is applied to it If you wish to record in stereo while applying an insert effect select two audio tracks with same procedure as above W400 00000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 For details on the jack to use for connections and on the INPUT SELECT button refer to Panel Description Rear panel p 30 and Panel Description INPUT section p 21 HINT If the eight audio tracks are insufficient for you to record all of the necessary performances you can combine the performances of multiple audio tracks into a single track freeing up additional audio tracks for more recording gt Combining the performances of multiple audio tracks Bounce Recording p 125 Is For details on insert effects refer to Using the insert effects p 141 Ore When recording in stereo using SIMUL set the input pan to L100 the far left before you record If you set the input pan except for L100 the two input sources will be mixed and recorded 119 J D O oQ OD Xo e jab lt 3 a o jab Q jab Recording playing back a performance HINT Doubling technique One technique for spreading the b
110. 2 8 2 1 4 8 4 1 8 8 8 TEMPO MAP 20 00 250 00 01 0 100 E Pad Recording Parameter Parameter name Data Type Sampling Type Start With Pre Triger E Edit Pad Parameter Tempo Match Parameter name Base Sample Source Sample To Divide Sample Parameter name Divide Type Source Sample Destination Pad Number Threshold Trim 1 Valid when Threshold is ON Display Data Type Type Start with Pre Trigger Display Base Pad Source To Display Type Source To Threshold Trim Initial Value STANDARD STEREO MANUAL OFF Initial Value Bank k k k k Bank k k k k Bank 1 1 Initial Value END POINT Bank k k kk Bank 1 1 KKK KKK 2 Valid when Type is AUTO 0 5 AUTO 1 0 AUTO 1 5 or AUTO 2 0 Trim Sample Parameter name Target Sample Threshold Normalize Parameter name Source Sample Destination Pad Number Time Stretch Parameter name Source Sample Destination Pad Number Ratio New BPM Create Reversal Parameter name Source Sample Destination Pad Number E Pad Parameter Parameter name Pad Play Loop Mode Start Point Loop Point Length Sample Level Mute Group BPM Base Note Display Target Threshold Display Source To Display Source To Ratio New BPM Display Source To Display Pad Play Loop Mode Start Point Loop Point Length END Level Mute Group BPM Base Note X Initi
111. 2 tick intervals oe 96 tick intervals g J3 i 64 tick intervals ae aa 48 tick intervals oe 32 tick intervals hh 24 tick intervals E 16 tick intervals OFF The timing at which you press a pad will not be adjusted When you use the Quantize function pad operations on the same sequence track may overlap If this occurs only the last pad operation will be valid and only that phrase will be recorded About remaining recordable events of Sequence Remaining recordable events of sequence is displayed as REMAIN XX on REALTIME REC screen and STEP REC screen XX shows remaining number of events in percent HHR Start ee Eas Steer SMPL GE See Suantize OFF REQ seq Duration 100 D F a J a P r Dee eee ee Ore Quantize is not applied to the timing at which you release a pad An event is an operation of pressing releasing a pad Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence Recording pad operations at the specified interval Step Recording The CDX 1 allows you to record pad operations on a sequence track while the playback remains stopped This is analogous to pasting the pad samples at previously specified intervals steps This is called step recording Button functions during step recording During step recording the buttons have the following functions Pads 1 8 Record the sample of that pad and advance the current location by one step PLAY gt Extend ti
112. 23 213 lt z 3 o D 3 D Di MIDI Implementation E System Exclusive Message 4 MIDI Machine Control Status Data Bytes Status P FOH iH ddH eeH F7H E MIDI Machine Control Details STOP MCS Byte Desenenan Status Data Bytes Status FOH Status of System Exclusive Message PUN AEN DEN VOED OEE Bak iiH Manufacturer ID bat 41H RolandsManufacturerID Byte Description FOH Status of System Exclusive Message 7EH Universal Non Realtime Message 7FH Universal Realtime Message 7FH Unies System Exclusive Message Realtime Header ddH Data 00H 7FH 0 127 Dev Device ID 06H MMC Command Message eeH Data 01H STOP MCS F7H EOX End of System Exclusive Message F7H EOX End of System Exclusive Message Universal System Exclusive Message If the transport switch STOP was pressed the CDX 1 transmits as the device ID 7FH OINQUIRY MESSAGE Gets ae otatus ata bytes otatus Ss icentty REPY FOH 7FH Dev 06H 03H F7H Status Data Bytes Status FOH 7EH Dev 06H 02H 41H 3BH 01H 00H 00H ssH ssH ssH ssH ssH F7H Byte Description FOH Status of System Exclusive Message Byte Description 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header FOH Status of System Exclusive Message Dev Device ID 7EH Universal System Exclusive Message Non Realtime Header 06H MMC Command Message Dev Device ID 03H DEFERRED PLAY MCS 06H General Information sub ID 1 F7H EOX End of System Exclusive Message 02H Identify Reply sub
113. 48 SINGAPORE 489980 TEL 243 9555 TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO LTD Room 5 9fl No 112 Chung Shan N Road Sec 2 Taipei TAIWAN R O C TEL 02 2561 3339 THAILAND Theera Music Co Ltd 330 Verng NakornKasem Soi 2 Bangkok 10100 THAILAND TEL 02 2248821 VIETNAM Saigon Music 138 Tran Quang Khai St District 1 Ho Chi Minh City VIETNAM TEL 08 844 4068 AUSTRALIA NEW ZEALAND AUSTRALIA Roland Corporation Australia Pty Ltd 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA TEL 02 9982 8266 NEW ZEALAND Roland Corporation Ltd 32 Shaddock Street Mount Eden Auckland NEW ZEALAND TEL 09 3098 715 CEN TRAL LATIN AMERICA ARGENTINA Instrumentos Musicales S A Florida 656 2nd Floor Office Number 206A Buenos Aires ARGENTINA CP1005 TEL 54 11 4 393 6057 BRAZIL Roland Brasil Ltda Rua San Jose 780 Sala B Parque Industrial San Jose Cotia Sao Paulo SP BRAZIL TEL 011 4615 5666 COSTA RICA JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Ave 1 Calle 11 Apartado 10237 San Jose COSTA RICA TEL 506 258 0211 CHILE Comercial Fancy II S A Avenida Rancagua 0330 Providencia Santiago CHILE TEL 56 2 373 9100 EL SALVADOR OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Notre YY Alameda Juan Pablo 2 No 4010 San Salvador EL SALVADOR TEL 503 262 0788 MEXICO Casa Veerkamp s a de c v Av Toluca No 323 Col Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D F MEXIC
114. 9 Mastering Tools parameter list ccccssccccesseeeccseeseeeceeeeeeceeseeeeseuseeeeseeseeesseaeeesssanseesens 20 Others Remembering the icon that was last selected in a MENU screen ccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 23 Synchronization with a Sequence or Drum MaChiNe ccccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseseeeeseeeeeeeeees 24 V I Copyright 2001 ROLAND CORPORATION All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION Roland Web Site http www roland co jp Compressing expanding a sample according to the tempo at which playback was stopped While playback is stopped you can adjust the length of the sample according to the tempo of the location at which playback was stopped This function makes it easy to adjust the sample length to match the tempo of a sequence track This provides an easy way by which the length of a sample recorded in a sequence track can be made to match the length of a measure in that sequence track The tempo at the point that playback is stopped will be one of the following e The tempo displayed in Tempo of the Rhythm Guide screen e Ifthe Beat parameter in the Rhythm Guide screen is set to TEMPO MAP the tempo of the Tempo Map Since this function needs to accurately calculate the tempo in order to perform a high qu
115. A surface that is struck or a button used to play sound on an electronic drum drum machine or sampler The CDX 1 has eight pads PAL format SECAM format Pan The direction from which a sound is heard when played back in stereo Also refers to the knob that adjust this Parameter A setting that can be adjusted to modify the sound or operation of an electronic device or electronic musical instrument An example of use would be This effect has three parameters level drive and tone The setting or level of a parameter is called its value 206 Punch in Punch out Punch in out recording is a procedure by which a specific portion of a track between two specified times can be re recorded Punch in means to begin recording i e to instantaneously switch from song playback to recording and punch out means to stop recording by instantly switching from recording back to playback A button or foot switch can be used to punch in and out manual or punch in out can occur automatically at previously specified locations auto Sample rate A number that indicates how many times per second the analog signal is digitized when converting from analog audio or other analog signal into digital audio In the case of audio processing the sample rate is given in units of kHz In general a higher sample rate will allow better frequency response and will provide a more faithful reproduction of the original sound On
116. ARAH OPTI NES Press YES ENTER The Divide Sample screen appears DIVIDE SAHPLE Tre MANUAL SUF ce Barik 1 3 To Bank i 7 Make sure that the cursor is located at the Type line and turn the TIME VALUE dial to set END POINT Use CURSOR Q I J lt If E gt I to select the pad bank number and pad number for Source original sample and To destination specifying the sample for each Select the pad bank number by turning the TIME VALUE dial Select the pad number either by pressing a pad or by turning the TIME VALUE dial Press YES ENTER The sample are divided If the destination pad already contains a sample the Overwrite message appears If it is OK to overwrite the existing sample press YES ENTER If you do not wish to overwrite the existing sample press NO EXIT Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 3 Q n co pes J 4p op fed 3 d 4 eo o fed O fed Q Editing the sample of a pad Automatically dividing a sample at silent portions 1 7 Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice Alternatively press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons FAD FARAMETER gi a AM Be eae TRIM Press CURSOR I __ gt to select the Divide iata DIVICe icon Press YES ENTER The Divide Sample screen appears MANUAL Bank 1i 3 Bank i 7 Make sure that the curs
117. Apl 16 2001 Model CDX 1 MIDI Implementation Chart Version 1 01 Basic Default 1 16 1 16 Channel Changed 1 16 1 16 Default Messages X Altered kkkkkkkkkkkkkk s NO N Note O 0 127 O 0 127 Number True Voice kkkkkkkkkkkkkk pas l Note On O 1 127 Velocity Note Off X9n v 0 After Key s X Touch Channel s X Pitch Bend X Control Change Program O Change True Number kkkkkkkkkkkkk k 0 63 Pad Bank1 64 System Exclusive E i i Quarter Frame System Song Position Common Song Select Tune Request System Clock Real Time Commands All Sound Off Reset All Controllers Aux Local On Off Messages All Notes Off Active Sensing System Reset 1 SyncOut MTC Only Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO O Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO X No 216 Mixer Block Diagram O Q Zz Z i Ww nna a ot Gi oo t amp 2G oOo o OO gt x X To Q gt 2 CCOO INPUT 1 LINE L DIGITAL L L Op Coax age ae Pir eer CHO DLY fe HH INPUT 2 GUITAR l DIGITAL R Opt Coax EQ SWITCH Ta t E E LEVEL EQ PAD SEQUENCE AD g C HEH Ta Eee CHO DLY SEND ee HTT eel eee REV SEND LEVEL a Mill RHYTHM OUT CHO DLY GUIDE LEVEL ore SEND CHO DLY SEND REV SEND REC L REC R MASTER TR L MIX L MASTER TR R MIX R MASTER OUT DIGITAL OUT PHONES x
118. C E ea A senses tatae acer ter 133 MASETS TOOIS arren Er R Sum tnameadensaets 134 MASTERING TOOLS Button wu cece eeeeeeeee 29 Ma stering track sereen css seina tists anactiosseoderaytcetwnctoans 133 MENO wists scirccanbiacs stan A oseuodvaaenirss 14 Memnory FUI aiir e a R tater astute pensive 64 MIC LDO O scatter E aa cece 21 MICK ACK aine a a teenies 31 MIC JACK paa EA al ene tatbuatasgeabaaiany weetataoasins 31 MICH GBS DUTON sro a AOE 21 IME IC GING CLOTS serrurerie a a a 31 MIDI COn a 152 153 156 MIDI Implementation Chart eee 151 INTE DIN i ance castes a teed ae oe le eae Ld 152 VE EC UT ts anate cetera san tite teen specie satan settee aetna a 152 174000 Bi ce Re eee rere eee re rem coe te no Se ro 152 IVI Tinie Code aeaea AA 154 MIX DOWN BOHOM serate e a N 26 NM 0 F011 E aa T NR Recor Teen Onn OR 132 LAVA BL Geers oe Rae re a ee Tea cen eT en Oe EPs Un Oa 156 IN ON Saitek aici hates Cah tae staat a hace at eat etn 98 MOVE TCO heat cociscleec teeta ts a a aces se een ee 98 MEIC e tee NAR Rew Tiere Cnr me Ze ne ie 154 MEIK AP ACI ch ii hie ce teas ee sty Mane ited dataset ah hat eae 134 Mute GROUPS saci suxasstoasticuecS tout nies a 74 N NOEXIT B t n a AAA ES 28 NOrmal Ze eec a T 87 Normalize icon sssesssesssssssssesesrsssssssssssecrreresssssssseserressess 87 O CECE E E E AE EEE E T E 105 OPTICAL connectors sessseesensssssserssssseereresssserresese 31 Optimize D oeu EA 127 PAMPE sep an A EN 64
119. CD RW disc press YES ENTER MIX DOWN will light If you press NO EXIT a message of You ll lose PAD SEQ data Go to MIXDOWN MODE appears If you wish to go mixdown mode press YES ENTER If you wish to cancel press NO EXIT For audio tracks that you wish to include in the mixdown press STATUS to make the button light in green Make sure that master track STATUS light in red Press ZERO to return the SONG POSITION to 00 00 00 00 beginning of the song Alternatively you can move to a desired location so that recording will start from that point Press PLAY gt Mixdown will begin When mixdown is finished press STOP W The screen will ask Do you want to burn a CD If you wish to create an audio CD press YES ENTER and continue with the procedure Writing to a CD R disc p 135 If you wish to make sure that the result of mixdown press NO EXIT For detail refer to Listen to the result of Mixing down below Listen to the result of Mixing down 1 When the BURNING CD message appears in step 5 of the above procedure press NO EXIT Press master track STATUS to make the button light in green The mastering track screen appears a TRACE HTE Patch ghee Ode IMNFULLEVE 1 amp Press PLAY gt to the beginning of the mastering track The song will play back Adjust the settings of the mastering tools as necessary gt
120. D Completing your original CD CD Burning Here s how to write the mixed down song to a CD R disc to complete your own original CD When you create an original CD on the CDX 1 you will use the mastering tools to adjust the overall volume to the optimal level The CDX 1 uses Track At Once to write song data toa CD R disc A CD R disc that was written using Track At Once allows additional song data to be written as long as you have not yet finalized the disc However the disc cannot be played in a conventional CD player until it has been finalized Once a CD R disc has been finalized no further data can be written to it Writing to a CD R disc 1 When the Do you want to burn a CD message appears in step 5 of Mixing down p 133 or step 5 Listen to the result of Mixing down p 133 press YES ENTER A message of Save SONG before eject appears If you wish to save press YES ENTER A message of Processing appears and CDX 1 saves setting of SONG Parameter of Mixer effects etc in CD RW disc When saving is completed the disc tray will open the screen indicates Insert CD R disc If you press NO EXIT CDX 1 will not save setting of SONG Parameter of Mixer effects etc in CD RW disc The disc tray will open the screen indicates Insert CD R disc Remove the CD RW disc and insert a CD R disc The CD burning screen appears REMAIN Yassz mAN FEMAIN Peis EET
121. D KINGDOM TEL 01792 700139 MIDDLE EAST BAHRAIN Moon Stores Bab Al Bahrain Road P O Box 20077 State of BAHRAIN TEL 211 005 CYPRUS Radex Sound Equipment Ltd 17 Diagorou St P O Box 2046 Nicosia CYPRUS TEL 02 453 426 IRAN MOCO INC No 41 Nike St Dr Shariyati Ave Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad Tehran IRAN TEL 285 4169 ISRAEL Halilit P Greenspoon amp Sons Ltd 8 Retzif Ha aliya Hashnya St Tel Aviv Yafo ISRAEL TEL 03 6823666 JORDAN AMMAN Trading Agency Prince Mohammed St P O Box 825 Amman 11118 JORDAN TEL 06 4641200 KUWAIT Easa Husain Al Yousifi Abdullah Salem Street Safat KUWAIT TEL 5719499 LEBANON A Chahine amp Fils P O Box 16 5857 Gergi Zeidan St Chahine Building Achrafieh Beirut LEBANON TEL 01 335799 QATAR Al Emadi Co Badie Studio amp Stores P O Box 62 DOHA QATAR TEL 4423 554 SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL Corniche Road Aldossary Bldg 1st Floor SAUDI ARABIA P O Box 2154 Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL 03 898 2081 SYRIA Technical Light amp Sound Center Khaled Ibn Al Walid St P O Box 13520 Damascus SYRIA TEL 011 2235 384 TURKEY Barkat muzik aletleri ithalat ve ihracat Ltd Sti Siraselviler cad Guney is hani 84 86 6 Taksim Istanbul TURKEY TEL 0212 2499324 U A E Zak Electronics amp Musical Instruments Co L L C Zabeel Road Al Sherooq Bldg No 14 Grand Floor
122. D RW disc Pad and Sequence p 88 can be saved on a CD RW disc More about saving Pad Sequence When you sample and create a sequence p 88 the Pad Sequence is temporarily stored in the internal memory of the CDX 1 This means that you can sample and create a sequence p 88 even if a CD RW disc is not inserted Pad Sequence stored in internal memory will be lost when the power is turned off p 34 or when you mixdown p 133 If you wish to keep the pad sequence J you must save it on a CD RW disc follow the procedure in Saving Pad Sequence below D Saving Pad Sequence 8 O 2 a f E 5 On the CDX 1 this operation does not save the following sequence related parameters nen a a cecmence z In order to save the following parameters you must perform the operation Saving Song settings all previously saved samples on a CD RW disc p 126 on a CD RW disc will be e The sequence track A D status overwritten and lost pad Q e The state of the PAD SEQUENCING SEQ PLAY e Tempo map e Beat and Tempo settings of the Rhythm Guide 1 Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon 2 Press CURSOR gt to select the Save PAD SEQ icon em SAVE FAD SER N 3 Press YES ENTER A message of Save PAD SEQ data appears 4 Press YES ENTER The display will indicate Saving PAD SEQ and the data will be saved When saving is completed the display will sho
123. DUBAI U A E TEL 04 3360715 NORTH AMERICA CANADA Roland Canada Music Ltd Head Office 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B C V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL 0604 270 6626 Roland Canada Music Ltd Toronto Office Unit 2 109 Woodbine Downs Blvd Etobicoke ON M9W 6Y1 CANADA TEL 0416 213 9707 U S A Roland Corporation U S 5100 S Eastern Avenue Los Angeles CA 90040 2938 U S A TEL 323 890 3700 As of May 15 2001 Roland For EU Countries This product complies with the requirements of European Directive 89 336 EEC For the USA FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the rec
124. DX 1 s top cover to its original position 15 m x lt O fab E Q D D 3 D 3 Oo Ss lt Ex panding the memory Removing the memory To remove the memory module reverse the installation procedure 1 Simultaneously press outward the white clips located at either end of the socket 2 Remove the memory module from the socket Verifying that the memory is recognized by the CDX 1 Before re connecting the CDX 1 to any peripheral devices check to verify that the added memory is being correctly recognized Verify that the memory module has been installed in the socket correctly 1 Turn on the power as described in Turning On the Power p 33 After several seconds when the CDX 1 starts MARK up normally the post fader screen appears TEMPO 150 00 INLZS45675 LA 2 Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon 3 PressCURSOR gt to select the DIMM em DIMM DIAGNOSIS N Diagnosis icon ES pte 8 A fet nana TUHER Feaboc IHIT OIH 4 Press YES ENTER The DIMM Diagnosis screen appears DIMM DIAGHOSIS DIMM IHSTALLED DIMM will indicate status the expanding Sire 128M 2 internal memory If the memory has been Dissnosis detected correctly this will indicate INSTALLED Tf DIMM shows NOT INSTALLED even though you installed expanding memory the added memory has not been detected correctly As described in
125. ER The Tempo Map Setting screen appears The display shown below indicates that the tempo map begins at measure 1 and a tempo of quarter note 120 specifies a 4 4 time signature and rhythm pattern number 01 Rock1 HAAA FEMAIH STEF 43 MEH oO EEAT FATTERH oo 4 4 Rock i Ry The rhythm guide contains a wide variety of rhythm patterns including a metronome For details refer to Rhythm Pattern List p 172 re The tempo you specify here is the tempo for the entire system The sequence and MIDI OUT will use this same tempo A In order to use the tempo map you must create a tempo map and also change the way in which the rhythm guide is sounded For details refer to the section below Playing the rhythm guide according to the tempo map re If you specify that a tempo map is to be used the tempo of the entire system will also follow the tempo map The sequence and MIDI OUT will also use the tempo of the tempo map 117 as D O D S D a O a a D Q O R 2 Co Prepare for recording Multitrack recording 4 Use CURSOR lt _ gt to move the cursor to the item you wish to edit and turn the TIME VALUE dial to edit the value MEAS measure Specify the starting measure 1 9999 of the tempo map The measures and beats shown in the display the rhythm guide sound and the MIDI clock data transmitted from the CDX 1 will follow the settings o
126. ERO button Returns to the beginning of the song STOP button Stops recording or playback of the song PLAY button Plays back songs When REC El J is blinking pressing PLAY p gt will start recording REC CD RECORDER recording CD recorder button This is the Record button In addition to the Recording operation it is also used for manual punch in out gt Using the Record button to punch in out p 121 Blinking indicates recording standby status Lit indicates that recording in progress AUTO PUNCH section Here you can make settings for the punch in out function AUTO PUNCH AUTO IN OUT PUNCH LJ CJ AUTO PUNCH button IN button OUT button QD a y IN button This button specifies the punch in location When you press IN the current location will be memorized as the punch in location After you have specified the punch in location you can press IN to move to the punch in location OUT button This button specifies the punch out location When you press OUT the current location will be memorized as the punch out location After you have specified the punch out location you can press OUT to move to the punch out location GB AUTO PUNCH button This turns the auto punch in out function on off When this is on the button will light By using the auto punch in out function you can automati
127. Finalizing a CD R disc p 136 yore It is not possible to use COAXIAL IN and OPTICAL IN inputs simultaneously For details refer to Panel Descriptions INPUT section DIGITAL p 21 yore Except for input digital adjustment of the input is necessary For details refer to Adjust the input sensitivity step1 p 113 MEMO You can use the mastering tools while recording an external input source For details refer to the column Using the mastering tools p 160 161 J Q 9 O e D x Q Recording to a CD R disc CD Recorder Recording samples played using Pad Crossfade on a CD R disc 162 10 The sound of samples played using Pad Crossfade can be recorded directly on a CD R Insert the CD RW disc that contains the sample data you wish to record gt Sampling to a pad p 56 gt Loading Pad Sequnece from a CD RW disc p 68 Insert an unused CD R disc or a CD R disc that has been written by the CDX 1 When insert an CD R disc written audio data CD player screen appears When insert an unused CD R disc CD recording screen step 3 appears You cannot record on a CD R that has been finalized Press CD RECORDER Hl CD recording screen appears REMAIN 4 40 Cee REMAIN Ae ee 00 00 CD RECORDER EJ J will blink recording standby mode HTE eee eee LH dE Press a pad and Use the PAD SEQ
128. HOLD or the pad 2 Press HOLD once again HOLD will go out Hold will be cancelled and both samples will stop sounding 72 A Hold will not function if the Pad Play setting p 70 is DRUM HINT You can obtain a result similar to Hold by setting the Hold Play setting p 70 to TRIGGER Playing the pad samples Playing repeatedly Loop mode Loop refers to a state in which a sample is played repeatedly from its start point the beginning of the sound to its end point the end of the sound or a specified region This function is convenient when you wish to repeatedly play a sample to create the basic rhythm 1 Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice Alternatively press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons FAD FARAMETER ie ae ea Be eae TRIM 2 Make sure that the cursor is located at the JADE Stee FAD FARAHETER pad parameter icon Fy Som TT OFTIM DIVIDE TRIM 3 Press YES ENTER The pad parameter screen appears I pad Q r O xe pad Qa i ped 0 02 4 Press the pad for the sample for which you ll be making settings The selected pad blinks FAD FARAH EFM 1i7 i6 5 Press CURSOR J to move the cursor to Pad Pla GATE Loop Mode line Loor Mode Y Start Point OOOD0D000 6 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select Loop mode Loop Mode OFF No looping START END
129. HRASE wa Tef The Insert Phrase screen appears eHow et Start 0004 01 0859 DUP ation 1 059 Press CURSOR Q A sequence track select mini menu appears Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the sequence track A D that you wish to edit and press YES ENTER A mini menu disappears Use the REW lt q FF PP or the TIME VALUE dial to select the phrase that you wish to insert The currently selected phrase will be highlighted in black After you have specified the insert phrase press YES ENTER INSERT PHRASE ero ao TA E It displays where to move You can adjust the destination Insert To 0005 02 00 Use the REW lt q FF PP or the TIME V ALUE dial to set the insert destination to NOW After you have specified the insert destination press YES ENTER The specified phrase is inserted 10 When you are finished editing the sequence track press DISPLAY EDIT goes out extinguished and the display returns to the Basic screen Mem If SEQ PLAY is off press EDIT and it will be turned on lit automatically Also the STATUS of all audio tracks will go dark NEM In step 5 also press NO EXIT a mini menu disappears MEM To cancel the insert press UNDO REDO p 138 after step 9 Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence Dividing the phrase at the current location Split This function splits the phrase at NOW the current lo
130. HREWRS HAVE Naia 4 Press YES ENTER The Bank Parameter screen appears EFAHE PARAH Bank BA Hame C J Foot Switch PAD 1 5 Press CURSOR L to move the cursor to Name line 6 Use CURSOR lt gt to move to the desired character location and turn the TIME VALUE dial to input the desired character 7 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 35 Recording a sound to a pad Sampling Sampling to a pad Sampling an external sound As an example we will explain how to connect a synthesizer and sample it 56 Connect your synthesizer to the CDX 1 as described in Connecting peripheral equipment p 32 and then press INPUT SELECT LINE L R INPUT SELECT LINE L R will light Turn the INPUT SENS knob to adjust the input sensitivity Adjust the INPUT SENS knob as high as possible without causing the peak indicator to light when you play your synthesizer strongly Press PAD RECORDING PAD REC PAD REC indicator begins flashing and the Sampling screen appears The lowest numbered unused pad will automatically be selected as the sampling destination and will blink Turn the INPUT REC LEVEL knob to adjust the level so that level meter moves as far as possible without exceeding the dotted line in the upper portion If you use the INPUT REC LEVEL knob to turn down the volume of the input source the sound will be sampled to the pad at a low volume This means that whe
131. I NINI N N NIN No 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 01 02 03 01 02 01 02 03 01 Name Funk 1 Funk 2 Funk 3 Funk 4 Funk 5 Funk 6 Funk 7 Funk 8 Funk 9 Funk 10 Reggae Samba 1 Samba 2 EleRock 1 EleRock 2 Techno 1 Techno 2 Techno 3 House 1 House 2 House 3 Eurobt 1 Eurobt 2 Eurobt 3 Eurobt 4 Metronom Rock Jazz Metronom Rock Metronom Rock 1 Rock 2 Metronom Metronom Measure 2 e INI NIT RPI RPI NIE NTRIT RPI NI NI NI NI AININININIeINININININIRN Beat 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 5 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 8 8 01 01 01 01 01 02 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 01 Name Metronom Metronom Metronom Metronom Rock Metronom Rock 1 Rock 2 Blues Metronom Rock 1 Rock 2 Metronom Metronom Measure 1 1 1 1 e AININ Rhythm Pattern List No 173 D D lt r 5 U pad e 49 n E ep Mixer effect parameter functions EQ Equalizer This is a two band equalizer that is independent for each track Parameter full name EQ StereoLink EQ Stereo Link EQ On Off EQ On Off Low Gain Low Gain Low Freq Low Frequency High Gain High Gain High Freq High Frequency Loop Effect Setting OFF ON OFF ON 12 12 dB 40 Hz 1 5 kHz 12 12 dB 500 18 kHz Function When EQ Stereo Link is ON
132. ID 2 41H Manufacturer ID Roland If the transport switch PLAY was pressed the CDX 1 transmits as the device ID 7FH 3BH 01H Device Family Code CDX 1 00H 00H Device Family No RECORD STROBE ssH ssH ssH ssH Software Revision Level Status Data Bytes Status F7H EOX End of System Exclusive Message POH AEE Dev OCH or PA The CDX 1 transmits as the device ID 10H Byte Description FOH Status of System Exclusive Message O MIDI Time Code 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header Dev Device ID ae Pe tatis 06H MMC Command Message FOH 7FH Dev 01H 01H hr mn sc fr F7H 06H RECORD STROBE ye F7H EOX End of System Exclusive Message Byte Description ae RE ne a rere If the transport switch REC was pressed out of the recording condition the CDX 1 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header j i transmits as the device ID 7FH Dev Device ID 01H MIDI Time Code sub ID 1 RECORD EXIT 01H Full Message sub ID 2 Status Data Bvies Status hr type hours OyyecerZ FOH 7FH Dev 06H 07H F7H yy Time code type 0 24 frame sec Byte Description 1 25 frame sec FOH Status of System Exclusive Message 2 30 frame sec Drop frame 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header 3 30 frame sec Non drop frame Dev Device ID zzzzz Hours 0 23 06H MMC Command Message mn Minutes 0 59 07H RECORD EXIT sc Seconds 0 59 F7H EOX End of System Exclusive Message fr Frames 0 29 F7H EOX End of Exclusive If the
133. IM 2 Make sure that the cursor is located at the frat e Stee FAD FARAMETER Pad Parameter icon rah F i a OFTIM DIVIDE TRIM 3 Press YES ENTER The Pad Parameter screen appears 4 Press the pad for which you wish to make settings The corresponding pad blinks NEM 5 Press CURSOR lU to move the cursor to GENA BPM 1i7 i16 If the sample is a simple BPM Base Note vie oo eco ete rhythm you can just play back F the sample and count and specify that value in step 6 6 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select a note This is accurate and easy 7 Press CURSOR L to move the cursor to X__ 8 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to set the length of the sample as a multiple of the note value you selected in step 5 9 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 77 Editing the sample of a pad Adjusting the start end points of the sound Trim Sample You can specify the portion of the sample that are played when you press the pad What are the Start Loop points and Length The end of the sample The beginning of the sample t t Start Point i Point End Point Start Point This is the point where the sound begins By adjusting this you can skip a portion of unintended silence at the beginning of a sample so that the sample starts playing at the right moment Loop point When the sample is played repeatedly this is the point where the repetition the second and subsequent time
134. If you are monitoring through headphones use the MASTER fader and the PHONES knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level Rz For details on settings in the Sampling screen refer to Making Settings in the sampling screen p 60 With the CDX 1 s internal effects you can perform sampling while adding any of the internal effects to the input source gt Using the insert effects p 141 Using the loop effects p 145 MEMO If you wish to do it over again press UNDO REDO p 138 after step 6 Recording a sound to a pad Sampling Sampling from a CD audio clip collection inserted in the CDX 1 Here s how you can sample audio materials from a CD audio clip collection copyright free inserted in the CDX 1 Insert the audio clip CD into the CDX 1 Press PAD RECORDING PAD REC PAD REC indicator begins flashing and the Sampling screen appears ELMAR GA REMAIN FY mSs5_ TataeTyre Begs Tare MOM FT Start With MANUAL The lowest numbered vacant pad will be automatically selected as the sampling destination and will blink If necessary press a pad to change the sampling destination If the specified pad already contains a sample you will be asked Overwrite If it is OK to delete the existing sample press YES ENTER If you wish to keep that sample specify a different pad that is unused If necessary press PAD BANKS to change the pad bank gt Switching pad b
135. K Press YES ENTER A message of You can t UNDO this function appears CI EH OPTIMIZE YOU cart UNDO this FUNCIO If you press YES ENTER Optimize will be executed The display will show a message of Completed and the Basic screen will reappear If you press NO EXIT the display of step 3 reappears without executing Optimize yore After you execute Optimize it is not possible to press UNDO REDO p 138 to revert to the state before executing Optimize Ore Depending on the situation an appreciable length of time may be required for Optimize to be completed This is not a malfunction While the processing bar appears do not turn off the power with unplugging the AC adaptor How Proces51Fi Saas k If you turn off the power during the Optimize operation the CD RW disc may become unusable or the drive may be damaged 127 J D O oQ OD Xo e jab lt 3 a o jab Q jab Recording playing back a performance Repeatedly playing a specified region the Repeat function By using the Repeat function you can repeatedly play back a specified region This is convenient when you wish to check the mix balance over and over Registering the repeat region 1 Turn the TIME VALUE dial or press REW lt q FF PP to move to the location where you wish to begin repeating 2 Press REPEAT A lt 4 gt B REPEAT A lt gt B
136. LEVEL fader to adjust the recording level so that level meter moves as far as possible without exceeding the dotted line in the upper portion Press PAD X FADE PAD X FADE will light and pad crossfade will be turned on Press PLAY gt to begin recording and press a pad to play its sample If you press another pad while the first sample is sounding the first played sample will fade out and the sample of the subsequently played pad will fade in as it begins sounding Continue pressing pads as desired To stop recording press STOP W 1 If you wish to finalize the CD R disc follow the procedure described in Finalizing an CD R disc p 136 Crossfading the pad sample you play Pad Crossfade p 71 A The mastering tools p 134 cannot be used MEM You can connect an instrument and add your instrumental performance to the playback sound of the sequence Recording to a CD R disc CD Recorder Recording the sequence playback on a CD R disc Here s how you can record the playback sound of a sequence directly on a CD R 1 Press PAD SEQUENCING SEQ PLAY The mastering tools p 134 cannot be used SEQ PLAY lights and the Sequence Play SEQ FLAY LIST Bee ieee List screen appears TeSEL AZE HPCE W ELE a a ee E 2 Press CURSOR U MEMO You can connect an instrument A cursor appears on box A of Tr SEL track and add your instrumental select performance to the pla
137. MATIONM SHG capacity for recording Even in lt STANDARD gt Data Type case the displayed time in EHKG1 amp Remain shows some capacity is remaining CDX 1 Remain This displays remaining capacity time for editing in min sec sone a E When mixdown mode p 133 is selected this displays remaining remaining capacity for capacity time for recording on mastering track internal recording run out The SNG This displays the name of the CD RW disc capacity differs recording to gt Naming a song CD RW disc below section data type p 111 Data Type This will indicate the data type that was selected when the CD RW disc was formatted MEMO G gt Preparing a CD RW disc for use Format p 110 CDX 1 automatically stops BNK This shows the pad bank number and name recording when remaining gt Naming a pad bank p 55 capacity for recording is 00m00s If you optimize the disc remaining capacity for Naming a song CD RW disc recording may increase gt 1 Press UTILITY ENS Sk the Dee sete ona CD RW disc Optimize Disc The Menu are displayed as icon p 127 2 Press CURSOR gt to select the Song Parameter icon SAVE TEMFO MARE 3 Press YES ENTER The Song Parameter screen appears as PARAN Harme Marker StOF 4 Make sure that the cursor is located at the Name line Use CURSOR to move to the desired character loca
138. MPO MATCH twice Alternatively press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons FAD FARAHETER jaie as yE sm Be eae TRIM 2 Make sure that the cursor is located at the Stee FAD PARAMETER pad parameter icon F TT a OFTIM DIVIDE TRIM 3 Press YES ENTER The pad parameter screen appears 4 Press the pad whose sample you wish to set The specified pad blinks MEMO 5 Press CURSOR U to move the cursor to FAD FARAH BEPM iiy i ey ae LEMNSLA C EROS 00002611S If you wish to make settings Lene 100 for a sample of another pad TMute Grour REE Mute Group line bank you must first switch the pad bank p 54 6 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select OFF or GROUP 1 GROUP 7 7 If you wish to make settings for another sample press the appropriate pad and repeat steps 4 and 5 8 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 74 Playing the pad samples Playing a sample from a connected foot switch If a separately sold foot switch e g DP 2 or BOSS FS 5U is connected you can play the sample of a specified pad by pressing the foot switch MEMO oa This parameter has only a Specifyi ng the Fu nction of the Foot Switch single setting which will apply regardless of the song or the 1 Connect an optional foot switch DP 2 BOSS FS 5U etc to the FOOT SWITCH CD RW disc jack 2 Press UTILITY The Menu are di
139. Mastering Tool this problem is bypassed by using the input sound only for level detection and adding a specified length of delay to the sound for processing and output Input Delay under Input is the setting of the delay time for this purpose Note that supplying Delay Time causes time difference between input and output of audio signals Splitting into frequency bands To split into High middle and low frequency bands Low Split Freq Low Split Frequency and High Split Freq High Split Frequency under Input are used to specify l frequencies Level Lo Split Freq Hi Split Freq Low Freq Mid Freq High Freq EXP Expander Expands the dynamic range the proportion between the loudest and softest sounds at a certain ratio Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the expander effects on off Low Threshold Low Threshold 80 0 dB This parameter sets the volume at which the expander for the low frequency band starts working Mid Threshold Middle Threshold 80 0 dB This parameter sets the volume at which the expander for the middle frequency band starts working Hi Threshold High Threshold 80 0 dB This parameter sets the volume at which the expander for the high frequency band starts working Low Ratio Low Ratio 1 1 0 1 16 0 1 INF This parameter sets the ratio at which the output in the low frequency band is increased when the input level has dropped below the low threshold level
140. Mid Q 0 5 16 This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by Low Mid Freq A larger value results in a narrower range of change High Mid Gain High Mid Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the high midrange equalizer High Mid Freq High Mid Freq 100 10 0 kHz This parameter sets the central frequency for the high midrange equalizer High Mid Q High Mid Q 0 5 16 This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by High Mid Freq A larger value results in a narrower range of change High Gain High Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the treble equalizer Level Output Level 20 20 dB This parameter adjusts the volume after the equalizer stage 176 Insert effect algorithm list WAH Wah The wah effect creates a unique tone by changing the frequency response characteristics of a filter Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the wah effect on off Polarity Polarity UP The frequency of the filter will rise DOWN The frequency of the filter will fall Sensitivity Sens 0 100 This adjusts the sensitivity at which the filter will change in the direction determined by the polarity setting Higher values will result in a stronger response With a setting of 0 the strength of picking will have no effect Frequency Frequency 0 100 This adjusts the center frequency of th
141. NPUT SENS knobs A Es SENS MIC1 MIC2 LINE R_ DIGITAL ON Es O ME MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX y AA y y ol el SES L simut INPUT REC G INPUT SELECT button LEVEL INPUT REC LEVEL knob PEAK indicators These indicate whether distortion is occurring in the sound that is being input to the respective input jacks MIC1 MIC2 GUITAR BASS LINE HINT The PEAK indicator will light at a level below clipping level Adjust the INPUT SENS knob as high as possible without causing the PEAK indicator to light when the sound is input INPUT SENS knobs These adjust the input sensitivity of the input jacks MIC1 MIC2 GUITAR BASS LINE INPUT SELECT buttons Use these buttons to select the input source input jack that you wish to record The selected button will light When you press an INPUT SELECT button that is lit it will go dark and the input sound will be muted silenced e MIC1 Select this when you wish to record the sound of a mic connected to the MIC1 jack phone or XLR Do not use identically numbered phone type and XLR type MIC jacks simultaneously e MIC2 Gtr Bs Select this when you wish to record the sound of a mic connected to the MIC2 jack or the sound of an instrument connected to the GUITAR BASS jack Do not use identically numbered phone type and XLR type MIC jacks simultaneously e LINE Select this
142. O TEL 525 668 04 80 PANAMA SUPRO MUNDIAL S A Boulevard Andrews Albrook Panama City REP DE PANAMA TEL 507 315 0101 PARAGUAY Distribuidora De Instrumentos Musicales J E Olear y ESQ Manduvira Edeficio El Dorado Planta Baja Asuncion PARAGUAY TEL 595 21 492147 PERU VIDEO Broadcast S A Portinari 199 ESQ HALS San Borja Lima 41 REP OF PERU TEL 51 14 758226 URUGUAY Todo Musica S A Cuareim 1844 Montevideo URUGUAY CP11200 TEL 5982 924 2335 VENEZUELA Musicland Digital C A Av Francisco de Miranda Centro Parque de Cristal Nivel C2 Local 20 Caracas VENEZUELA TEL 02 285 9218 AUSTRIA Roland Austria GES M B H Siemensstrasse 4 P O Box 74 A 6063 RUM AUSTRIA TEL 0512 26 44 260 BELGIUM HOLLAND LUXEMBOURG Roland Benelux N V Houtstraat 3 B 2260 Oevel Westerlo BELGIUM TEL 014 575811 DEN MARK Roland Scandinavia A S Nordhavnsvej 7 Postbox 880 DK 2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL 039 16 6200 FRANCE Roland France SA 4 Rue Paul Henri SPAAK Parc de l Esplanade F 77 462 St Thibault Lagny Cedex FRANCE TEL 01 600 73 500 FINLAND Roland Scandinavia As Filial Finland Lauttasaarentie 54 B Fin 00201 Helsinki FINLAND TEL 9 682 4020 GERMANY Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH Oststrasse 96 22844 Norderstedt GERMANY TEL 040 52 60090 GREECE STOLLAS S A Music Sound Light 155 New National Road 26422 Patras GREECE
143. OH Status of System Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header Dev Device ID 10H or 7FH 06H MMC Command Message 03H DEFERRED PLAY MCS F7H EOX End of System Exclusive Message If the device ID on the message was as same as that of the receiving 10H or 7FH the CDX 1 goes into the fast forward condition 212 MIDI Implementation REWIND MCS Status Data Bytes Status FOH 7FH Dev 06H 05H F7H Byte Description FOH Status of System Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header Dev Device ID 10H or 7FH 06H MMC Command Message 05H REWIND MCS F7H EOX End of System Exclusive Message If the device ID on the message was as same as that of the receiving 10H or 7FH the CDX 1 goes into the rewind condition RECORD STROBE Status Data Bytes Status FOH 7FH Dev 06H 06H F7H Byte Description FOH Status of System Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header Dev Device ID 10H or 7FH 06H MMC Command Message 06H RECORD STROBE F7H EOX End of System Exclusive Message If the device ID on the message was as same as that of the receiving 10H or 7FH the CDX 1 goes into the following condition 1 The CDX 1 is in the playback condition Start Recording the tracks that status are the record standby mode 2 The CDX 1 is in the stop condition Start Playing back and Start Recording the track that status are record
144. ON ereraa a T N 25 Delete Sampie aego teased 65 de MOS harei E R E esa RNS 45 DICITA L PUNTOD onan ess teas thorrseneemeoeess 21 Digital Copy ProRiDIE soisissa 150 BIMM Diag nosis iON aranana ves 16 17 DIMM DIAS NOSICE sretni aca E 17 disc INS CTUIV rr a RE sat seh Gia ce Asaloes 35 PEMOV ING veio E NES 36 Dise Tray siere e E T R AA 30 PISPEA C BUTON siri ea tear ny mene er ree era 24 Prade CON eia etree er ner ree eee ars aan ree renee 83 85 Divide Sample visite n waitress 83 POUDE N eens errr cere epee errr eres ier rere Tener ree 174 OUD WIG aissa eae neater E 145 DEU N ana a E hintet yah N N 70 Dynamic MICHOP HONG esens e e as 204 E Eart EC ONMCClOL spesis a a 30 EDIT BUION crna A 25 29 Effects locatio ICOM sahen neva benaenmonns uae 144 FOE DU TON siansa a G 28 Emergency elect Nole erion 30 End POT aaan A 105 12 E N E E TE AEE E T ree 174 ECS BUOM setae soca eases cidce cece atl ee ese eee T 23 Eal ZE E teenaa a a 132 ae E E A E E E T aes 101 Erase Comeet a a ES 101 Erase Track CON sendiei a 107 expanding MEMOLY COV EM sirsko cies 15 220 F faded isan T wast te earned 71 faded OME eg cese tetas aie e ara aa 71 FUL UO IN serce a A eee T ae taaeeeeauabeece 27 Ruin ge lb 7 e eee nnn E EAE E EAA TAA IER A ERAS 136 204 TOO 1S WC ot a N 75 FOOT SWITCH TACK atear E A 31 FOCA NE e A 204 FOr eean a a 110 Format I y peca e E trnmedsesiane vetin isa 110 FROM DURON merei ae A AAAA 27 G CATE omaa a Aeetiaeddandediear
145. Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon Press CURSOR __ gt to select the CD R RW Disc icon Cum nm LOAD ZAME Press YES ENTER CD R RW Disc Menu are displayed as icon Press CURSOR __ gt to select the CD RW Backup icon al SAVE FORMAT OFTIM Salsas Press YES ENTER A message of Prepare a formatted destination disc appears Press YES ENTER A message of Please insert the source disc appears and the disc tray opens If the pad sequence contained in the CDX 1 s internal memory a message of You ll lose PAD SEQ data Are you sure appears If you press YES ENTER all Pad Sequence will be lost and you will go to step 7 Press NO EXIT to return to the display of step 5 If you wish to save Pad Sequence follow the procedure described of Saving Pad Sequence p 67 Insert the backup source CD RW disc The display will indicate Reading and the CDX 1 will begin reading the CD RW disc A message Please insert the Destination disc appears and the disc tray opens Insert the backup destination CD RW disc The display will indicate Writing and the CDX 1 will begin writing the CD RW disc The display of step 6 Please insert the source disc reappears and the disc tray opens As directed by the instructions that appear in the screen alternately insert the CD RW disc When the backup has been completed the display will show
146. Press the pad to designate the sampling destination If the specified pad already contains a sample you will be asked Overwrite If it is OK to delete the existing sample press YES ENTER If you wish to keep that sample specify a different pad that is unused If necessary press PAD BANKS to change the pad bank gt Switching pad banks p 54 Press PAD REC The display will indicate Waiting for PAD to start and the CDX 1 will be in sampling ready mode To abort the procedure from this state press PAD REC When you press the source pad s sampling will begin automatically When sampling is completed press PAD REC The display returns to the Basic screen A When resampling you can play a maximum of three samples simultaneously Is For details on settings in the Sampling screen refer to Making settings in the sampling screen p 60 HINT If you wish to apply an insert effect while you resample change the insert effect connection to MASTER For details on changing the insert effect connection refer to Changing the insert effect connections p 144 63 D 4 S Q Q pad ip a e pad xe pad a Recording a sound to a pad Sampling If the display indicates Memory Full If the remaining memory is completely used up during sampling the display indicates Memory Full no remaining mem
147. RE Ces 55 ae G0 Tie ae O D lt w 5 w z 2 J 2 Move the AUDIO CD fader AUDIO TRACK 7 8 fader to approximately 0 dB You can make settings so that the volume of an audio CD will be adjusted only by the MASTER MEMO fader without using the AUDIO CD fader Laman 4 ES AUDIO TRACK 7 8 fader In thi P You can play back an audio 7 JET PE OI eae CD on the CDX 1 and sample FF AUDIO CD fader AUDIO TRACK 7 8 fader will favorite phrases from the CD have no effect so step 2 will not be necessary For For details on operation refer details refer to Changing the way in which audio to Sampling from a CD audio aieiai CD volume is adjusted p 52 clip collection inserted in the CDX 1 p 57 3 Lower the MASTER fader of the CDX 1 4 Press PLAY gt The song is played back O If SEQ PLAY lights the song 5 Raise the MASTER fader to adjust the master will not be played back 6 Press STOP W The song stops 49 How to play an audio CD the CD Player Changing the playback location Moving to the previous next track E When the song is stopped Press SEARCH KX to move to the previous track Press SEARCH gt to move to the next track m When a song i
148. Roland C DX a MULTITRACK CD RECORDER AUDIO SAMPLE WORKSTATION DiscLab Owner s Manual Before using this unit carefully read the sections entitled USING THE UNIT SAFELY and IMPORTANT NOTES Owner s manual p 2 3 9 10 These sections provide important information concerning the proper operation of the unit Additionally in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit Owner s manual should be read in its entirety The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference Copyright 2001 ROLAND CORPORATION All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of ROLAND CORPORATION Roland Web Site http www roland co jp USING THE UNIT SAFELY WARNING A CAUTION INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE PREVENTION OF FIRE ELECTRIC SHOCK OR INJURY TO PERSONS About Z WARNING and Z CAUTION Notices Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe injury should the unit be used improperly Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings as well to domestic animals or pets Before using this unit make sure to read the instructions below and
149. S Oo J D n O 1 5 n Panel Descriptions AUDIO TRACK RECORD Section AUDIO TRACK RECORD indicator BOUNCE G MIX DOWN button button button CD BURNING AUDIO TRACK RECORD indicator This will light when a CD RW disc for use by the CDX 1 formatting p 110 is inserted 2 BOUNCE Button This button switches to Bounce recording Use this when you wish to combine multiple audio tracks 1 6 tracks into two audio tracks gt Combining the performances of multiple audio tracks BOunce Recording p 125 3 MIX DOWN Button This button switches to Mixdown mode Use this when you wish to combine audio tracks into a master track in order to create an original CD gt Mixing down p 133 CD BURNING Button This will light when CD Burning mode gt Completing your original CD CD Burning p 135 Power Switch POWER k POWER switch POWER Switch This is the power switch It turns the power of the CDX 1 on off Transport section MARK SEARCH REW FF button button button button SEARCH REW FF ome ge REPEAT ZERO STOP PLAY REC be JJ ea CD RECORDER REPEAT ZERO STOP PLAY REC CD RECORDER button button button button button MARK
150. SINGLE 1 1400 mS This parameter adjusts the delay time i e the interval for which sound is delayed TAP 1 700 mS Feedback Feedback 0 100 This parameter adjusts the amount of feedback Changing the amount of feedback causes the number of time the delayed sound is repeated to change as well Effect Level Effect Level 0 120 This adjusts the volume of the delay sound e 02 99 r 99 z 9 Q e A F 3 D 189 Insert effect algorithm list 8 BASS MDL Bass Guitar Modeling Models the sound of a bass guitar Obtain the sound of a bass guitar while playing an electric guitar Bass Noise Modeling Compressor 1 Suppressor Chorus 2 E MDL COMP He HEH Parameter full name Setting 1 Compressor can be replaced with Defretter DER Defretter 2 Chorus can be replaced one of the following effects Flanger Phaser TRH Tremolo Pan Function B MDL Bass Modeling Models the sound of a bass guitar Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON Character Character LOOSE TIGHT Level Level 0 100 NEM This parameter turns the bass modeling effect on off Bass tone characteristic is set When LOOSE is selected as if the string gauge was getting thicker This adjusts the volume of the bass modeling You should avoid playing chords when using the Bass modeling COMP Compressor Compressor the entire output signals when the input volume exceeds a specifie
151. So normally set it to MIDDLE SP Speaker Modeling This models the characteristics of various types of speakers Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the speaker modeling effect on off Speaker Type Speaker Type Refer to the column on page 187 Selects the type of speaker that will be modeled Mic Setting Mic Setting CENTER 1 10 cm This models the microphone position CENTER models the condition that the microphone is set in the middle of the speaker cone 1 10 cm means T that the microphone is moved away from the center of the speaker cone Mic Level Mic Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the microphone T Direct Level Direct Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound amp i 185 Insert effect algorithm list EQ Equalizer A 4 band equalizer Effect On Off Effect On Off Low Gain Low Gain Low Mid Gain Low Mid Gain Low Mid Freq Low Mid Freq Low Mid Q Low Mid Q High Mid Gain High Mid Gain High Mid Freq High Mid Freq High Mid Q High Mid Q High Gain High Gain Level Output Level OFF ON 20 20 dB 20 20 dB 100 10 0 kHz 0 5 16 20 20 dB 100 10 0 kHz 0 5 16 20 20 dB 20 20 dB This parameter turns the equalizer effect on off This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the bass equalizer This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the low midrange equa
152. TI serina i ecmtesethauatoted 176 SLOFBDOTON aoa A A nn ser 27 T Tempo Map seruran E 117 Tempo Mati aaen aA 80 TEMPO MATCH PAD EDIT button ee 25 Time STe aaa eeestieen worms 81 Time Stretch COn ennaa as a aaa 81 TIME SONG POSITION mininin ai 29 TIME VALUE Dial voce eecceccccccccceeseesesseseceeees 28 TOPU T a E TATA arn 27 tack AL once oarra a enaena 18 TRIGGER etcssnseoenencats vated atacand aan 70 EGS AIA Se sacaehgetnoxoisae ae E 78 TUNG screeni snn A ares 114 Tunim gidene a R 115 NY De oso Gotta Ree ea econ 61 U TACK OF Sa dea Nadsaiacseteeeeenats 138 UNDO REDO BUON seori AR 24 User Pa hE Casin a a A 141 UTILITY Batom erenn r AN icc salen 24 V VOHRA C MD Diena 182 VOTACOUSTIC ae 184 NOFRCGTAMI e IA 180 VOCAL MULCT sa E E 199 VOICE TRANSFORMER esisin anae 201 W Windows WAVE file iui Sate ecedbsetectscatiedes 58 X ALR EY OS aa rn E E E cette tata aaa aneiie ss 31 Y YES ENTER Button srir aAA 28 Z ZERO DUO cann N bavcaatds 27 222 224 Information When you need repair service call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below EGYPT Al Fanny Trading Office P O Box 2904 El Horrieh Heliopolos Cairo EGYPT TEL 02 4185531 REUNION Maison FO YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules Hermann Chaudron BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex REUNION ISLAND TEL 28 29 16 SOUTH AFRICA That Other Music Shop PTY Ltd 11 Melle St Braa
153. The settings can be modified but S 91A P AIIN 19440 cannot be rewritten e LINE line group A001 A050 e SIMUL simul group A051 A100 e GUITAR BASS guitar bass group BO01 B050 e MIC mic group B051 B100 D 5 Q Sy 4 O 5 os User patches U001 U100 User patches can be rewritten and are stored in internal memory If you have created a patch that you would like to use for other songs as well it is convenient to store it as a user patch Song patches S001 S100 O Song patches can be rewritten but are stored on the CD RW disc together with the Song patches 5001 5100 song data This is convenient when you have created a patch for a specific recorded cannot be selected unless a performance and would like to store that patch together with the song SD R chae e ISLS 141 More functions for the CDX 1 Using an insert effect 1 Press INSERT EFFECTS ON OFF ON OFF will light and the sound processed by the effect will be output Press INSERT EFFECTS PATCH The patch select screen appears AGG F fo CMP FAT EQ M STEREO MULTI Turn the TIME V ALUE dial to select a patch When you switch patches the effect sound will also change While you listen to the effect sound select the desired effect patch If you do not wish to use an insert effect press INSERT EFFECTS ON OFF once again ON OFF will go out and the insert effect will be off Editing the insert effe
154. Turning off the power p 34 turn off the power Please re install the memory correctly as described in How to expand the memory p 15 5 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 16 hrs In case of expanding memory other than 128 MB of memory turn on the power a message Wrong DIMM Type Turn off the power and replace w correct one appears and At this time the CDX 1 will not operate normally Ex panding the memory Memory read write test DIMM diagnostics You can perform a read write test to see whether the additional wave memory you installed can be used by the CDX 1 Perform this test after installing memory or if an error message relating to memory is displayed Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon Er ama TUHER Feaboc DIHH Press CURSOR gt to select the DIMM Diagnosis icon 4 fits me Press YES ENTER The DIMM Diagnosis screen appears DIMM DIAGHOSIS DIMM INSTALLED Colter 1 ohBe Diasrhos155 TT Press YES ENTER to execute the check When the test is complete a screen appears showing its results Memory boards that have successfully passed the write read test are marked OK at the Diagnosis Memory boards that have not passed the write read test are marked NG at the Diagnosis Memory for which NG is displayed cannot be used with the CDX 1 In this case turn off the power as described in Turning off
155. UF Press YES ENTER The display will indicate Processing and the data will be saved When saving is completed the display will show a message of Completed Press DISPLYAY to return to the Basic screen For details on each parameter refer to Parameter List p 208 re This operation does not save the Pad Sequence to CD RW In order to save the Pad Sequence you must perform the operation Saving Pad Sequence p 67 MEM Song settings can be saved on a CD RW disc when the power is turned off p 34 when a CD RW disc is removed p 36 or when you mixdown p 133 Recording playing back a performance Increasing the free space on a CD RW disc Optmize Disc When you perform overdubbing p 124 or punch in out p 121 the data that you rewrite replace actually remains on the CD RW disc In some cases this unwanted data may occupy a significant amount of space on the CD RW disc This will cause the time available for recording to be less than it should be By executing Optimize you can erase the unwanted data from the CD RW disc increasing the amount of available space on the CD RW disc Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon Press CURSOR __ gt to select the CD R RW Disc icon fnug Congr LOAD ZAME Press YES ENTER The CD R RW Disc Menu are displayed as icon Press CURSOR __ gt to select the Optimize Disc icon SAVE FORMATE BAC
156. UITAR Parameter full name Setting Function A MDL Acoustic Guitar Modeling This models the sound of an acoustic guitar Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the acoustic guitar modeling effect on off Pick Up Type Pick Up Type SINGLE HUMBUCK _ Set this to the type of pickup on the connected guitar Character Character STD This is a normal acoustic guitar JUMBO This is an acoustic guitar with a body that is bigger than STANDARD The bass sound is powerful ENHANCE This is an acoustic guitar that with a more responsive attack so the guitar will retain more of its prominence in almost any situation PIEZO This models the sound you would get from a pickup installed on an electric acoustic guitar During the attack a certain amount of compression will be applied Top Hi Top Hi 100 100 Adjust the level of the direct sound from the strings That is it adjusts the harmonic contents Top Mid Top Mid 100 100 This adjusts the interference to the strings made by the top plate That is it adjusts the attack sense Body Body 100 100 This adjusts the resonance of the sound caused by the body That is it adjusts the softness and fatness of the sound which is the typical characteristics of acoustic guitars Level Level 0 100 This adjusts the volume of the acoustic guitar modeling If Top Hi Top Mid and Body are all set to 100 there will be no sound MEM If you set the pickup select
157. URSOR QO U to move the FAD FARAH EFH 1 20 00 P7 sapr a Start Point 0000000 cursor to the point Start Point Loop Oo Pori Point or Length End you want to WT Lensth lt End gt 0000876 adjust 5 Press PREVIEW TO or FROM to play back the sound as described below TO Playback once from one second before the current point to the current y p point FROM Playback once from the current location to one second after the current location 6 While listening to the sound turn the TIME V ALUE dial to make fine adjustments to the current point 7 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Making fine adjustments to the location at which a sample starts ends Using scrub to set a point Scrub Preview Scrub Preview repeatedly plays an extremely brief region 45 milliseconds either before or after the point At the same time the sample waveform will be displayed in the screen While monitoring the displayed waveform and the sound you can turn the TIME VALUE dial to easily make precise adjustments to the point Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice Alternatively press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons Press CURSOR lt gt J to select the Pad Parameter icon Press YES ENTER The Pad Parameter screen appears Press CURSOR Q LU to move the cursor to the point Start Point Loop Point or
158. VALUE dial to select ON Marker Stop If this is turned ON playback will stop automatically at locations where a marker has been assigned J D O o Q OD a Xo 2 jab lt gt o jab Q jab 6 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 131 Editing a recorded performance to create an audio CD Preparing to write a CD R disc Mixdown The process of combining the performances recorded on multiple audio tracks into two channel stereo is called mixdown Before you mixdown you will complete the For details on the loop effect song by adjusting the tone equalizer left right position pan loop effects and refer to Using the loop volume balance settings of each track effects p 145 Setting the left right position pan of each audio track MEMO 1 Press TRACK EDIT PAN Pan settings can also be changed while the song is being The pan setting screen for the audio tracks Gill TRACK i Liod recorded If you change the pan appears D 2 E GY Cy Ge T G Ca setting during recording the 2 73456 7 amp changes will be recorded just as you make them 2 Press CURSOR lt _ gt to select the audio track that you wish to adjust 3 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to set the pan 4 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Adjusting the tone of each audio track Equalizer The mixer section of the CDX 1 provides a two band equalizer EQ for each audio track
159. Xo e jab lt D o jab Q jab within 1 seconds of an existing Moving to the location of a marker marker To move to a marker earlier than the playback location press SEARCH KK Each time you press SEARCH KX you will move to the previous marker To move to a marker later than the playback location press SEARCH PP Deleting a marker Markers will make searching more convenient but an excessive number of markers can actually make searching more difficult It is a good idea to delete markers as they become no longer needed 1 Press SEARCH KK KK to move to the marker that you wish to delete 2 Press MARK and the marker will be deleted If markers exist after the deleted marker they will be renumbered downward by one 129 Recording playing back a performance Changing the location of a marker 1 7 83 Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon Press CURSOR lt to select the Marker ee HARKER Edit icon 4 Foug Fong LOAD SALE Press YES ENTER The Marker Edit screen appears MAREE R Ho Harme C J LOC OOF 00500 00 Make sure that the cursor is located at the NO Turn the TIME VALUE dial to specify the number of the marker that you wish to edit Press CURSOR to move the cursor to LOC Turn the TIME VALUE dial to specify the desired location for the marker Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Nam
160. Y UTILITY and UNDO REDO Button T UNDO DISPLAY UTILITY REDO CJ CJ OO DISPLAY Q utititty UNDO REDO button button button SAMPLE PADS SEQUENCING Section DISPLAY Button Use these to move between screen pages in the display gt Switching among the Basic screen p 37 UTILITY Button Displays a screen where you can access a variety of functions including formatting a CD RW disc backing up samples and initializing the system UNDO REDO Button Cancel the last performed recording sampling or editing operation and return to the previous state By pressing UNDO REDO once again you can bring back the canceled recording or re execute the editing operation gt Undoing a recording editing operation p 138 TEMPO MATCH PAD EDIT button SEQ PLAY PAD REC Oina PAD XFADE button 2 PAD BANKS button button 8 8 DELETE button CREATE button EDIT button BLE Bs PLE PAIDS SEQUENCI PAD TI Mi cH DEI TE SEQ IH AY C3 TE G STATUS button eh LEVEL PAD PAD RECORDING PAD SEQUENCING 64 4 CLIP BOARD button HOLD button PAD SEQ LEVEL fader PAD X FADE pad crossfade button Use this button to play pad samples while crossfading If you press another pad while a sample is already sounding the currently sounding sample will be faded out and the sample of the pad you pressed subseq
161. a message of Completed Press YES ENTER return to the display of step 5 10 Press DISPLAY return to the Basic screen NEM Backing up a CD RW disc requires a considerable amount of time It can take as long as twenty minutes The number of times that discs must be exchanged will depend on the amount of performance data saved on the CD RW disc and on the amount of internal memory re When you backup song data all data previously on that CD RW disc will be erased Be careful not to insert a CD RW disc that contains data you wish to keep 147 SODIAAP AIIN 19440 D S 4 O o E 5 More functions for the CDX 1 Connecting with a digital audio device The output of a digital audio device such as a CD player DAT recorder or MD recorder can be directly recorded in digital form on the CDX 1 In Order to Make a Digital recording with CD player 148 At the factory settings the CDX 1 cannot record the output of a digital audio device via the OPTICAL IN or COAXIAL IN connectors If you wish to make connections with a digital audio device you must perform the following procedure Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon Press CURSOR gt to select the System icon TEMFO MAREK SOHG aS TEM Press YES ENTER The System settings screen appears Press CURSOR to move the cursor to STEM PARGh ver di 0i CD DigitalREC amp Foot SH PLAY lt STOP
162. aa n eE RETE EE 22 REW DOON conira e TA 26 ROYO C d Eaa EAN 116 Rey thi Faken Lisboara ie n A 172 KRENGEL EY EL ski OD sicer ioiii iere i E 22 S Sample nerin en E T ES 54 Sample LEVEL naserie eea E 76 sample Fale seign a RN cus savas 110 Sampi erii o sates 54 SAM OL TNE ao N tae ela tenn tats 60 Save PAID SEQ ICON restini 67 SCRUB DURON enra E 2 Scrub PECVICW acens nino 140 SEARCH PIONS arnee T E 26 SEO PLAY DUIO cacce 25 SEO TR anai N 29 sequence Realtime Recording icstesiesi tien oar raieiat eho 90 Step RECOk MINS soseri EN 93 EPO eei a S 88 LEA CKS or E 88 sequence track edit Adjust TIMO sssini ananta 104 CUT sne 6 a erste eee edie ew ooaa iereculeveanaaes 100 Dele suoran iene ete serene nce errore sere trent se eter 107 BLAS C nar eta wat uel tesa aeneeas 101 MSE oenina 102 MOVE srne peN E ee mewes 98 Fasie in Aa 99 DOLL E PE E AN A E E E acl suaates 103 DEMULLCOWI seassszesulss osanaesshsouisactnesetonsdisnteerancenawitaouiabonesieues 34 SIMUL aes vanes ihn eaiaste aliens aistleinnas Suan unaa astatsaleees earaneus 21 DONE PIRES aeree A E 141 SPIE pirisee nett as 103 SPICICOR sasoznseacgancloossasonueunnsgacosshessstadisweimtaasameannuetaancenst 103 STANDARD ereou sia Ea AN 111 STANDR D tscssesastapctactouesanaedsacoaelsaaatetoicesiaemiseationaeaaett 60 Start LOME aera e a N 78 StA W ILI pe NEN 61 STAR FEND erisus TN 73 STA TUS DUHOM desbondar aa 20729 STATUS DUON ernen on 23 EP RECON GIS ceges iipon a 93 STEREO MUL
163. ability of a disc that has been previously used by another device Approximately 20 minutes will be required STANDARD The data on the disc will merely be invalidated logically Normally you should select this Approximately 10 minutes will be required Press CURSOR to move the cursor to Data Type line Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the data type For details on the data type refer to the column What is the data type p 111 It is not possible to change the data type while you are working on the song Press YES ENTER A message of Format OK appears in the Initialize all data screen Format OK Press CURSOR __ gt to select OK and press YES ENTER The format is executed When formatting is completed the display will show a message of Completed and the Basic screen will reappear If you press YES ENTER to select CANCEL the CD RW Format screen will reappear Press YES ENTER to return to the Basic screen discs e Insert CD RW disc to improve preciseness of writing e Reserve area for recording e Reserve area to save data of pad sequence Thus it take sometime to complete formatting Prepare for recording Multitrack recording Monitoring the sound of a connected Instrument Selecting the input source Press the INPUT SELECT button s for the instrument you will record The indicator of the selected button s will light Adjusting t
164. ack Feedback 0 100 Effect Level Effect Level 0 120 198 This parameter turns the delay effect on off This is a simple delay The delayed sound is panned across the left and right channels This will be effective when stereo output is used This parameter adjusts the delay time i e the interval for which sound is delayed This parameter adjusts the amount of feedback Changing the amount of feedback causes the number of time the delayed sound is repeated to change as well This adjusts the volume of the delay sound 12 VOCAL MULTI Insert effect algorithm list This is a multi effect designed for vocals It provides the basic effects needed for vocals Compressor De esser Noise Suppressor Parameter full name Enhancer Equalizer Setting 1 Chorus can be replaced one of the following effects Flanger Phaser DEL Doubling Tremolo Pan Function COMP Compressor Compressor the entire output signals when the input volume exceeds a specified value Effect On Off Effect On Off Sustain Sustain Attack Attack Level Output Level OFF ON 0 100 0 100 0 100 This parameter turns the compressor effects on off Adjusts the range time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain Adjusts the strength of the attack Larger values will result in a sharper attack creating a more clearly defined sound Adjusts the volume DES
165. ack Larger values will result in a sharper attack creating a more clearly defined sound Level Output Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume NS Noise Suppressor This effect reduces the noise and hum Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the noise suppressor effect on off Threshold Threshold 0 100 Adjust this parameter as appropriate for the volume of the noise If the noise level is high a higher setting is appropriate If the noise level is low a lower setting is appropriate Adjust this value until the decay of the sound is as natural as possible Release Release 0 100 Adjusts the time from when the noise suppressor begins to function until volume reaches 0 High settings for the Threshold parameter may result in there being no sound when you play with your instruments volume turned down E GUITAR Parameter full name Setting Function ACP Acoustic Processor With this feature you can change the sound from a pickup on an electric acoustic guitar into a richer sound Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the acoustic processor effect on off Body Body 100 100 This adjusts the resonance of the sound caused by the body That is it adjusts the softness and fatness of the sound which is the typical characteristics of acoustic guitars Mic Distance Mic Distance 100 100 This models the distance between the microphone capturing the sound of an acoustic guitar and the
166. ack is ready for recording It is not possible designated the audio track corresponding to playing sequence track recording destination For sequence tracks and audio tracks correspond refer to Playing sequence tracks and audio tracks simultaneously p 97 8 Press ZERO 4 to return the SONG POSITION to 0001 01 000 beginning of the song Alternatively you can move to a desired location so that recording will start from that point 9 Press REC El REC EJ blink recording standby mode 10 Press PLAY gt and recording will begin 11 Press STOP ff to stop recording A message of Keep take NO YES Do you want wish to save the take on CD RW disc appears 12 If you wish to save the take press YES ENTER When CDX 1 complete to save BOUNCE will go to dark and the STATUS of the selected recording destination tracks will go light in green If you press NO EXIT saving to CD RW discs will be cancelled 13 Listen to the result of bounce recording Press PAD SEQUENCING SEQ PLAY to go dark Press PLAY gt to play back audio tracks you selected recording destination 108 Creating an audio CD Prepare for recording Multtrack recording What is multitrack recording The CDX 1 provides eight audio tracks that are used to independently record and manage the parts that make up a song You can record separate parts on each audio track for example recording the
167. acking guitar between left and right is to record the same backing performance twice on separate audio tracks and then pan the two tracks to left and right This is known as doubling The CDX 1 provides a DOUBL N doubling p 202 insert effect that lets you produce a doubling effect without having to record the same performance twice Select two audio tracks and choose stereo recording and use the DOUBL N doubling effect as you play the backing This will produce a spacious doubling effect DOUBL N doubling is also provided as a loop effect By using the DOUBL N p 174 loop effect you can produce a doubling effect even from a single track mono recording allowing you to make more efficient use of the audio tracks Record 120 1 Press REC Hj REC R blink recording standby mode Press PLAY gt REC EJ and the STATUS of the audio track selected as the recording destination will change from a blinking red light to a steady red light and recording will begin Press STOP I to stop recording A message of Keep take NO YES Do you wish to save the take on CD RW disc appears If you wish to save the take press YES ENTER If you press NO EXIT saving to CD RW discs will be cancelled Using the insert effects p 141 Using the loop effects p 145 Recording playing back a performance Re recording only a mistake Punch
168. ad Edit menu are displayed as icons Denne processing Pau appears do not turn off the ma power with unplugging the 2 Press CURSOR gt to select the eres OF RIMIZE SAMPLE AC adaptor o pimize Sampe icon SAT aF a0 OLVICGE TRIM k 3 Press YES ENTER A message of You can t UNDO this SAMPLE OPTIMIZE HINT function appears You can t UNDO A rough figure of the time this FUNCION remaining is indicated as Remain m s in the 4 Press YES ENTER Sampling screen Check this A message of Are you sure appears araya same progresses and if the 5 If you press YES ENTER Optimize will be executed remaining memory is running t f the Optimi The display will show a message of Completed and the Basic screen will reappear ak eum Gann Sample procedure If you press NO EXIT the display of step 3 reappears without executing Optimize there is no increase in the remaining memory even after Optimize Sample is executed If there is no increase in the remaining memory even after Optimize Sample is executed first delete unneeded data then try Optimize Sample again gt Deleting a sample Delete Sample p 65 Recording a sound to a pad Sampling Deleting a sample Delete Sample Here s how you can delete an unwanted sample to free up that pad Deleting samples individually 1 Hold down PAD RECORDING DELETE and Press a pad to specify the sample that you wish t
169. ad while the first sample is playing the first played Trigger mode sample will be faded out and the sample of the subsequently played pad will be Te ornada oeri Daye j when you press the pad and faded in as it starts playing will continue playing even when you release the pad The au pad Es Q r 4 xe pad a sp pad 5 E O 02 4 To cancel Pad Crossfade press Pad X FADE i sound will stop when you PAD X FADE will go out and Pad Crossfade will be turned off press the pad once again 71 Playing the pad samples Making the sound continue even after you release the pad Hold In some cases you may want a sample whose Pad Play setting p 70 is set to GATE start sounding when you press the pad and stop sounding when you release it to continue sounding even after you take your hand away from the pad In such cases you can use the Hold function Using Hold 1 Hold down a pad that is set to GATE and press HOLD HOLD will light indicating that Hold has been enabled The sample will continue playing even after you release HOLD or the pad 2 Press HOLD once again HOLD will go out Hold will be cancelled and the sample will stop sounding Using Hold for multiple samples After you have enabled Hold in step 1 of the preceding procedure 1 Hold down another pad and press HOLD Both samples will be held and will continue playing even after you release
170. additional performance while listening to an existing performance Overdubbing 124 Select Me cudilo Maick 10 TOC OL ai earaciewinronnindoulean ities wat siaitaecsinsntisopt suentastnee gi inaiivamaueatineutana taunts 124 Recording while youlisten to the playbackina eee 124 Combining the performances of multiple audio tracks Bounce Recording ssseee 125 BOUNCE recording DIOCESE UTC eae icine aac Grassi cota a aaa A eee 125 Playing back and stopping a recorded performance eseessosseessesseeseeseossoeseoseossossesssessessesssessessses 126 Paying PACK SLOP DING acti as tu isiont nd Mavtaee ls nation atelier a aomanantn 126 Adjusting Ene VO lume Of CAC tralia ys siae ee csea tenant E 126 Silencing a SPCCHIC AUGIO tree Mute a5 ira sic axttr a aes ea At aera canees 126 Saving Sone settings on a CD RW ise sirrien nenea e 126 SAVS DOING COLES Sis aviccas pict aa sate ceadnestesacuaen aaa Saees EE 126 Increasing the free space on a CD RW disc Optimize DisC esseeseessossoeseoseoesesseossesseesesesessessses 127 Repeatedly playing a specified region the Repeat function e seeseessesseeseessossosseossossosseossessess 128 Registering therc peatre iOler nr n a T ane 128 Cancelo Merc isti MOM siceisiass staan a OE 128 Assigning markers within a song MarkeTr e eseeseeseesseeseessesseessessossesseossoeseossessessesssesseesesssessessses 129 ASSO AT KOT poea rac vices a auc aieaas aaa nan leant Ae ae ian e
171. al Value Bank LEV1 Initial Value Bank x Bank 1 1 Initial Value Bank x Bank 1 1 100 0 ekk kk Initial Value Bank Bank 1 1 Initial Value GATE OFF 00000000 00000000 00000000 100 Parameter List Value HIGH STANDARD LONG1 LONG2 STEREO MONO MANUAL LEV 1 LEV 8 PAD gt OFF 20ms 40ms 80ms 160ms 320ms Value Bank No 1 64 Pad No 1 8 Bank No 1 64 Pad No 1 8 Bank No 1 64 Pad No 1 8 Value END POINT AUTO 0 5 AUTO 1 0 AUTO 1 5 AUTO 2 0 MANUAL Bank No 1 64 Pad No 1 8 Bank No 1 64 Pad No 1 8 LEV1 LEV8 1 OFF ON 2 Value Bank No 1 64 Pad No 1 8 LEV1 LEV8 Value Bank No 1 64 Pad No 1 8 Bank No 1 64 Pad No 1 8 Value Bank No 1 64 Pad No 1 8 Bank No 1 64 Pad No 1 8 50 0 150 0 20 00 500 00 Value Bank No 1 64 Pad No 1 8 Bank No 1 64 Pad No 1 8 Value GATE TRIGGER DRUM OFF START END LOOP END 00000000 99999999 00000000 99999999 00000000 99999999 0 100 OFF GROUP 1 GROUP 7 E E 1 255 209 gel pad pad 3 i 49 S E 2 os Parameter List E Pad Bank Parameter Parameter name Display Initial Value Value Bank Number Bank 1 1 64 Bank Name Name 10 characters Foot Switch PAD Foot Switch PAD 1 1 8 Pad Bank Erase Parameter Parameter name Display Initial Value Value Erase Bank Bank 1 1 64 Pad Bank Protect Parameter Parameter name Display Initial Value Value Bank Number Bank 1
172. al copying Digital Copy Prohibit When digitally recording from the CDX 1 to an MD recorder or similar device you can prohibit subsequent digital copying from the recorded MD to another MD recorder If digital copying is prohibited it will be impossible for the MD that was digitally copied from the CDX 1 to be subsequently copied in digital form to another MD 1 Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon 2 Press CURSOR gt to select the System icon TEMFO MARE soh Eee 3 Press YES ENTER The System settings screen appears 4 Press CURSOR lU to move the cursor to Seesaw lelo er i od i a Audio CD Fader ON DC opy Erotect CI DisitalREC OFF Y DLCoOFY Protect 5 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select ON Subsequently it will not be possible for a MD digitally recorded from the CDX 1 to be again copied in digital form to another MD recorder D Copy Protect digital copy protect Specify whether digital copying of a digitally copied tape will be prohibited ON Digital copying will be prohibited THRU A Copy Protect Signal is output with digital signals that are input from DIGITAL IN COAXIAL IN or OPTICAL IN with Copy Protect Signal When using the CD player functionality p 49 of the CDX 1 a Copy Protect Signal is output with digital signals that are playing back track with Copy Protect Signal 6 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Som
173. ality compression or expansion you must first perform the procedure of Displaying the correct tempo of a sample Owner s Manual p 77 to specify the number of beats in the original sample In the case of samples for which it is difficult to calculate a tempo such as a narration vocal part or a long sustained sound set the number of beats to 0 1 Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice Alternatively press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons FAD FARAMETER a Gy D gt FARAH OFTIM DIVIDE TRIM ARPES TEMPO MATCH HON 2 Press CURSOR lt _ gt to select the Tempo Match Now icon a FT E an ae HATZ TRIH HEMLZ STRETC 3 Press YES ENTER The Tempo Match Now screen appears TEMPO MATCH HOH 4 Press CURSORI Q ILU I lt I gt to select the pad bank number and pad number for each item and specify the desired number for each To set the pad bank number turn the TIME VALUE dial To set the pad number either press a pad or turn the TIME VALUE dial Source Specify the sample whose length you want to adjust To Specify the pad to which the length adjusted sample will be assigned 5 Press YES ENTER After a while the expand compress sample is assigned to the destination pad If the destination pad already contains a sample the Overwrite message appears If it is OK to overwrite the existing sample press YES ENTER
174. allowing you to independently adjust the tone of the low frequency and high frequency ranges 1 Press TRACK EDIT EQ The equalizer setting screen appears Ga TRACK i ER SterecLinL Bi Fa On Off OFF YT LoW Gain Od5 2 Press CURSOR lt _ gt to select the audio track that you wish to adjust 3 Use CURSOR lJ to move the cursor to the line of the parameter you wish to set 4 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to change the value gt For details on the parameters refer to Mixer effect parameter functions p 174 5 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Adjusting the overall volume balance Master Balance Here s how to adjust the overall volume balance 1 Press MASTER TRK EDIT The Master Balance Setting screen appears HASTER Bal ance 2 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the overall balance 3 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 132 Editing a recorded performance to create an audio CD Mixing down After listening to repeated playbacks and adjusting the pan equalizer loop effects and volume balance settings of each audio track to the desired settings you are ready to mixdown Press AUDIO TRACK RECORD MIX DOWN MIX DOWN will light and you will be in mixdown ready mode If the pad sequence contained in the CDX 1 s internal memory a message of Save PAD SEQ Data appears MIX DOWN will blink If you wish to save the pad sequence on a
175. ally the same as the measure length for playback gt S O oF o Q o oc Q 0 S 7p ovn 50 aog jez 4D N a difference may accumulate gradually due to inaccuracies in calculation Also pressing gt Rest will produce a rest of the same length of the preceding sample If you press gt before pressing the first pad it will be ignored Duration Duration determines the length that the phrase will be held relative to the step input interval Use the TIME V ALUE dial to set the value in the range of 1 100 Normally you will set this to 100 For example suppose that you set Step to MEAS 1 measure and step record by repeatedly pressing a pad that contains a one measure phrase In this case if you set Duration to 50 the phrase will be recorded from the beginning of each measure but will play back only for the first half of each measure lt An example of step recording by repeatedly pressing the same pad gt Duration 100 100 htt Duration 50 Adding dynamics while you step record The volume level of step recorded phrases will be the same as the volume level of the samples you use p 76 On the CDX 1 samples will sound at a fixed volume regardless of the strength with which you press the pad If you wish to add dynamics to each step during step recording it is best to prepare several pads containing the same sample but different volume levels an
176. alog audio signals Connect them to an audio device such as a CD player or to a keyboard or rhythm machine GUITAR BASS Jack An electric guitar or bass can be connected to this jack Since this is a high impedance input a guitar or bass can be connected directly r Impedance p 205 3 MIC1 jack phone type XLR type These jacks allow you to connect a mic If you are recording a vocal alone use the MIC1 jack Phone type and XLR type jacks are provided Do not use identically numbered phone type and XLR type MIC jacks simultaneously The phone type jack is TRS and supports both balanced and unbalanced connections 2 MIC2 jack phone type XLR type These jacks allow a mic to be connected Use them if you are recording acoustic guitar with a mic or if you are recording a chorus together with MIC1 Both phone type and XLR type jacks are provided Do not use identically numbered phone type and XLR type MIC jacks simultaneously The phone type jack is TRS and supports both balanced and unbalanced connections Tfan instrument is connected to the GUITAR BASS jack the input from the GUITAR BASS jack will take priority The input from the mic connected to MIC2 phone type XLR type cannot be recorded 31 A Oo J D n O o 5 n Basic operation of the CDX 1 Connecting peripheral equipment Make connections as shown in the diagram below Before you begin making connectio
177. anks p 54 Press PLAY gt to play back the audio CD use the AUDIO CD fader AUDIO TRACK 7 8 fader to adjust the recording level so that level meter moves as far as possible without exceeding the dotted line in the upper portion The meter moves high level as possible without If you use the AUDIO CD fader AUDIO TRACK 7 8 fader to turn down the volume of the CD player the sound will be sampled to the pad at a low volume 4 Sei REMAIN rma TataTyre Bo nal This means that when you raise the volume of the pad TSF e Mono See Y Start with MANUAL for playback noise may be more obtrusive When you adjust the volume press STOP W Press PLAY gt to play back the audio CD and at the appropriate timing press PAD REC The display will indicate Now recording and sampling will begin When sampling is completed press PAD REC When sampling is completed the CD Player screen appears Press If to stop playback of the audio CD exceeding the limit shown as dotted line Ry For details on settings in the Sampling screen refer to Making Settings in the Sampling screen p 60 A If you make settings so that the volume of an audio CD will be adjusted using the AUDIO CD fader AUDIO TRACK 7 8 fader p 52 Recording level is fixed 0 dB when Audio CD fader is OFF p 52 HINT If you set Start with in the sampling screen to p sampling will
178. arameter functions p 174 LOOP EFFECTS RTN LEVEL DELAY REVERB LJ Ce DELAY button iain iat yw 2 REVERB button RTN LEVEL knob DELAY button This button accesses a screen where you can set the volume send level that is sent from each audio track to the chorus delay doubling loop effect and a screen where you can edit the chorus delay doubling settings Chorus delay doubling cannot be used simultaneously You can select and use only one at a time REVERB button This button accesses a screen where you can set the volume send level that is sent from each audio track to the loop effect and a screen where you can edit the reverb settings G RTN LEVEL return level knob This knob adjusts the volume that is returned from the reverb the return level Panel Descriptions AUDIO TRACK section STATUS buttons AUDIO TRACKS L AUDIO CD R 2 AUDIO TRACK faders STATUS buttons 1 8 These switch the status of each audio track The current status is shown by the color of the but
179. area exposed to rain or other moisture Maintenance For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water To remove stubborn dirt use a cloth impregnated with a mild non abrasive detergent Afterwards be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft dry cloth Never use benzine thinners alcohol or solvents of any kind to avoid the possibility of discoloration and or deformation Additional Precautions e Unfortunately it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored on a CD R RW disc once it has been lost Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data e Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit s buttons sliders or other controls and when using its jacks and connectors Rough handling can lead to malfunctions e Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display e If you put stickers or adhesive tape on the panel surface peel slowly Or the prints may be removed together e When connecting disconnecting all cables grasp the connector itself never pull on the cable This way you will avoid causing shorts or damage to the cable s internal elements e To avoid disturbing your neighbors try to keep the unit s volume at reasonable levels You may prefer to use headphones so you do not need to be concerned about those around you especially when it is late at night e When you need to transport t
180. at the Target line use CURSOR lt L gt to select the pad bank number and pad number for each item specifying the sample containing the empty sections at the start and end of sound Select the pad bank number by turning the TIME VALUE dial Select the pad number either by pressing a pad or by turning the TIME VALUE dial 5 Press CURSOR lU to move the cursor to Threshold line 6 Turn the TIME V ALUE dial to select the volume level LEV1 LEV8 necessary for detection of the empty sections The higher the numeral the greater the volume these sections can have while still being regarded as containing no sound 7 When you have finished making the settings press YES ENTER When remove of the empty sections is finished Completed appears in the display 8 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 79 Q n co pes J 4p op fed 3 d 4 eo o fed O fed Q Editing the sample of a pad Expanding and Compressing a sample to modify the length or tempo If you want the tempo or length of samples to match you can stretch or shorten the time that the sample is played Matching the tempo to another sample Tempo Match 80 It is easier to edit your song if the materials you collected are of a consistent tempo The CDX 1 makes it easy to match the tempo of different samples Since this function needs to accurately calculate the tempo in order to perform a high qual
181. ata on a CD RW dis rasre Tnn a a a suntan het at aia 147 Connecting with a digital audio device sissciscscsciscssdnssicasstintssonstassacanstacastecedsstesansessawosedadicssassessac eneaes 148 In Order to Make a Digital recording with CD player s sssesesesessssesesessssesesesssessesesesesessen 148 To Prevent Digital recording with CI Pla VOUs sic eacccccte dete celiate ci aR 149 Prohibiting digital copying Digital Copy Prohibit cece ce cceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneeees 150 Using the CDX 1 with other MIDI devices ssccesseeeeeeeeneeeeees 151 MIDI PamGarnie otal svsssscsscscssiesiicentisiesecsiscawiaicessieacadsiasasssiacetsausttussbiestasnsces aaa aaraa e paa eaa aaa 151 Switching MIDT OUFTHRU voii a a a ae 152 Using MIDI to control the CDX 1 from another device eeseessesseeseessossceseoseoesesseossesseesesssessessses 153 Play SAIN PCS enn N A E S 153 gt ivahiala Ga atsy pad DANK Gaememertet ene reeereerenres Teerrery errr rer reverent R aeererre tr rt ere 153 Synchronized playback with the CDX 1 as the master eeseoosoeseoseossessesssesseesesssossosseoseossossessse 154 Usine VIS Master aeii na aOR neaseercestandranct ta tear aiden T 154 USNE MMC ortsen a a Ea Ea a a 156 sme the CDA Tas the MIME Maste isi sccssscstzscsesssateasualsvaateedevantiendar N 156 Using the CDX Lasan MMC Slave craon aE E N 157 Using an external MIDI sound module to play the rhythm guide eoeseoseessosseossessossesseoss
182. ate If the noise level is low a lower setting is appropriate Adjust this value until the decay of the sound is as natural as possible Release Release 0 100 Adjusts the time from when the noise suppressor begins to function until volume reaches 0 High settings for the Threshold parameter may result in there being no sound when you play with your instruments volume turned down Modulation effect type The Modulation effect type can be selected from the following effects For details on each effect refer to Available types of modulation and their effect p 202 O FLANGER Flanger The flanger effect gives a twisting jet airplane like character to the sound O CHORUS Chorus A sound with a subtly shifted pitch is added to the direct sound making the final output sound thicker and broader O PHASER Phaser By adding varied phase portions the phaser effect gives a whooshing swirling character to the sound O P SHIFT Pitch Shifter This effect changes the pitch of the original sound up or down within a range of two octaves O DOUBL N Doubling An effect of multiple sounds heard together a doubling effect is produced O TRM PAN Tremolo Pan Tremolo is an effect that creates a cyclic change in volume Pan cyclically moves the stereo position between left and right when stereo output is used In case of Phase output will become monaural DLY Delay This creates a thicker sound by apply
183. ate for the volume of the noise If the noise level is high a higher setting is appropriate If the noise level is low a lower setting is appropriate Adjust this value until the decay of the sound is as natural as possible Release Release 0 100 Adjusts the time from when the noise suppressor begins to function until volume reaches 0 High settings for the Threshold parameter may result in there being no sound when you play with your instruments volume turned down Modulation effect type The Modulation effect type can be selected from the following effects For details on each effect refer to Available types of modulation and their effect p 202 O FLANGER Flanger The flanger effect gives a twisting jet airplane like character to the sound O CHORUS Chorus A sound with a subtly shifted pitch is added to the direct sound making the final output sound thicker and broader O PHASER Phaser By adding varied phase portions the phaser effect gives a whooshing swirling character to the sound O P SHIFT Pitch Shifter This effect changes the pitch of the original sound up or down within a range of two octaves O DOUBL N Doubling An effect of multiple sounds heard together a doubling effect is produced O TRM PAN Tremolo Pan Tremolo is an effect that creates a cyclic change in volume Pan cyclically moves the stereo position between left and right when stereo output is used n case of P
184. ble Adjusts the time from when the noise suppressor begins to function until volume reaches 0 High settings for the Threshold parameter may result in there being no sound when you play with your instruments volume turned down The Modulation effect type can be selected from the following effects For details on each effect refer to Available types of modulation and their effect p 202 O FLANGER Flanger The flanger effect gives a twisting jet airplane like character to the sound O CHORUS Chorus A sound with a subtly shifted pitch is added to the direct sound making the final output sound thicker and broader O PHASER Phaser By adding varied phase portions the phaser effect gives a whooshing swirling character to the sound O P SHIFT Pitch Shifter This effect changes the pitch of the original sound up or down within a range of two octaves O DOUBL N Doubling An effect of multiple sounds heard together a doubling effect is produced O TRM PAN Tremolo Pan Tremolo is an effect that creates a cyclic change in volume Pan cyclically moves the stereo position between left and right when stereo output is used In case of Phase output will become monaural DLY Delay This creates a thicker sound by applying a delayed sound to the direct sound Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON Effect Type Type SINGLE TAP Delay Time Delay Time SINGLE 1 1400 mS TAP 1 700 mS Feedb
185. cally punch in out at the previously specified locations gt Automatically punching in out at the specified locations Auto punch in out p 122 PREVIEW section Here you can make settings for the Preview function By using the Preview function you can precisely adjust the current location while listening to the sound gt Cueing to a precise location Preview p 139 PREVIEW SCRUB TO Ii FROM LI Cy CI SCRUB button G FROM button TO button SCRUB button This button causes an extremely short region of sound that ends or begins at the current location to be played repeatedly p 140 TO button This button plays the sound from a point one second earlier than the current location to the current location once only If you are in Scrub mode pressing TO will select the region ending at the current location as the scrub region FROM button This button plays the sound from the current location to a point one second later once only If you are in Scrub mode pressing FROM will select the region beginning at the current location as the scrub region 27 S Oo J D n O 1 5 n Panel Descriptions Control section NO EXIT YES ENTER CURSOR buttons TIME VALUE Q TIME VALUE dial NO EXIT Button Press this when you wish to r
186. cation By dividing a phrase you can delete a portion of the phrase or paste it into another location 1 Press PAD SEQUENCING EDIT MEMO EDIT lights and the Sequence Edit menu are displayed as icons If SEQ PLAY is off press EDIT and it will be turned on lit automatically Also the 2 Press CURSOR gt to select the Split STATUS of all audio tracks icon will go dark ERASE CUT 3 Press YES ENTER The Split Phrase screen appears SPLIT PHRASE Siow Ah wO TAE e If you wish to make precise a TRE Iuratiop 12 04 SITS aalaatt to the D on at which the phrase will be divided it is convenient to use 4 Press CURSOR Q Preview Refer to Cueing to a A sequence track select mini menu appears H E Ha Snow precise location Preview A p 139 E 5 Turn the TIME V ALUE dial to select the sequence track A D that you wish to edit and press YES ENTER a n A A mini menu disappears disappears 6 Use the REW 44 FF PP or the TIME VALUE dial to set the split destination to NOW The currently selected phrase will be highlighted in black 7 After you have specified the split phrase press YES ENTER The specified phrase is spitted at NOW 8 When you are finished editing the sequence track press DISPLAY MEMO EDIT goes out extinguished and the display returns to the Basic screen To cancel the split press UNDO REDO p 138 after step 7 103 gt 3
187. ch are the same If the guide at the right is highlighted in black the string is higher sharper than the displayed note If the guide at the left is highlighted in black the string is lower flatter than the displayed note 6 Repeat steps 3 4 to tune each of the strings 7 When you are finished using the tuner press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Is For details on connecting a musical instrument refer to Connecting peripheral equipment p 32 For details on selecting the input source refer to Selecting the input source p 113 Ore It is not possible to play back or record while using the tuner Ore Cleanly play a single note only on the string you wish to tune Ore If you are tuning a guitar that has a vibrato arm tuning one string may cause other strings to drift In this case you should first tune the strings approximately so that the correct note name is displayed and then re tune each string Prepare for recording Multitrack recording About the tuner display Screen display The built in tuner of the CDX 1 displays the reference pitch note name and a tuning guide see the illustration Standard pitch Tuner pitch FITCH H p Be F nl a GROMATIC TUBE a Note name Tuning Guide Tuning guide display If the difference between the input pitch and the correct pitch is less than 50 cents the tuning guide will indicate th
188. cord additional performances Playback recording audio tracks for bounce recording Each track can either play back or record For example if you are bouncing to two tracks in stereo you will be able to play back the tracks that are not recording destinations i e you will be able to play back six tracks simultaneou during bounce recording Bounce recording procedure 10 11 12 13 Here we will explain an example of how mono performances recorded on audio tracks 1 and 2 can be mixed with the stereo performance recorded on audio tracks 3 4 and bounce recorded on audio tracks 7 8 For audio tracks 1 2 3 and 4 that you wish to combine press STATUS to get it to light in green Adjust the pan left right position of the audio tracks for playback Press PLAY gt to play back and use the AUDIO TRACK faders to adjust the volume balance Use the MASTER fader to adjust the overall volume recording level At this time raise the volume as high as possible without allowing the sound to distort For the audio tracks that you do not want to mix tracks 5 6 make their STATUS go dark to mute them When you adjust the volume press STOP W Press BOUNCE to get it to light Press the audio track 7 or 8 STATUS The STATUS of audio tracks 7 8 will blink in red recording standby mode Press ZERO 4 to return the SONG POSITION to 00 00 00 00 Press REC El REC E blink recording
189. corded with no signal There is no pad sample sound Is the sample on an assigned pad one that is illuminated Was the sound sampled with no signal Are the PAD SEQ LEVEL faders up Is the volume setting Volume for the individual samples turned up Adjust the volume of a sample as described in Adjusting the volume of a sample Sample Level p 76 Including audio tracks and sequence tracks are there four stereo sounds being played Are samples assigned to the same mute group Samples in the same mute group are prevented from being played simultaneously p 74 166 There is no sound through the headphones Is the headphones knob PHONES turned up Are the MASTER fader up There is no sound from the sequence tracks Has the SEO PLAY been turned on When playing a sequence track press PAD SEQUENCING SEQ PLAY and SEQ PLAY will be turned on p 96 Are the PAD SEQ LEVEL fader up Are the audio tracks empty or recorded with no signal Are the boxes Tr SEL track select highlighted in black p 96 There is no sound from the audio CD Has the SEO PLAY been turn off When playing a audio CD the PAD SEQUENCING SEQ PLAY turn off The SEQ PLAY indicator will be dark Are the AUDIO CD fader AUDIO TRACK 7 8 fader up p 52 Unintended effects are added to the sound Are the internal effects turned on Press INSERT EFFECTS ON OFF to turn the effe
190. ct settings 142 If you wish to create a new effect sound you should first select an existing patch that is closest to the sound you want and then edit its settings If you wish to save the effect settings that you edited save them as a user patch or song patch Press INSERT EFFECTS PATCH The patch select screen appears Turn the TIME V ALUE dial to select a patch that is close to what you intend to create Press CURSOR to select EDIT AGG fo T WAH DOH Press YES ENTER m STEREO MULTI The effect block diagram is displayed graphically Effect on solid line Effect off dotted line Use CURSOR Q I J lt J E gt Ito select an effect and turn the TIME V ALUE dial to turn the effect on off HAHE WRITE Use CURSOR VUI lt I gt to select the effect whose parameters you wish to edit and press YES ENTER The parameter setting screen for the selected effect will appear Use CURSOR Q 1 to select a parameter and turn the TIME VALUE dial to edit the value If you would like to edit another effect press NO EXIT to return to the previous screen and repeat steps 5 6 Edited effect settings are temporary If you go back one screen without saving the edited patch the patch number will be displayed as TMP While TMP is displayed newly selecting a different patch will cause the edited patch to revert to TMP GROUP 9 eneral EG EDIT
191. cts off p 142 The sound from the pad does not stop Is the sample Pad Play setting set to DRUM Because the sound is played up until the end point it may seem that with long samples the sound indeed does not stop p 70 The rhythm guide dose not sound Is the rhythm guide off Press RHYTHM GUIDE ON OFF to turn the rhythm guide on p 116 Is the rhythm guide level set to 0 Press RHYTHM GUIDE PATTERN TEMPO to access the Rhythm Guide screen and raise the Level setting p 116 Troubleshooting There is no sound only when the effects are in use Is the output level of the inserted effects patch raised Raise the output level of the patch as described in Editing insert effect settings p 142 Sampling does not begin even when PAD REC is pressed Is the appropriate Start with setting selected p 61 The effects sounds can not be recorded or sampled Is the effect connection set to INPUT NORMAL When recording or sampling you must set the effect connection to INPUT NORMAL in order to record the sound that is processed by the effect p 144 Cannot record Isa high speed compatible CD RW disc insert Is the CD R RW disc inserted with the correct side facing up Insert the CD R RW disc with its label facing upward Did you insert a CD R disc that has already been finalized Once a disc has been finalized no further data can be recorded
192. d When you have specified the recording method and the sequence track to be recorded press YES ENTER The step recording setting screen appears CREATE will light STEF REC SteF SMEL agar sox Duration loo T Li suneeemeeeeeeeee A Reece eer eee eee eee Make sure that the cursor is locates at the Step line Turn the TIME VALUE dial to specify the step input interval in terms of a note value Make sure that Duration is set to 100 When you press pad 1 recording begins simultaneously and 1 of STEP 1 in the figure is recorded When 1 is pressed again it is also recorded STEP 2 Press gt P and a rest silence is recorded in step 3 Press pad 2 and the sound of pad 2 is recorded in step 4 Press pad 1 and the sound of pad 1 is recorded in step 5 Then press PLAY gt and the phrase of step 5 is extended tied by one step doubling the recorded length When you finish recording press PAD SEQUENCING CREATE CREATE is turned off and the Sequence Play List screen appears Return to the location where you began recording and press PLAY gt to play back the performance and hear the results MEM If SEQ PLAY is off press CREATE and it will be turned on lit automatically Also the STATUS of all audio tracks will go dark For details on the Step and the Duration parameter refer to the column Parameter settings for step reco
193. d region of a sequence track Cutting Segments Cut This operation cuts the phrases of the specified region Any phrases that followed the region will be moved forward 1 Specify the region that you want to cut as described in Specifying the editing region p 9 of this booklet 2 Press YES ENTER A mini menu appears 3 Press CURSOR to select the REGION CUT 4 Press YES ENTER The specified region are cut Moving to a Another Locaton Move This operation moves the phrases of the specified region to another location The phrases in the specified region will be erased i e they will change to silence If there were any phrases in the move destination they will be overwritten by the phrases from the specified region 1 Specify the region that you want to move EG FLAY Se eno as described in Specifying the editing Tr SEL region p 9 of this booklet 2 Use the REW lt q FF PP or the TIME VALUE dial to set the move destination NOW current location 3 Press YES ENTER A mini menu appears 4 Press CURSOR to select the T REGION MOVE Tr 5EL m A REGION CUT s aci Y REGION MOVE Ir oI 5 Press YES ENTER The specified region are moved Editing a specified region of a sequence track Pasting to a Another Location Paste This operation pastes the phrases of the specified region to another location If there w
194. d to a pad Sampling s sssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 54 Whal issamplhino ossein a a e E S 54 Pads and Dank Syrer E TE E E E 54 Fientpidsand otpad Dank Ssp r ien i a Ra E E EA 54 OWCE pad DINK Sann a E N TT aae 54 Namine apad DANK seerne a a a E a R 55 Sampline t0 a Padri ea EE EE I E E E EEEE E AE EARS 56 Gamp une air external Soud sarea A Ee EAEE NE 56 Sampling from a CD audio clip collection inserted in the CDX 1 sesesesssseserserersrrererrererseses 57 Loading a Windows WAVE Messire toia a a a aan eai ai 58 Using free audio sources from the Interne t eiinssedin a a eareoreaaen 59 Making settings in the Sampling screen eessesseessessoeseeseosseeseoseossessesssessessesssossesssossossoeseossosseeseessesses 60 Selecting the audio quality and sampling time appropriate for the material Data Type 60 SPeciLy Ne StGLCO OF MONO Y PE sasaa onan a E AA 61 Automatically start sampling when sound is input Start With eee creer 61 Making sure to capture the beginning of the sound Pre Trigger cccccceeeseeseeeeeeee 62 Sampling from a pad to another pad Resampling seeseesessseesesssosseessessoesesseossoeseoseessessesssessessess 63 If the display indicates Memory Full csscscocsssssssessocvteed sasssasutsess oxesesesedasuessatinivacatstusuassavesetestiouseas sius 64 Increasing the Remaining Memory Optimize Sample ccssccsscsscsscessscsssessssessessseseseseoess 64 Deleting a sample
195. d use these pads appropriately To assign the same sample to multiple pads you can use clipboard gt Copying a sample to another pad clipboard p 82 The sample volume setting can be set independently for each pad gt Adjusting the volume of a sample Sample level p 76 95 Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence Playing a sequence track 96 The number of sounds that can be played simultaneously is a total of four stereo sounds for audio track playback pad playback and sequence track playback When the sequence is on the playback priority will be in the order of sequence tracks audio tracks gt pads Press PAD SEQUENCING SEQ PLAY SEQ PLAY lights and the Sequence Play SEQ PLAY LIST Bee ieee List screen appears Pa oak At this time the STATUS of all audio tracks li O Df Sete will go dark muted Press CURSOR J A cursor appears on box A of Tr SEL track CURSOR eee FLAY LIET P Hor Te SEL E OH iieri T ee jer oy i a oe OO ey Press CURSOR Q L to move the cursor to the Tr SEL track select box for the sequence track A D that you wish to play back select Press CURSOR gt J The Tr SEL track select box will be SEG PLAY LIST eee ieee Te 3EL A highlighted in black indicating that it will aw Soak play back 40FF oI To cancel your selection press CURSOR lt _ If there are ot
196. d value Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON Sustain Sustain 0 100 Attack Attack 0 100 Level Output Level 0 100 DEFRET Defretter This models a fretless bass Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON Sensitivity Sens 0 100 Attack Attack 0 100 Depth Depth 0 100 Level Level 0 100 190 This parameter turns the compressor effects on off Adjusts the range time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain Adjusts the strength of the attack Larger values will result in a sharper attack creating a more clearly defined sound Adjusts the volume This parameter turns the defretter effect on off This controls the input sensitivity of the Defretter It should be adjusted for the bass guitar you have until you get the harmonic changes to sound natural This controls the attack of the Defretter Increasing the value will cause the harmonics to change more slowly thus producing a relatively attack less sound similar to a fretless bass This controls the rate of the harmonics Increasing the value will increase the harmonic content and therefore will create a more unusual sound Adjusts the volume of the defretter sound Insert effect algorithm list NS Noise Suppressor This effect reduces the noise and hum Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the noise suppressor effect on off Threshold Threshold 0 100 Adjust this parameter as appropri
197. daptor 9 Press YES ENTER to return to the Basic screen What is the data type The CDX 1 allows you to specify the data type when a CD RW disc is formatted This enables you to select the combination of audio quality and recording time that is most suitable for the material you are recording The following data types can be selected STANDARD Of the three types this provides the highest audio quality Normally you should select this type LONGI This type allows longer recording than STANDARD It is suitable for recording live performances LONG2 This allows the longest recording time of the three types v aX D O D S D i e D Q S 2 Co lt Recording time gt The times that can be recorded on one CD RW disc for each data type are listed below Data Type Recording time STANDARD 15 minutes LONG1 19 minutes LONG2 23 minutes The recording times shown above are approximate Depending on how you edit the song they will be somewhat shorter On the CDX 1 the approximate recording times shown above will apply regardless of the number of tracks used for recording For example even if you use only one track for recording the amount of time available for recording will be the same as when using all eight tracks 111 Prepare for recording Multitrack recording Erasing the entire contents of a CD RW disc Sometimes you may no longer need to keep th
198. dditions to a CD R disc as long as free capacity remains What is a CD RW disc CD RW Compact Disc ReWritable is a CD that can be written and erased Data that has been written can be erased and new data written A CD RW disc can be written and erased approximately 1000 times Writing to a CD R disc There are several ways to write to a CD R disc The CDX 1 uses track at once when it creates an original audio CD Track at once 4 This method allows writing to be added on a single CD R disc As long as capacity remains on the CD R disc up to 99 additional writes can be performed as long as you Finalize p 204 do not finalize the disc However if you are writing audio data it cannot be played on a conventional CD player until you finalize the disc Also once a CD R disc has been finalized no further additions can be made 18 Learning about CD R RW discs Discs for use on the CDX 1 The CDX 1 contains various functions and the discs it uses will differ depending on D N 5 a a oy Z S z J z 2 a O U the function List of usable discs for each operation Playing a audio CD DA OK Multitrack recording OK Creating a original audio CD OK Backing up song data OK Saving pad sequence data OK CD direct recording OK Recommended CD R CD RW discs CD R Disc alice OSE You can use CD R discs that carry these logos DIGITAL AUDIO CD RW Disc Chee 8 You must
199. ded to the direct sound making the final output sound thicker and broader O PHASER Phaser By adding varied phase portions the phaser effect gives a whooshing swirling character to the sound O P SHIFT Pitch Shifter This effect changes the pitch of the original sound up or down within a range of two octaves O DOUBL N Doubling An effect of multiple sounds heard together a doubling effect is produced O TRM PAN Tremolo Pan _ Tremolo is an effect that creates a cyclic change in volume Pan cyclically moves the stereo position between left and right when stereo output is used DLY Delay This creates a thicker sound by applying a delayed sound to the direct sound Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the delay effect on off Effect Type Type SINGLE This is a simple delay TAP The delayed sound is panned across the left and right channels This will be effective when stereo output is used Delay Time Delay Time SINGLE 1 1400 mS This parameter adjusts the delay time i e the interval for which sound is delayed TAP 1 700 mS Feedback Feedback 0 100 This parameter adjusts the amount of feedback Changing the amount of feedback causes the number of time the delayed sound is repeated to change as well Effect Level Effect Level 0 120 This adjusts the volume of the delay sound p dp 99 r 99 z 9 Q e A F 3 D 177 Insert effect algorithm list
200. dio track you can vary the effect depth for each track For example you might apply deep reverb to the vocal and light reverb to the drums Editing the loop effect settings NOTE Chorus delay doubling Chorus delay doubling cannot be used simultaneously You must 1 Press LOOP EFFECTS DELAY select one of them A screen will appear in which you can adjust G RRIEERSSTRACK the volume send level that is sent fromthe 4 O tel tel te ted te oO H pad and each audio track to chorus delay 234567776 doubling 2 Press CURSOR lt _ gt to select the audio track for which you wish to make settings When you wish to use the loop effect to the PAD use CURSOR gt to move the PAD NEM You can continue pressing CURSOR lt __ L gt and adjust the send level of the input source When the input source is recorded sampled adding of the loop effects the sound with the added effects is recorded sampled You can also continue pressing CURSOR gt and adjust the send level of the rhythm guide S 9 A P AIIN 19440 D S 4 O o E 5 3 Turn the TIME V ALUE dial to adjust the send level 4 Press LOOP EFFECTS DELAY once again The chorus delay doubling setting screen ETAS appears tae Ture ELS Y Derth 50 5 Make sure that the cursor is located at the Effect Type line 6 Turn the TIME V ALUE dial to select the effect For details on other
201. e sound Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the slow attack effect on off Rise Time Rise Time 10 2000 mS This adjusts the time needed for the volume to reach its maximum from the moment you begin picking Level Level 0 100 Adjust the volume of the slow attack sound 5 ep 99 r 99 z 9 e Q A Dy 3 n 203 Glossary Balanced connection A method of transmitting signals using three electrical conductors This cancels any noise that may have entered the line during transmission allowing noise free transmission of low level signals over long distances This method is usual on professional and broadcast equipment BPM beats per minute The number of beats in one minute usually quarter note Coaxial A digital audio connector to which a coaxial cable can be connected In contrast a type of digital audio connector to which an optical cable can be connected are referred to as optical The CDX 1 s digital audio connector conforms to S P DIF gt S P DIF gt Optical Condenser microphone A type of microphone that applies the principle of a condenser It has excellent high frequency response and allows more subtle nuances of sound to be captured Contrast A setting that adjusts the difference between the light and dark areas of a display This controls the apparent brightness of the display COSM An abbreviation for Composite Object Sound Modeling P
202. e Onn and CD RECORDER ooo0oo0oo0o0o0o ojo uaa Insert a CD R disc and write the song data gt Completing your original CD CD burning O This completes your original audio CD 42 What you need to do to create your own CD Sample sounds from a sampling CD clip audio collection Sample sounds from a sampling CD clip audio collection or load Windows WAVE files and assign the sounds to pads or load Windows WAVE files and assign the sounds to pads gt Sampling to a pad p 56 gt Sampling to a pad p 56 PAD X FADE O00 EEC Ogn amag O a Use pad crossfade to make the samples crossfade as they play Freely comb
203. e and turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the data type 7 Press YES ENTER NOTE In case the name of folders or files are not readable CDX 1 yy The File List screen appears displays those ___ If the specified pad already contains a sample you will be asked Overwrite OK If it is OK to delete the existing sample press YES ENTER If you wish to keep that sample press NO EXIT to return to the Load WAVE screen and then specify a different pad that is unused If necessary press PAD BANKS to change the pad bank gt Switching ad banks p 54 P p 54 MEMO 8 Press CURSOR 1 to select the file that you wish to load To close the folder select If you wish to see contents of a folder select folder and press YES ENTER PARENT DIRECTORY and press YES ENTER If you press PLAY P play back of the selected WAVE file starts When the play back is finished a massage Convert are you sure is displayed asking you wish to load the file If you wish load see step 9 Press NO EXIT the File List screen reappears 9 Press YES ENTER The display will show a message of Completed the WAVE file will be assigned to the pad In step 8 if you wish to switch preview length of WAVE files refer to the column Switching 10 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen of preview length of Windows WAVE files p 59 58 Recording a sound to a pad Sam
204. e the phrase of the preceding step by an additional step FF gt Record a rest for a length of one step and advance the current location by one step REW lt 4 Return to the previous step e R D pad 4 pad id 12 Q If You Become confused About Button Function During Recording s jdwes opne Bulbueuy In the following the Step Recording screen press CURSOR lJ once or twice so that the display switches to STEP REC USAGE INFORMATION t Back RASE TIE REST Recording continues even when you switch to this screen Press CURSOR Q to return the previous screen 93 Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence Step recording 94 12 13 In the explanation that follows we will assume that pads 1 and 2 contain samples and that you wish to record on the sequence track as shown in the diagram The flow of Step 1 Operation Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Use the REW lt q FF PP or TIME V ALUE dial to move to the location at which you wish to begin recording such as the beginning of the desired measure Press PAD SEQUENCING CREATE CREATE blinks and a screen appears in which you select the recording method and recording destination sequence track Press CURSOR __ gt to select Step step recording CREATE SEG Tr ack Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the sequence track A D that you wish to recor
205. e CD RW disc drive The disc tray dose not open Is the power turned on If the power is not turned on pressing the EJECT button will not open the disc tray In cases when pressing the EJECT button does not open the disc tray such as during a power failure remove the disc as described in If the disc tray does not open p 36 Synchronization problems When using MTC to synchronize the CDX 1 with a MIDI sequencer the CDX 1 must be the master device Is the MIDI cable connected correctly isthe MIDI cable broken If you are synchronizing with MTC has the other device been set to the same MTC type p 154 Is the Out Thru setting p 152 correct Has the MIDI sequencer been set correctly Is the MIDI sequencer ready to play back Dose the other device support the MMC commands of the CDX 1 168 Other problems The foot switch is connected but it is not working as intended Have you made the appropriate system Foot SW setting Set the Foot SW parameter in the System Settings screen p 75 122 Did you connect or disconnect the foot switch while the power was turned on Turn the power off before connecting or disconnecting the foot switch Can t make Pre Trigger settings Is the Start with p 62 setting appropriate In order to set Pre Trigger the Start with setting must be Lev 1 Lev 8 DIMM checking does not end DIMM
206. e CDX 1 2 Insert a thin object such as a wire into the emergency eject hole The disc tray will open 36 Basic operation of the CDX 1 Switching among the Basic screens WO pad D e O 4 gt 3 pad a 5 pr D O Q O gt lt The basic display screens of the CDX 1 are accessed by pressing DISPLAY located below the screen As described below there are five Basic screens which you can cycle through by pressing DISPLAY The AUDIO CD PLAYER indicator and or the AUDIO CD RECORDER indicator is lit CD Player screen p 48 pressing DISPLAY will cycle you through the CD Player screen and Sequence Play List screen displays However CD RECORDER blinks recording standby mode only the CD Recorder screens will be displayed The Basic screens Post fader level meter screen MARE TEMPO 150 00 INLES456875 LR This screen shows the levels after the signals have passed through the audio track faders post fader During multitrack recording p 113 the meters indicate the recording levels of those tracks Pre fader level meter screen EMF d Z0 D0 IH 1i 2445678 LR This screen shows the levels before the signals have passed through the audio track faders pre fader Use the Pre fader screen when you wish to check the input levels Big Time screen 00 0 0 24 The current location of the song will be displayed in large characters using the fu
207. e DAT recorders do not support SCMS or do not allow digital connections to a CD player If you are using this type of DAT recorder it will not be possible to record the digital output of the CDX 1 on a DAT recorder if D Copy Protect is turned ON In such cases you will need to turn this setting THRU 2 What is SCMS SCMS stands for Serial Copy Management System This is a function of consumer digital audio devices such as DAT recorders or MD recorders that protects the copyright of the producer by prohibiting second generation and subsequent copies from being made digitally If digital connections are made to a digital recorder that has this function SCMS flags will be recorded along with the digital audio signals Digital audio data that contains these flags cannot be recorded again via a digital connection 150 Using the CDX 1 with other MIDI devices MIDI Fundamentals What is MIDI MIDI stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface This is a worldwide standard that was developed in order to allow music data and sound data to be exchanged among electronic musical instruments and computers Devices that are MIDI compatible can exchange music data according to their capabilities even if they are different types of device or were made by different manufacturers MIDI channels MIDI allows data to be transmitted independently to multiple MIDI devices over a single MIDI cable This is
208. e MIDI em MIDI FARAMETER N icon T tE a HICI HARKE SONG 2YSTE 4 Press YES ENTER The MIDI settings screen appears For details on the MMC 5 Press CURSOR U to move the cursor to HIDI functionality that is supported 44 1 ah RxHoLe Pad1 gt 45 00 oo MMC Mode line Bath Ch OFF refer to nD FMM Pode Implementation p 212 6 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select SLAVE For details on the MMC Mode refer to step 6 of Using the CDX 1 as the MMC master above 7 Make settings to allow MTC synchronization Perform steps 5 and following of Using MTC master p 154 S 9 A P AIIN 19440 D S 4 O o a 5 8 Make settings on your sequence software Make the following settings on your sequencer software For details on making these settings refer to the manual for your sequencer software e MTC receive e MTC type same setting as the MTC Type selected on the CDX 1 e MMC transmit 9 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 157 Using the CDX 1 with other MIDI devices Using an external MIDI sound module to play the rhythm guide The rhythm guide can be played using your favorite sounds on another MIDI device 1 Use a MIDI cable to connect the CDX 1 and your MIDI sound module as shown 7 in the diagram fig 5 32e MIDI IN t i MIDI OUT Roland ED SOUNDCanvas SC 8850 POWER E Daka a A VALUE DRUM__V VAR INSTA
209. e Wah effect Peak Peak 0 100 Adjusts the way in which the wah effect applies to the area around the center frequency Lower values will produce a wah effect over a wide area around the center frequency Higher values will produce a wah effect in a narrow area around the center frequency With a value of 50 a standard wah sound will be produced Level Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume NS Noise Suppressor This effect reduces the noise and hum Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the noise suppressor effect on off Threshold Threshold 0 100 Adjust this parameter as appropriate for the volume of the noise If the noise level is high a higher setting is appropriate If the noise level is low a lower setting is appropriate Adjust this value until the decay of the sound is as natural as possible Release Release 0 100 Adjusts the time from when the noise suppressor begins to function until volume reaches 0 pOr High settings for the Threshold parameter may result in there being no sound when you play with your instruments volume turned down Modulation effect type The Modulation effect type can be selected from the following effects For details on each effect refer to Available types of modulation and their effect p 202 O FLANGER Flanger The flanger effect gives a twisting jet airplane like character to the sound O CHORUS Chorus A sound with a subtly shifted pitch is ad
210. e data that was saved on a CD RW 112 disc and would like to use the same CD RW disc for a different performance You would also like to use the a CD RW disc that was previously used by a computer In such cases execute the Disc Format operation 1 Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon 2 Press CURSOR gt to select the CD R RW Disc icon and press YES ENTER The CD R RW Disc Menu are displayed as icon 3 Press CURSOR gt to select the CD RW Disc Format icon 4 Press YES ENTER The CD RW Format screen appears MED e An unused CD RW disc will be formatted in approximately ten minutes regardless of the format type setting The contents of the CD RW disc that are erased by the format operation cannot be recovered e After you execute format it is ZAME not possible to press UNDO REDO p 138 to revert to the state ae CSEH FORMAT before executing format foa Gea SAVE Widely OFTIM EBACUF e While formatting do not turn off the power with unplugging the AC adaptor CURE FORMAT Format Ture SEEMA STAHDARD Data TYF 5 Make sure that the cursor is located at Format Type line 6 Turn the TIME V ALUE dial to select the format type Format Type MEMO CDX 1 carries out the followings when formatting 10 11 FULL The entire data area of the disc will be physically erased to make it completely blank This will increase the reli
211. e discrepancy between the actual and the correct pitches refer to step 5 of previous page While you watch the tuning guide tune your instrument so that the left and right guides are both highlighted in black Setting the reference pitch of the tuner The frequency of the A4 note on the instrument used as the reference for tuning is called the reference pitch For example the middle A note on a piano On the CDX 1 the reference pitch can be set in the range of 435 445 Hz At the factory settings this is set to 440 Hz v aX D O D S D i e D Q S 2 Co 1 Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon 2 Press CURSOR gt to select the Tuner icon 3 Press YES ENTER The Tuner Menu screen appears FITCHEEHZ p c ia CROMATIC TUHER a me 4 Turn the TIME V ALUE dial to set the standard pitch 5 When you are finished using the tuner press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 115 Prepare for recording Multitrack recording Using the rhythm guide When you record it is convenient to use the built in rhythm guide If you record along with the rhythm guide you will be able to use various convenient functions such as track editing in units of measures or synchronizing the performance with external devices When the rhythm guide is used in conjunction with the tempo map you can change the tempo or rhythm pattern during the song
212. e low midrange equalizer Low Mid Q Low Mid Q 0 5 16 This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by Low Mid Freq A larger value results in a narrower range of change High Mid Gain High Mid Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the high midrange equalizer High Mid Freq High Mid Freq 100 10 0 kHz This parameter sets the central frequency for the high midrange equalizer High Mid Q High Mid Q 0 5 16 This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by High Mid Freq A larger value results in a narrower range of change High Gain High Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the treble equalizer Level Output Level 20 20 dB This parameter adjusts the volume after the equalizer stage NS Noise Suppressor This effect reduces the noise and hum Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the noise suppressor effect on off Threshold Threshold 0 100 Adjust this parameter as appropriate for the volume of the noise If the noise level is high a higher setting is appropriate If the noise level is low a lower setting is appropriate Adjust this value until the decay of the sound is as natural as possible Release Release 0 100 Adjusts the time from when the noise suppressor begins to function until volume reaches 0 High settings for the Threshold parameter may result
213. e setting as needed FOOT SWITCH Jack This is an input jack for connecting a separately sold foot switch DP 2 F5 5U You can use a foot switch to play or stop the song remotely or to punch in out gt Playing a sample from a connected foot switch p 75 Using a foot switch to punch in out p 122 MASTER Jack These are output jacks for the analog audio signal The MASTER fader adjusts the volume OPTICAL COAXIAL connectors IN OUT ws Digital audio signals cannot be recorded simply by connecting a digital audio device to the OPTICAL or COAXIAL connector If you wish to recorded digital audio signals you must change the settings as described in In order to make a Digital recording with CD player p 148 e IN These connectors are for connecting digital audio devices such as a CD player or MD recorder There are two types of connector optical and coaxial If digital audio devices are connected to both optical and coaxial connectors the input from COAXIAL IN will take priority By pressing INPUT SELECT DIGITAL you can switch the inputs e OUT These connectors output a digital audio signal stereo There are two types of connectors optical and coaxial Optical and coaxial connectors can be used simultaneously The sound that is output will be the same as master out PHONES Jack Stereo Headphones sold separately are connected here LINE Jack These are input jacks for an
214. easure divisions The Sequence Play List screen will be displayed when you press DISPLAY to switch screens It will also be displayed when you press PAD SEQUENCING SEQ PLAY to turn the sequence on track select box A D E The track is selected as a playback destination Seq FLAY LIST i ine pa Ec Oo kre ik l dF Il ce os meee ee eee RA e a a E When the graphic of 4p appears in the display the area indicated on the screen can be widened by pressing CURSOR lt __ and narrowed by pressing CURSOR C About the tempo of the sequence Setting the tempo of the sequence The CDX 1 uses the measure MEAS beat BEAT and tick TICK as the units of TEES IA olla EU the smallest unit in a its basic system for measuring the current location in a sequence y 5 q sequence on the CDX 1 Thus sequences on the CDX 1 are based on the concept of tempo and in changing the tempos of sequences containing multiple phrases the intervals between the MEMO beginning of one phrase and the beginning of the next are lengthened and shortened During sequence recording The overall tempo a sequence is changed in the Rhythm Guide setting screen If you Playing indicates the current want the tempo to change midway through the sequence set the tempo map to time location of the song in Measure Beat Tick In the specify the tempo Big Time Screen the units For details on setting the tempo refer to
215. eaveaieas 15 REMOVE ENS TICE ONY n a a E T a ace gs ee ecm cs 16 Verifying that the memory is recognized by the CDX 1 seseessessoesosseoseoeseeseossossosssessoesosseessossesses 16 Verify that the memory module has been installed in the socket correctly 0 0 0 16 Memory read write test DIMM dia nosticsic citsstscitiveessceteatalsiuesineSvisaniee henson aeneeioet 17 Learning about CD R RW iISCS cceeeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeneesenseceneseeeeees 18 Whatis a CD R RW GSC srsccccsasscsccascansscvaceencveceoeeesesasansuase sansdeexessaasssuashonsssvadutenessvanbessssansosurensaasacteaseuses 18 Wiar 1S aS ERGS cee clearcut ets amie cesarean ce nO inc weds ast a aa aaeatic dusoaad suas weaeeeitenent 18 Wharisa CORW SC as cata sateen ee ned eaie claws be ate Repaid ses ce asa ea oeanet emacs 18 Vatm toa CIA disi ssssasace cesses econ capens casmsnonh daacaustite Sedussas cascusoasawasncadcnag sstarocnasausdetbanaaneasvassunessaveatoas 18 Discs fOr US On Me CNN eis ssa ecsscs sptess cesses ea a E 19 List Of sable discs Tor ACh OPEralON eiren an o E toast T 19 Recommended CD R CD RW isc ccccccsssccccccssscccccnceeccccssecccccacscceccuseececatsesccccasecceseuseeces 19 CD R RW disc h dling and Cleaning insemna ia sen scaaedsvanonestseaeoasesceas 20 DSC HANAI aee eee rem me Pe PO eT eee PoC eT 20 DISC 16 STAM mep T etSias cos ooae une eau ns eniaaca eaves tag uaa ans 20 PANG DESGCHDUONS vissccocsecca nti ieerc tpactaccices
216. ecially careful when using extension cords the total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cord s outlet must never exceed the power rating watts amperes for the extension cord Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through Do not force the unit s power supply cord to share S Before using the unit in a foreign country consult with your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page adaptor before attempting installation of the Always turn the unit off and unplug the AC Q memory DIMM board p 14 audio CD player The resulting sound may be of a level that could cause permanent hearing loss Damage to speakers or other system components may result DO NOT play a CD ROM disc on a conventional S A CAUTION e The unit and the AC adaptor should be located so their location or position does not interfere with their proper ventilation e Always grasp only the plug on the AC adaptor Q cord when plugging into or unplugging from an outlet or this unit e Whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time disconnect the AC adaptor e Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled Also all cords and cables should be placed so they are out of the reach of children the unit e Never climb on top of nor place heavy objects on S e Ne
217. ecording pad operations as you play pads Realtime Recording p 90 Recording pad operations at the specified interval Step Recording p 93 EDIT Button The Sequence Track Edit screen appears gt Editing a sequence track p 98 HOLD Button The sound will continue playing even after you release your hand from the pad gt Making the sound continue even after you release the pad Hold p 72 1 8 Buttons Up to eight samples can be assigned to these pads Pads to which a sample is assigned will light The way in which the sample plays and stops can be specified independently for each pad gt Changing how a pad start and stops sounding Pad Play p 70 AUDIO CD Section AUDIO CD RECORDER PLAYER AUDIO CD RECORDER AUDIO CD indicator PLAYER indicator Ifyou insert a not finalized CD R disc both the RECORDER and PLAYER indicators will light AUDIO CD RECORDER indicator This will light when a new CD R disc is inserted This indicates that the audio input from an external source the sound of samples being played using pad crossfade or the playback sound from a sequence track can be recorded directly to a CD R disc gt CD direct recording p 159 AUDIO CD PLAYER indicator This will light when an audio CD is inserted This indicator will also light if you insert a CD R disc written audio data 25
218. effect For example by applying an insert effect to an electric guitar connected to the CDX 1 you can distort the sound or transform the sound into the tone of an acoustic F ca Insert effect algorithm list guitar You can also modify the settings of an insert effect to create your own original p 175 sounds What is a patch The CDX 1 provides numerous effects for vocals guitar etc and two or more of these effects can be used simultaneously Such a combination of effects i e the types of the effects used and the order in which they are connected is called an algorithm In addition each effect has a variety of settings parameters that can be adjusted in order to change the sound By editing the values of these parameters you can create a wide range of tonal characteristics The settings for the overall state of the effects including the effect parameter values are stored as a unit called a patch The effects used for the insertion effect together with the parameters of each effect can be changed by recalling a patch How the patches are organized The CDX 1 provides a variety of patches suitable for vocals or various instruments preset patches The preset patches are organized into four groups In addition to the preset patches there are 100 user patches and 100 song patches in which you can store your own patches that you create Preset patches A001 A100 BO01 B100 The preset patches already contain patch data
219. effect block diagram screen Pie cons Pat NC ail Perot if you turn off the power by di ting the AC adapt 5 Press CURSOR gt to select WRITE isconnecting the adaptor and press YES ENTER instead of using the power switch Please use caution HAME MAS 6 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the patch save destination ery IC Clear CEMTERS 7 After you have specified the patch save destination press YES ENTER When the data has been saved you re returned to the patch select screen 8 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Copying a patch to create a new patch If you wish to create two or more patches with similar effect settings it is convenient to copy the patch 1 Press INSERT EFFECTS PATCH The patch select screen appears SODIAAP AIIN 19440 D S 4 O o E 5 2 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the copy source patch 3 Press CURSOR U to select COPY ADi fo T WAH DOWH MUIT STEREO MULTI 4 Press YES ENTER The Copy Effect setting screen will appear 5 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the Sill tg HINT 2s From ADODI JC Clean patch copy destination To Gey IC Clean Riess CURCOR IT comone CEMTERI the cursor to From line you Ea a can change the copy source 6 When you have specified the patch copy destination press YES ENTER each When the copy is completed you re returned to the patch select
220. eiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Tested To Comply With FCC Standards FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit For Canada NOTICE This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations AVIS Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada For the U K IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE BLUE NEUTRAL BROWN LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N
221. empt to sample a warning of Bank is Protected appears and sampling will not be possible e Ifyou attempt to change setting of Pad Parameter and Pad Bank Parameter a warning of Bank is Protected e Editing operations that would affect the contents of the pad bank such as deleting the entire pad bank or an individual sample will produce a warning message and will not be executed e Editing operations that require you to specify a writing destination such as rearranging samples or Time Stretch cannot be executed if the writing destination is protected Protecting unprotecting a pad bank 1 Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice Alternatively press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons FAD FARAMETER eau Be eae TRIM 2 PressCURSOR _ gt to select the Bank a ha GAME FROTECTION FRETET Protection icon TEM P Sle HAME K FRM E ERS 3 Press YES ENTER The Bank Protection setting screen appears EAHE PROTECT Bahk COrFUMLoOoFL J ProLect OFF 4 Make sure that the cursor is located at the Bank line 5 Turn the TIME V ALUE dial to select the pad bank that you wish to protect Press CURSOR to move the cursor to the Protect line Turn the TIME VALUE dial to change to protect ON or OFF eS S Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 66 Recording a sound to a pad Sampling Saving Pad Sequence on a C
222. ems such as distortion noise and lowered signal level can occur On the CDX 1 a high impedance input jack are used for directly connecting guitar and bass Loop effect The path by which signals are sent from a mixer to internal or external effects and the sound produced by an external device is returned to the mixer is collectively referred to as Loop Effect When using a loop type effect the effect sound will be combined with the original sound gt Insert effect Master 1 A parameter knob or fader that affects all channels in common 2 When two or more devices sequencers drum machines recorders video devices etc are operated in synchronization the device that transmits tempo or time data is called the master The devices that receive this data and follow it are called slaves An abbreviation for Musical Instrument Digital Interface a unified standard for exchanging performance data time data and various settings etc between electronic musical instruments computers and audio devices etc The CDX 1is MIDI compatible and has two MIDI connectors MIDI IN and MIDI OUT also providing MIDI THRU functionality When these connectors are connected to other MIDI devices a variety of applications are possible MIDI implementation chart A table that makes it easy to confirm the types of MIDI messages that can be transmitted and received by a device Check the MIDI implementation charts o
223. equence Recording while you listen to the playback of another sequence track You can select a sequence track for playback and then perform realtime recording while you listen to the playback of the selected sequence track 1 As described in steps 1 3 of Playing a sequence track p 96 select the sequence track that you wish to play 2 Follow the procedure described of Realtime recording above Recording will begin and at the same time the sequence track you selected in step 1 will play back Press pads to record them Recording while you listen to the playback of the audio tracks When sequence is turned on SEQ PLAY is turned on all the lighting STATUS of audio tracks will go dark muted At this time you can select a audio track for playback and then perform realtime recording while you listen to the playback of the selected audio track gt 3 _ 2 oe QS o o oc Q 0 S wn ovv 50 a3 jez 49 N 1 Follow steps 1 7 of Realtime recording above 2 For the audio track s that you wish to play press STATUS to get it to light in green It is not possible for the sequence track selected as the recording destination to play simultaneously with the corresponding audio track And an audio track cannot be played back simultaneously with the corresponding sequence track selected as the playing back destination For details refer to Playing sequence tracks and audio tracks si
224. equencer or rhythm machine to operate in synchronization with the button operations of the CDX 1 1 Use a MIDI cable to connect the CDX 1 and your MIDI sequencer as shown in the diagram MIDI IN f MIDI OUT THRU o0 pogo OOO Boe o o oog g oc og Cac oO MIDI Sequencer 2 Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon 3 Press YES ENTER The MIDI settings screen appears 4 Press CURSOR lt lL to select the heim MIDI FARAMETER N MIDI icon 1 EE jii MARE SONG SVETE HIDI 5 Press CURSOR L to move the cursor to HIDI MMC Mode Y sync OWL 6 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select MIDI CLK Sync Out Select weather or not the synchronization signals that will sent from the MIDI OUT THRU connector OFF Synchronization signals are not sent MTC MIDI Time Code is sent MIDI CLK MIDI Clock is sent 7 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to HIDI Out Thru line ah SFC OUL MTC Tyre OU TAPU 8 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select OUT 9 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 10 Make settings on your MIDI sequencer so that it can receive MTC from an external device and prepare it to play back MIDI song data For details on using refer to the Owner s Manual
225. ere any phrases in the paste destination they will be overwritten by the phrases from the specified region Specify the region that you want to paste SEG PLAY as described in Specifying the editing sa E ne puin region p 9 of this booklet a cha Use the REW lt q FF PP or the SEG PLAY TIME VALUE dial to set the paste destination NOW current location dh o Press YES ENTER A mini menu appears Press CURSOR L to select the REGION PASTE Ldn p A BT Press YES ENTER The specified region are pasted Tr SEL ak Inserting to a Another Location Insert 12 This operation inserts the phrases of the specified region to another location If there ware any phrases in the inserting location of backward they will be moved back for duration of specified region Specify the region that you want to insert SEG PLAY as described in Specifying the editing a m ne region p 9 of this booklet ak a ap Use the REW lt q FF PP or the SEG FLA TIME V ALUE dial to set the insert destination NOW current location Press YES ENTER A mini menu appears Press CURSOR U to select the REGION INSERT Press YES ENTER The specified region are inserted Muting silencing a specific audio track During playback you can switch audio tracks between muted silent and playing statuses 1 During pla
226. es 129 Moving to tmhieloca nonor AAT eM ranen a e a A tones 129 Delene a orke nanain iana T a A A a ie 129 Changing the location ofa marker srisrorerai ni eon R a 130 INGO MArKE T arna a N ncaa asa ae Mineo 130 Stopping the song automatically Marker StOp eessessessesseeseossossessecssossesssessoesesssossosseoseessessessse 131 Editing a recorded performance to create an audio CD 132 Preparing to write a CD R disc Mixdown seessesseesesssoeseessossoesseseoesesseoseoeseososesesseessesseesesssessessses 132 Setting the left right position pan of each audio track eee cece eee ence eeeneeee 132 Adjusting the tone of each audio track Equalizet oo cesses cseeseceeseeeesseeeeseeeeseeeneeaees 132 Adjusting the overall volume balance Master Balance cccececeecesseeseeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeees 132 NXM TOW U0 reese sce sos asain N a dees 133 Listen LO theres o VIS CO WA ernari a a ER 133 Adusi the Masterino 1001S ersan a E E ta aera 134 Completing your original CD CD Burmning eeseessesseeseeseesseeseoseeeseeseessosseesesssesseessossesssssseesessesse 135 Writing 0a C DERGI E oenen O E a E a 135 Finishing the CD DUINO siioni orrn anen EA RE R RAS 135 Pnalizine a CD R Cis Cas aa dicen an uaasetitnaeye awa mega warnnrameunn eatamnasaeh me saemieonaees 136 Taking full advantage of the CDX 1 ccsssseseeeessennsseress 137 More functions for the CDX 1 ccccececececececeneececececenenencececeeeneneue
227. ess YES ENTER The MIDI settings screen appears 5 Press CURSOR U to move the cursor to HIDI MMC Mode line ah ca i EL l gt 4600 Sa MMC functions refer to MIDI Y HMC Mode E Implementation p 212 For details on the supported 6 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select MASTER MMC Mode Specify how the CDX 1 will use MMC Off MMC will not be transmitted MASTER MMC will be transmitted The CDX 1 will be the master for external MIDI devices SLAVE MMC will be received The CDX 1 operates as the slave of an external MIDI device 7 Make settings to allow MTC synchronization Use the procedure of step 5 and following in Using MTC master p 154 8 Make settings on your sequence software Make the following settings on your sequencer software For details on making these settings refer to the manual for your sequencer software e MTC receive e MTC type same setting as the MTC Type selected on the CDX 1 e MMC receive 9 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 156 Using the CDX 1 with other MIDI devices Using the CDX 1 as an MMC slave 1 Make the following connections MIDI IN f MIDI OUT MIDI IN l MIDI OUT ooo0oo0oo0o000 a The CDX 1 will be the MMC slave but the MTC master 2 Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon 3 Press CURSOR gt to select th
228. ess 138 Undoing a recording editing Operation eessessoeseeseeseosseeseessesseessessoesesssossoeseosesesosseessesseesesssessessses 138 Undoing a recording or editing OperatiON UMNd snesena EEEE 138 Canceling the UndO Red Os eisa sussicted sn wttaataartenacntadiatitiast cuicatacaeternge agendas 138 Cueing to a precise location PrevieW e sessssssesssesssssessoesossssesesssosssessessossosssessossssssessosssssssssosssssssos 139 Adjusting the current location while listening to the preceding and or following sound 139 Using Scrub to make fine adjustments in the cue location Scrub Preview 140 Usine theinser CLIC CS vsscracssetesedvcasseidetareatinuncanicoces sasekwsbcwensesae E E 141 Wiha 1S al ANISerieHeCh riria onn inauvanereiean ulema A NS 141 Whatisa PCR sepen EN 141 How the paltcnes are Organi Zed oana E A E E 141 Usmo an inserte lo esinaine A Oa 142 Editing the insertellect Sein es toiii n e n E A 142 Savine Insert effect SENOS seriar n ANG 143 COpyine a patch to create anew pathanneraniinei ianea E EE A EEE 143 Changing the insert effect CONNECHONS nesirsusrecnrideineranin tio a emgients 144 Usine the loop effects iasscccaysisaceden ted ooacedes seta e a a a N 145 Whatisaloop elect essnee a E 145 Editing the loop elect StH eS hiss ssucewsnrnssinuntoceoustavenid E N ERE 145 Creating a backup CD RW GiSG sais snehenticssst asacocstondncnensessnn hauanesineasiaemiarctineei cosmos tba taseisieaees 147 Backing up sone d
229. eturn to the previous screen i e the next higher screen in the hierarchy You can also press this to respond no to a message displayed in the screen YES ENTER Button Press this to execute a menu selection You can also press this to respond yes to a message displayed in the screen CURSOR Button When making various settings use these buttons to move the cursor to the item you wish to set In screens that consist of multiple pages these buttons are also used to move between pages TIME VALUE Dial In screens where there are no items to set such as the Pre post fader screen p 37 and Sequence Play List screen p 37 use these buttons to move the current location of the song When making settings for various functions these modify the value of the item selected by the cursor NEM If you turn the TIME VALUE dial clockwise the value will increase continuously If you turn the dial counterclockwise the value will decrease continuously CD RW CD R AUDIO CD indicator section An indicator will light to show the type of CD that is inserted CD R AUDIO CD CD RW lt gt BUSY lt gt D CD RW CD R AUDIOCD BUSY indicator indicator indicator indicator CD RW indicator Indicates that a CD RW disc is inserted CD R indicator Indicates that a CD R disc is inserted 3 AUDIO CD indicator Indicates that an audio CD t
230. f both devices that you intend to connect and use MIDI messages that are supported by both devices In this manual the MIDI implementation chart is on p 216 MIDI time code MTC A type of MIDI message that is used to accurately synchronize a MIDI device with professional tape recorders sequencers or video devices The master device transmits data indicating the current absolute time hours minutes seconds frames from the beginning and the slave device will advance its own time accordingly In order to use MTC the other device must also support MTC synchronization or you can use an MTC to SMPTE converter Because MTC does not contain tempo information the displayed measures and beats may not necessarily match MTC also allows various frame rates In order to use MTC for synchronization the frame rates of both devices must be set to match gt Master Slave gt Frame rate Mix down In music production using a multitrack recorder this is the process of adjusting the mix balance of multiple tracks and combining them into two channel stereo MMC An Abbreviation for MIDI machine Control This is a set of MIDI system exclusive messages used to operate multiple devices form a single device The CDX 1 supports MMC By using MMC a MIDI device connect to the CDX 1 can be controlled by the CDX 1 to perform operations such as start and fast forward Since MMC is intended to synchronize operations such as playback reco
231. f this measure TEMPO Specify the tempo 20 00 250 00 of the tempo map The measures and beats shown in the display the tempo of the rhythm guide the temp of the sequence and the MIDI clock data transmitted from the CDX 1 will follow this tempo setting BEAT Specify the time signature of the tempo map 1 1 8 1 1 2 8 2 1 4 8 4 1 8 8 8 The measures and beats shown in the display the rhythm guide sound and the MIDI clock data transmitted from the CDX 1 will follow this time signature setting PATTERN Specify the rhythm pattern of the rhythm guide 5 If you wish to change the tempo from a measure in the middle of the song press YES ENTER REM MEAS TEMPO BE LOEHHAE i izd A mini menu appears 6 Press YES ENTER The settings of the preceding tempo map will be applied 7 Repeat steps 4 5 as necessary 8 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Deleting a tempo map 1 Access the Tempo Map setting screen as described in steps 1 2 of the preceding section 2 Move the cursor to the line of the tempo map that you wish to delete and press YES ENTER REM z HEAS TEMPO EE HAHAME i 120 0 A mini menu appears 0 4 DELETE LEO 22 4 16042 474 Kock I 3 Press CURSOR U to select DELETE 4 Press YES ENTER The tempo map of the selected line will be deleted 5 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Playing the rhythm guide according to the tempo map 1 P
232. fect on off Polarity Polarity UP The frequency of the filter will rise DOWN The frequency of the filter will fall Sensitivity Sens 0 100 This adjusts the sensitivity at which the filter will change in the direction determined by the polarity setting Higher values will result in a stronger response With a setting of 0 the strength of picking will have no effect Frequency Frequency 0 100 This adjusts the center frequency of the Wah effect Peak Peak 0 100 Adjusts the way in which the wah effect applies to the area around the center frequency Lower values will produce a wah effect over a wide area around the center frequency Higher values will produce a wah effect in a narrow area around the center frequency With a value of 50 a standard wah sound will be produced Level Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume p dp 99 r 49 z 9 e Q A Dy 3 n 197 Insert effect algorithm list NS Noise Suppressor This effect reduces the noise and hum Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON Threshold Threshold 0 100 Release Release 0 100 va Modulation effect type This parameter turns the noise suppressor effect on off Adjust this parameter as appropriate for the volume of the noise If the noise level is high a higher setting is appropriate If the noise level is low a lower setting is appropriate Adjust this value until the decay of the sound is as natural as possi
233. for your MIDI sequencer 11 When the CDX 1 begins playing the MIDI sequencer will also begin playing in sync with it 24 40455612 01 11 E2 21KS
234. fore you begin recording you must register the locations at which punch in and punch out will occur automatically 1 Move to the desired punch in location 122 2 Recording playing back a performance Press AUTO PUNCH IN AUTO PUNCH AUTO IN OUT PUNCH If you wish to re do the setting move to the punch in location you registered and press AUTO PUNCH IN The registration will be cancelled and AUTO PUNCH IN will go out The current location will be registered as the punch in location and the button will light Move to the desired punch out location Press AUTO PUNCH OUT AUTO IN OUT PUNCH LJ Ea L If you wish to re do the setting move to the punch out location you registered and press AUTO PUNCH OUT The registration will be cancelled and AUTO PUNCH OUT will go out The current location will be registered as the punch out location and the button will light How to Record 1 For the audio track that you wish to re record press STATUS to get it to blink in red The selected audio track will be ready to record Move the fader of the selected audio track to the 0 dB position Listen to compare the input source volume with the volume of the audio track that you wish to re record and adjust the INPUT REC LEVEL knob to adjust the input sensitivity so that there is no difference in volume between the two After you have adjusted the input sensitivity m
235. formant of the voice character 1 Formant 2 Formant 2 100 100 Adjust the formant of the voice character 2 Effect Level 1 Effect Level 1 0 100 Adjust the volume of the voice character 1 Effect Level 2 Effect Level 2 0 100 Adjust the volume of the voice character 2 Direct Level Direct Level 0 100 Adjust the volume of the direct sound Formant p 204 NS Noise Suppressor This effect reduces the noise and hum Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the noise suppressor effect on off Threshold Threshold 0 100 Adjust this parameter as appropriate for the volume of the noise If the noise level is high a higher setting is appropriate If the noise level is low a lower setting is appropriate Adjust this value until the decay of the sound is as natural as possible Release Release 0 100 Adjusts the time from when the noise suppressor begins to function until volume reaches 0 High settings for the Threshold parameter may result in there being no sound when you play with your instruments volume NOTE turned down Modulation effect type The Modulation effect type can be selected from the following effects For details on each effect refer to Available types of modulation and their effect p 202 O FLANGER Flanger The flanger effect gives a twisting jet airplane like character to the sound O CHORUS Chorus A sound with a subtly shifted pitch is added to the direct sound
236. ge time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain Attack Attack 0 100 Adjusts the strength of the attack Larger values will result in a sharper attack creating a more clearly defined sound Level Output Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume EQ Equalizer A 4 band equalizer Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the equalizer effect on off Low Gain Low Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the bass equalizer Low Mid Gain Low Mid Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the low midrange equalizer Low Mid Freq Low Mid Freq 100 10 0 kHz This parameter sets the central frequency for the low midrange equalizer Low Mid Q Low Mid Q 0 5 16 This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by Low Mid Freq A larger value results in a narrower range of change High Mid Gain High Mid Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the high midrange equalizer High Mid Freq High Mid Freq 100 10 0 kHz This parameter sets the central frequency for the high midrange equalizer High Mid Q High Mid Q 0 5 16 This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by High Mid Freq A larger value results in a narrower range of change High Gain High Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for
237. gnated with Pads Rx Ch in the UTILITY MIDI Status Second Third BnH 7BH 00H n MIDI Channel No OOH OFH ch 1 ch 16 System Exclusive Message Status Data Bytes Status FOH iiH ddH eeH F7H Byte Description FOH Status of System Exclusive Message iiH Manufacturer ID 41H RolandsManufacturerID 7EH Universal Non Realtime Message 7FH Universal Realtime Message ddH Data 00H 7FH 0 127 eeH Data F7H EOX End of System Exclusive Message Universal System Exclusive Message OINQUIRY MESSAGE lt Identity Request Status Data Bytes Status FOH 7EH Dev 06H 01H F7H Byte Description FOH Status of System Exclusive Message 7EH Universal System Exclusive Message Non Realtime Header Dev Device ID 10H or 7FH 06H General Information sub ID 1 01H Identify Request sub ID 2 F7H EOX End of System Exclusive Message The message is used to request the particular of the CDX 1 If CDX 1 received the message and the device ID of the message is same as 10H or 7FH the CDX 1 transmits the prescribed Identity Replay message O MIDI Machine Control Commands Status Data Bytes Status FOH 7FH Dev 06H aaH bb F7H Byte Description FOH Status of System Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header Dev Device ID 10H or 7FH 06H MMC Command Message aaH Command bbH Command F7H EOX End of System Exclusive Message See 2 MIDI Machine Control section
238. h the power on The pickup is designed to be dust proof Do not use pickup cleaners since they may cause malfunction Handling Compact Discs CD R RW ROM e Upon handling the discs please observe the following O Do not touch the recorded surface of the disc O Do not use at the places with dust O Do not leave the disc in the direct sunlight or enclosed vehicle proper temperature 10 50 degree centigrade e Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside encoded surface of the disc Damaged or dirty discs may not be read write properly Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner 10 e Keep the disc in the case e Do not keep the disc in the CD RW drive for a long time e Do not put a sticker on the label of the disc e Wipe the disc with a soft and dry cloth radially from inside to outside Do not wipe along circumference e Do not use benzine record cleaner spray or solvents of any kind e Do not bend the disc Copyright e Unauthorized recording distribution sale lending public performance broadcasting or the like in whole or in part of a work musical composition video broadcast public performance or the like whose copyright is held by a third party is prohibited by law e When exchanging audio signals through a digital connection with an external instrument this unit can perform recording without being subject to the restrictions of the Serial Copy Management System
239. hase output will become monaural 5 ep 99 r e 9 e Q A Dy 3 n 191 Insert effect algorithm list 9 ACOUSTIC GUITAR This is a multi effect designed for acoustic guitar Even when an electric acoustic is connected at line level this provides a warm sound similar to what is obtained through a microphone Acoustic Noise Proccessor Compressor Equalizer Suppressor Delay JAC HCOMP EG LHS HOLY Parameter full name Setting Function ACP Acoustic Processor With this feature you can change the sound from a pickup on an electric acoustic guitar into a richer sound Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the acoustic processor effect on off Body Body 100 100 This adjusts the resonance of the sound caused by the body That is it adjusts the softness and fatness of the sound which is the typical characteristics of acoustic guitars Mic Distance Mic Distance 100 100 This models the distance between the microphone capturing the sound of an acoustic guitar and the guitar itself Level Level 100 100 This adjusts the volume of the acoustic processor MEMO Best results will be achieved when stereo output is used COMP Compressor Compressor the entire output signals when the input volume exceeds a specified value Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the compressor effects on off Sustain Sustain 0 100 Adjusts the ran
240. he TIME VALUE dial to change the value gt For details on the parameters refer to Mixer effect parameter functions Owner s Manual p 174 4 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Editing the loop effect settings Chorus delay doubling 1 Hold down LOOP EFFECT DELAY and press AUDIO TRACK STATUS that MEMO you want to adjust In step 1 you can hold down The equalizer setting screen appears DELAY EHD TACE Z Vachs Sinligd Seuacebied i 2 ve y y tet ted Or b STATUS to select PAD z 4 4 5 6 YF amp 2 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the send level IS 3 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen For details on setting the effect parameters refer to Editing the loop effect settings Owner s Manual p 145 146 Reverb 1 Hold down LOOP EFFECT REVERB and press AUDIO TRACK STATUS that you want to adjust The equalizer setting screen appears GSES TRACK 2 Pood Di WD 22745 67 6 AEM In step 1 you can hold down 2 Turn the TIME V ALUE dial to adjust the send level REVERB and press PAD 3 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen STATUS to select PAD 14 Preventing tempo data from being read from a CD RW disc When pads or sequences are stored in internal memory you can specify that the tempo data of a song saved on a CD RW disc not be loaded when you insert a CD RW disc on which pads or sequences have been saved 1
241. he electronic components or connectors O Save the bag in which the board was originally shipped and put the board back into it whenever you need to store or transport it e Do not touch any of the printed circuit pathways or connection terminals e Never use excessive force when installing a circuit board If it doesn t fit properly on the first attempt remove the board and try again e When circuit board installation is complete double check your work e When turning the unit upside down get a bunch of newspapers or magazines and place them under the four corners or at both ends to prevent damage to the buttons and controls Also you should try to orient the unit so no buttons or controls get damaged e When turning the unit upside down handle with care to avoid dropping it or allowing it to fall or tip over e Use a Philips screwdriver of the appropriate size to avoid damaging the screw heads a number of 2 screwdriver If an unsuitable screwdriver is used the loosen gS tighten e Be careful not to cut your hand on the edge of the cover or the opening edge head of the screw may be stripped e Turn the screwdriver counter clockwise to loosen the screws turn it clockwise to tighten them while removing the cover e Be careful not to let the screws drop inside the CDX 1 s body e Do not touch the circuitry or the connectors e Do not force a memory board into its slot If it can t be inserted smoothly take it out check i
242. he input sensitivity 1 Turn the INPUT SENS knob to adjust the input sensitivity Adjust the INPUT SENS knob as high as possible without causing the peak indicator to light when the sound is input 2 Press DISPLAY a number of times to access the Post fader screen Turn the INPUT REC LEVEL knob to adjust the level so that IN level meter moves as far as possible without exceeding the dotted line in the upper portion The meter moves high level as possible without If you use the INPUT REC LEVEL knob to turn exceeding the limit shown as dotted line down the volume of the input source the sound will be recorded in the audio track at alow volume so that noise will be more apparent when you raise the 1 0 00 1224567 volume of the audio track for playback If INPUT REC LEVEL knob is set at og in case of Digital In input level will be 0 dB MIN MAX Monitoring the sound Use the MASTER fader to adjust the volume of the instrument or mic that you are monitoring If you are monitoring through headphones adjust the MASTER fader and the PHONES knob to set a comfortable volume Setting the left right position pan of the input sound If you adjust the pan left right position of the instrument you are playing to a location where it can be heard easily the sound of your instrument will not be lost in the other sounds during overdubbing p 124 and you will find it easier to work 1 Press TRACK EDIT PAN
243. he unit package it in the box including padding that it came in if possible Otherwise you will need to use equivalent packaging materials e Use a cable from Roland to make the connection If using some other make of connection cable please note the following precautions O Some connection cables contain resistors Do not use cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low or impossible to hear For infor mation on cable specifications contact the manufac turer of the cable Electric wave obstacle e CD RW drive is authorized to conform to the chapter 15 and the regulation for the division B digital devices of the FCC regulation which is for the prevention of electric wave obstacle by the installation in the residence CD RW drive generates uses or radiates radio frequency energy and may cause obstacle to the radio communi cation if you use it in irregular manners If the wave jamming may happen on the radio and TV please try the following But we cannot guarantee that the obstacle is completely eliminated O Turn off the power of CDX 1 O Change the location and direction of the antennae of the radio and TV O Keep CDX 1 and the receiver away O Supply the power to CDX 1 and the receiver from the different power outlet O Consult your nearest Roland Service Center or autho rized Roland distributor in your country Laser bea
244. her sequence tracks that you wish to play back repeat steps 3 4 Press ZERO 4 to return to the beginning of the performance Press PLAY gt The sequence track s will play back When you are finished playing back the sequence track s press PAD SEQUENCING SEQ PLAY SEQ PLAY goes out and sequence is turned off Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence Playing sequence tracks and audio tracks simultaneously When sequence is turned on the STATUS of all audio tracks will go dark If you wish to play back audio tracks at the same time press STATUS of an audio track enough times to get it to light in green However an audio track cannot be played back simultaneously with the corresponding sequence track selected as the playing back destination Sequence tracks and audio tracks correspond as follows Sequence tracks Audio tracks track A gt track 1 2 e track B gt track 3 4 a 8 track C gt track 5 6 ge track D gt track 7 8 a S For example if sequence track A has been selected as a playback track it will not be 2 z p possible to select audio tracks 1 2 as playback tracks Audio tracks 3 4 5 6 or 7 8 can be played back simultaneously 97 Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence Editing a sequence track 98 The samples arranged in a sequence track can be edited by moving the location at which they will play by pasting them in a different location or b
245. here we will explain how to use the tuner to tune your guitar Adjusting the Tuning 114 Check the following points before you begin e Your guitar is connected to the GUITAR BASS jack e MIC2 is lit If MIC2 is extinguished press MIC2 to make the button light 1 Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon 2 Press CURSOR __ gt to select the Tuner icon 3 Press YES ENTER The Tuner screen appears FITCH HZ ai a te ae For details on the screen refer to the column About the tuner display p 115 CROMATIC TUHER me 4 Play a single open unfretted note on the string that you wish to tune The screen will indicate the note name that is closest to the pitch of the string you played Tune the string so that the desired note name appears in the screen refer to the table below Standard tuning 4th 3rd 2nd sg sg s sg ng sng Guitar Bass 5 While you watch the tuning guide make fine adjustments to the pitch so that the left and right guides are both highlighted in black If the pitch of the string is within 50 cents of the correct pitch the tuning guide will indicate the discrepancy between the actual and the correct pitches FITCH H og FITCH Hz E e FITCHEEHE og Fcronnnegines cron ree S at fe a CROMATI WHER vi CROMAIIC TUHER ci CROMATEC TUHER oe When the left and right guides are both highlighted in black the string and the displayed pit
246. his format is used for SECAM PAL format video ae p 205 and audio devices and film NTSC format p 206 24 24 frames per second This format is used in the United States for video and SECAM PAL format audio devices for and film p 206 9 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 10 Make settings on your MIDI sequencer so that it can receive MTC from an external device and prepare it to play back MIDI song data When the CDX 1 begins playing the MIDI sequencer will also begin playing in sync with it S 9 A P AIIN 19440 D S 4 O o a 5 155 Using the CDX 1 with other MIDI devices Using MMC This section explains how to make settings for synchronizing the playback with a m MMC p 205 computer based MIDI sequence program that supports MMC and MTC Using the CDX 1 as the MMC master 1 Make connections as follows O Some MIDI devices do not MIDI IN MIDI OUT support the CDX 1 s MMC functionality If so it will not be possible to operate them oooo S a Ea pN methods described here For l details on the MMC es functionality supported by the CDX 1 read MIDI CDX 1 Implementation p 212 The CDX 1 will be the master for MMC and MTC 2 Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon 3 Press CURSOR _ gt to select the MIDI beim MIDI FRARAMETER N MARE SONG SVSTE 4 Pr
247. ialize effect parameters Initialize Global param Are you sure OK to initialize global parameters Initialize Mixer param Are you sure OK to initialize mixer parameters Insert a Destination disc This disc is the backup source disc Please insert the backup destination disc Insert CD R disc Insert a CD R disc Insert CD RW disc Insert a CD RW disc Keep take Do you wish to save the data on CD RW disc Load error An error occurred while loading data Load PAD SEQ data Do you want load pad and sequence data Marker does not exist There are no markers Master track does not exist There is no master track Memory full There is not enough memory to execute the operation Memory low cannot UNDO Continue There is not enough memory to undo this operation Execute anyway MTR disc not ready The MTR disc is not inserted in the drive No PAD SEQ data to save Save anyway No pad sequence data was found Not CD RW disc This disc is not a CD RW disc Not HIGH SPEED CD RW This is not a high speed compatible CD RW disc Not supported The specified file is not in a format that can be converted Not WAVE file The specified file is nota WAVE file Now playing SCRUB Now scrubbing Now Processing Now processing Please wait Now recording Now recording pads 170 Obey copyrights See Manual for details Do you agree to obe
248. ic Setting CENTER 1 10 cm This models the microphone position CENTER models the condition that the microphone is set in the middle of the speaker cone 1 10 cm means that the microphone is moved away from the center of the speaker cone Mic Level Mic Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the microphone Direct Level Direct Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the direct sound NS Noise Suppressor This effect reduces the noise and hum For details on the parameters refer to NS on the preceding page DLY Delay This creates a thicker sound by applying a delayed sound to the direct sound For details on the parameters refer to DLY above p W 99 r a 9 Q e A F 3 n 181 Insert effect algorithm list 4 VO AC MDL Vocal Acoustic Guitar Modeling This algorithm is for use when simultaneously recording a vocal and electric guitar For the guitar you can make the electric guitar sound like an acoustic guitar Compressor Noise Suppressor Delay COMP EG MOL A COMPA HS Acoustic Guitar Modeling E MIC Parameter full name Setting Compressor Noise Delay Suppressor Function COMP Compressor Compressor the entire output signals when the input volume exceeds a specified value Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON Sustain Sustain 0 100 Attack Attack 0 100 Level Output Level 0 100 EQ Equalizer A 4 band equalizer Effect O
249. ied region of a sequence track Region In Out In the Sequence Play List screen you can specify a region then edit only that region You can also edit multiple tracks at once Specifying the editing region 1 Press PAD SEQUENCING SEQ PLAY SEQ PLAY lights and the Sequence Play SEG FLAY LIS List screen appears Tr 3EL4 OA Oo _ BF of Piri n rere dk Oo Dee ne Select the sequence tracks for playback as described in Playing back sequence tracks Owner s Manual p 96 Get the Tr SEL track select box to be highlighted in black for the track s in which you want to specify a region You may select more than one track Use the REW lt q FF PP or the TIME VALUE dial to move the NOW current location to the starting point of the segment Press YES ENTER A mini menu SET REGION IN appears Tr SEL ak Use the REW lt q FF PP or the TIME VALUE dial to move the NOW current location to the end point of the segment Press YES ENTER A mini menu appears Press CURSOR to select the SET REGION OUT Press YES ENTER to specify the end out point of the segment hrs In case edit region is specified you cannot execute editing phrase by phrase basis Quick Edit If you want to do such editing please cancel the editing region as described in Canceling an editing region p 10 For details of Q
250. ify the pad bank number by turning the TIME VALUE dial Specify the pad number by pressing a pad or by turning the TIME VALUE dial Press YES ENTER The Create Reversal operation is executed If the destination pad already contains a sample the Overwrite message appears If it is OK to overwrite the existing sample press YES ENTER If you do not wish to overwrite the existing sample press NO EXIT Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Editing the sample of a pad Boosting the sample level as high as possible Normalize Normalize is a function that raises the level of the entire sample as high as possible without exceeding the maximum level 1 Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice Alternatively press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons FAD FARAMETER F Ee am E FARAH OFTIM DIVIDE TRIM 2 Press CURSOR gt to select the See MORMALIZ Normalize icon 4 7 F i OFTIM DIVIDE TRIM 3 Press YES ENTER m Q Q D 4 sp pad 3e pad xe pad a The Normalize Settings screen appears HORMALIZE SOUF ce Bank 1 To Bank i 7 4 Use CURSOR j1 J1 lt gt to select the Source source sample and To destination pad bank number and pad number and specify the sample for each Specify the pad bank number by turning the TIME VALUE dial Specify the pad
251. ify the tempo map Here s how you can easily modify the tempo map to match a drum loop sample on MEMO aca which your song is based l The tempo of a sample is displayed in the upper right of the pad parameter screen For details refer to Displaying 1 Press UTILITY the correct tempo of a sample Owner s Manual p 77 Ia The Menu are displayed as icon 2 Press CURSOR lt _ gt to select the Tempo Map icon For the procedure used to create a tempo map refer to Setting the tempo and rhythm 3 Press YES ENTER pattern of the song Tempo The Tempo Map Setting screen appears Map Owner s Manual p 117 4 Press CURSOR O lU to move the REMAIN STEFS 45 HEAS TEMFO EEAT FATTERH cursor to tempo whose tempo you want to 1 fe 4 4 Mtr onom b 56 G4 Rock i change 5 Press the pad that contains the desired tempo data For example if the sample tempo is 65 57 a message of Tempo gt 65 57 Are you sure OK to change the tempo to 65 57 will be displayed 6 Press YES ENTER The tempo map willbe changed to the tempo EERIE REMAIN STEFS 42 MEAS TEMEO EERAT FATTERH of the sample i A 44 Het onom E oP 4At Rock i If you press NO EXIT the tempo map will not be changed 7 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Using Pads Sequences while you mix down You can play sequence tracks and pads while mixing down This can be done in any combination
252. in Sustain 0 100 Adjusts the range time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain Attack Attack 0 100 Adjusts the strength of the attack Larger values will result in a sharper attack creating a more clearly defined sound Level Output Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume P AMP Preamp Adjust the distortion and tone of the guitar sound Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON Turns the preamp effect on off Amp Type Amp Type 1 AC It produces the vintage sound of an early transistor amp AMG It produces the sound of a large double stack vacuum tube amp with ultra lows and a crisp edge Volume Volume 0 100 Adjusts the volume and distortion of the amp Bass Bass 100 100 Adjusts the tone for the low frequency range Middle Middle 100 100 Adjusts the tone for the middle frequency range Treble Treble 100 100 Adjusts the tone for the high frequency range Master Master 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the entire preamp Bright Bright 2 OFF ON Turns the bright setting on off Bright is switched on to create a lighter and crisper tone Gain Gain 3 LOW MIDDLE HIGH Adjusts the distortion of the amp Distortion will successively increase for settings of LOW MIDDLE and HIGH NONE 1 When all Bass Middle and Treble are set to 0 no sound may be produced depending on the Amp Type setting 2 Depending on the Amp Type setting this may
253. in out You may occasionally make a mistake while recording or the performance may not turn out as you expect In such cases it is convenient to re record only the portion where the mistake occurred The action of switching to record mode while an audio MEMO track plays is called Punch in Switching from recording mode back to playback The data prior to punch in out while the track plays is called Punch out will remain on the CD RW disc without being erased If you no longer need this data you can Playback Playback erase it from the CD RW disc I i I i to make better use of the I I I l i wine storage space on the CD RW gt disc gt Increasing the free Start Punch in Punch out Stop space on a CD RW disc PLAY REC REC STOP Optimize Disc p 126 Using the Record button to punch in out Here s how to use the REC El to punch in out 1 For the audio track that you wish to re record press STATUS to get it to blink in For details on adjusting the red input sensitivity of an input The selected audio track will be in recording standby mode source refer to Adjusting the input sensitivity p 113 2 Set the fader of the selected audio track to the 0 dB position J D O oQ OD Xo e jab lt 3 a o jab Q jab 3 Listen to compare the input source volume with the volume of the audio track that you wish to re record and adjust the INPUT REC LEVEL knob
254. in there being no sound when you play with your instruments volume turned down Modulation effect type The Modulation effect type can be selected from the following effects For details on each effect refer to Available types of modulation and their effect p 202 O FLANGER Flanger The flanger effect gives a twisting jet airplane like character to the sound O CHORUS Chorus A sound with a subtly shifted pitch is added to the direct sound making the final output sound thicker and broader O PHASER Phaser By adding varied phase portions the phaser effect gives a whooshing swirling character to the sound O P SHIFT Pitch Shifter This effect changes the pitch of the original sound up or down within a range of two octaves O DOUBL N Doubling An effect of multiple sounds heard together a doubling effect is produced O TRM PAN Tremolo Pan Tremolo is an effect that creates a cyclic change in volume Pan cyclically moves the stereo position between left and right when stereo output is used In case of Phase output will become monaural DLY Delay This creates a thicker sound by applying a delayed sound to the direct sound Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the delay effect on off Effect Type Type SINGLE This is a simple delay TAP The delayed sound is panned across the left and right channels This will be effective when stereo output is used Delay Time Delay Time
255. ine the sounds of pads to create your song gt Crossfading the pad sample you play p 71 Record the pad operations on the sequence track gt Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence p 88 o00 O oooon ooo 350 CD RECORDER lau oooo0oo0oo0oo0 oo jjo Ly pan EHS CD RECORDER a l BB While pressing the pads to play samples record the sample playback sounds directly on the CD R disc Record the playback sound of the sequence track directly onto gt Recording samples played using Pad Crossfade on a a CD R disc CD R disc p 162 gt Recording the sequence playback on a CD R disc p 163 This completes your original audio CD This completes your original audio CD 43 o paj D pad D lt O s fe 5 O Op 0 peau NOA PYM What you need to do to create your own CD Path 4 O00 O pie 000 o00 000 O0 000 CD RECORDER OoOo0o0o0O0C0COOCOOCO 0 Cganaan
256. ing a delayed sound to the direct sound Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the delay effect on off Effect Type Type SINGLE This is a simple delay TAP The delayed sound is panned across the left and right channels This will be effective when stereo output is used Delay Time Delay Time SINGLE 1 1400 mS This parameter adjusts the delay time i e the interval for which sound is delayed TAP 1 700 mS Feedback Feedback 0 100 This parameter adjusts the amount of feedback Changing the amount of feedback causes the number of time the delayed sound is repeated to change as well Effect Level Effect Level 0 120 This adjusts the volume of the delay sound e dp 99 r 99 z 9 Q A F 3 D 195 Insert effect algorithm list 11 COSM BASS AMP COSM Bass Guitar Amp This is a multi effect designed for bass guitar This features an amp sound that uses a preamp and speaker modeling 1 Equalizer can be replaced with Wah Speaker Compressor PreAmp Simulator Equalizer 1 Wah 2 Chorus can be replaced one of the following effects ELS Flanger Noise Chorus 2 Delay Suppressor ee Lig EL F Tremolo Pan Parameter full name Setting Function COMP Compressor Compressor the entire output signals when the input volume exceeds a specified value Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the compressor effects on off Susta
257. ing a marker 130 1 MEMO A marker can be assigned a The Menu are displayed as icon name of up to 8 characters Press UTILITY fei MAREE Press CURSOR __ gt to select the Marker Edit icon fom fon LOAD SALE Press YES ENTER The Marker Edit screen appears MARKER HO BEI Mame C LOC 00 00 00 00 Make sure that the cursor is located at the NO line Turn the TIME V ALUE dial to specify the number of the marker that you wish to edit Press CURSOR __ gt to move the cursor to NAME Use CURSOR lt _ gt to move the character location and turn the TIME VALUE dial to input the desired character When you have finished determining the name press DISPLAY The display returns to the Basic screen Recording playing back a performance Stopping the song automatcally Marker Stop You can make playback stop at marker locations Marker Stop When you play back after stopping the song will play back to the next marker and E will then automatically stop again e a Aestontines 1 Press UTILITY marker p 129 The Menu are displayed as icon em SONG FARAMETER N form CAS E 2 Press CURSOR gt to select the Song Parameter icon SAVE TEMFO MARE 3 Press YES ENTER The Song Parameter screen appears gahe PARAN Harme Harker S5StOF 4 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to Marker Stop Turn the TIME
258. ins playing At the point where you wish to divide the sample press YES ENTER once again The sample are divided at that point If the destination pad already contains a sample the Overwrite message appears If it is OK to overwrite the existing sample press YES ENTER If you do not wish to overwrite the existing sample press NO EXIT Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 85 Q n co pes J 4p op fed 3 d 4 eo o fed O fed Q Editing the sample of a pad Creating a reverse tape style sample Create Reversal 386 By using this function you can create a sample that sounds as though a tape recorder were being played backward NOTE Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice The Pad Play and Loop Alternatively you can press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt age Wire ale Sue aa original sample However the i Loop point setting is ignored The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons FAD FARAHETER P x apa Ee FARAH OFTIM DIVIDE TRIM Press CURSOR gt to select the Create Shlgg CREATE RE ERSAL Reversal icon ee Ee cs Cian Taal REWRS TRIH AWRMLE S TRETC Press YES ENTER The Create Reversal Settings screen appears CREATE REVERSAL Use CURSOR Q U lt gt to select the Source source sample and To destination pad bank number and pad number and specify the sample for each Spec
259. ired algorithm For details on how to switch patches refer to Using the insert effects p 141 Effect group LINE SIMUL GUITAR BASS MIC a_i eek eh ae IS ee ee et HOP her es Algorithm SPE REO WA hes cce cee esa aca ated nd A ence tee sects p SABO aa A A eu Wealoieceaeeeeenstaed p VO GT AMP Vocal Guitar AMP 0ccccccccceeeseeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas p VO AC MDL Vocal Acoustic Modeling ccccccessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees p VO ACOUSTIC Vocal Acoustic wake ee eed p COSM GUT AA Pe erromesen er a Era p ACOUSTIC MDL Acoustic Guitar Modeling ccccccesseeeeeeeeeeees p BASS MDL Bass Guitar Modeling cccccceccececeeeeeeesseeeseeeeeeeeees p ACOUSTIC GUITAR erse A O R EE p BASS MULTI Bass Guitar Multi sce peice tatitiom acceded atsades p COSM BASS AMP COSM Bass Guitar Amp eessen p VOCAL Talis acta ieee a alas ON ea ee aA p VOICE TRANCGEFORME Retegi r a a e eels p 175 5 02 99 E 99 z 9 Q e A F 3 D Insert effect algorithm list 1 STEREO MULTI This algorithm connects seven types of effect all in full stereo 1 Equaliser can be replaced with Wad 2 Chorus can be replaced one of the following effects Flanger Noise Chorus 2 Delay 0 Suppressor j Phaser Ring Compressor Modulator Equalizer 1 DEL Doubling Tremolo Pan Parameter full name Setting Function
260. is provided Adjust the Mixer MIX level as required 22 Remembering the icon that was last selected in a menu screen You can cause the icon that was last selected in the following menu screens to be remembered This is convenient when you are repeatedly using the same menu item OTE to edit since you will not have to re select the desired icon each time The data identifying the last selected icon in each screen will be discarded when the power is turned off The next UTILITY Utility Menu Screen AO E E A E menu will always be selected PAD SEQUENCING TEMPO MAP Pad Edit Menu Screen when you open a menu screen PAD SEQENCING EDIT Sequence Edit Menu Screen 1 Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon 2 PressCURSOR lt _ gt to select the MAA STEM PARAMBTER N System icon n ol I S TEMFO MARE SOG a STEM 3 Press YES ENTER The System Parameter screen appears 4 Press CURSOR U to move the cursor to SYSTEM PARAM Wer 1 50 Keep Last Menu line ae Fade Time 456C T a MaF Losdcoant ip Morr Keer Last Menu 5 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select ON Keep Last Menu ON The last selected icon will be remembered when you access a menu screen OFF The first icon of the menu will be selected when you access a menu screen 6 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 23 Synchronization with a Sequence or Drum Machine You can cause a MIDI s
261. ity compression or expansion you must first perform the procedure of Displaying the correct tempo of a sample p 77 to specify the number of beats in the original sample In the case of samples for which it is difficult to calculate a tempo such as a narration vocal part or a long sustained sound set the number of beats to 0 Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH The Tempo Match Setting screen appears TEMEO MATCH Base Pad SOUF ce To Use CURSOR Q I J lt I gt IJ to select the pad bank number and pad number for each item specifying the desired number for each Turn the TIME VALUE dial to set the pad bank number To set the pad number either press a pad or turn the TIME VALUE dial BasePad Specify the sample that is the standard for tempo Source Specify the sample you wish to expand compress sample To Specify the pad to which the newly created sample is assigned If the destination pad already contains a sample a message of Overwrite appears If it is OK to overwrite the existing sample press YES ENTER When you have finished making the settings press YES ENTER After a while the newly created sample is assigned to the destination pad Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen re e Compression expansion Stretch requires more processing time than other sample editing operations Also the audio quality of the stretched sample may be inferior to that of the original sam
262. k creating a more clearly defined sound Adjusts the volume This parameter turns the equalizer effect on off This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the bass equalizer This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the low midrange equalizer This parameter sets the central frequency for the low midrange equalizer This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by Low Mid Freq A larger value results in a narrower range of change This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the high midrange equalizer This parameter sets the central frequency for the high midrange equalizer This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by High Mid Freq A larger value results in a narrower range of change This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the treble equalizer This parameter adjusts the volume after the equalizer stage NS Noise Suppressor This effect reduces the noise and hum Effect On Off Effect On Off Threshold Threshold Release Release re OFF ON 0 100 0 100 This parameter turns the noise suppressor effect on off Adjust this parameter as appropriate for the volume of the noise If the noise level is high a higher setting is appropriate If the noise level is low a lower setting is appropriate Adjust this value until the decay of the sound is as natural as possible Adjus
263. k will start from the beginning HINT If you switch pad banks the pads will contain other samples gt Switching pad banks p 54 MEMO At this time the STATUS of all audio tracks will go dark silent The sequence track will play back Playing an audio CD How to play an audio CD the CD Player About the Display CD Player screen When you insert an audio CD the CD Player screen appears current track number total time of tracks on the disc N total number of tracks on the disc N N S TOTAL 1STRF _CES 32 TRE ge G3 S93 Tine i a le Time display selection Time Level meter L R Switching the time display You can select one of four types of time display Turn the TIME VALUE dial to switch the time display Time TOTAL Display the total time from the beginning of the audio CD to the current time location TRACK Display the total time from the beginning of the track to the current time location TOTAL REMAIN Display the remaining time from the current time location to the end of the audio CD TRACK REMAIN Display the remaining time from the current time location to the end of the track 48 How to play an audio CD the CD Player Playing and stopping a song Here s how to play an audio CD on the CDX 1 Playing stopping an audio CD 1 Insert an audio CD as described in Inserting a disc p 35 The CD Player screen appears Gea etase TOTAL AST
264. lease the pad Press the pad once again the sound stops DRUM Press the pad gt the sound will begin sounding and will automatically stop at the sample end point p 78 the location MEMO specified for the sound to end If you wish to make settings If you select DRUM the Loop Mode p 73 setting will be ignored and the sound will play only Hol ine o ot Okman pat banks you must first switch once Also if DRUM is selected it will not be possible to stop the sample once it has been played the pad bank p 54 Use this setting with caution in the case of extremely long samples 7 If you wish to make settings for other samples press the desired pad and repeat steps 5 and 6 8 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 70 Playing the pad samples Crossfading the pad samples you play Pad Crossfade By using Pad Crossfade you can play pad samples without creating gaps between the sounds of each pad Each time you press a pad its sample will be automatically crossfaded faded in and faded out Pad samples can be recorded directly to a CD R disc only when Pad Crossfade is turned on gt Recording samples played using Pad Crossfade on a CD R disc p 162 1 Press PAD X FADE MEMO PAD X FADE will light and Pad Crossfade will be turned on All pads will sound in Trigger mode regardless of their 2 Press a pad to play its sample actual mode setting 3 When you press another p
265. lements and short circuits Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards This unit either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears you should immediately stop using the unit and consult an audiologist coins pins or liquids of any kind water soft Do not allow any objects e g flammable material S drinks etc to penetrate the unit adaptor from the outlet and request servicing by your retailer the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page when Immediately turn the power off remove the AC e The AC adaptor the power supply cord or the plug has been damaged or e Objects have fallen into or liquid has been spilled onto the unit or e The unit has been exposed to rain or otherwise has become wet or e The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance In households with small children an adult should provide supervision until the child is capable of following all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit Protect the unit from strong impact Do not drop it an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices Be esp
266. lities for song creation WAVE files can be loaded from a mixed mode CD AUDIO WAVE and 2 assigned to pads Simply select from the WAVE files that appear in the display WAVE file p 207 and press YES ENTER gt Loading a Windows WAVE file p 58 Versatile CD play functions Without using any other equipment you can play back a CD on the CDX 1 while you press the pads to play samples or input a mic or guitar Rhythm Guide function The Rhythm Guide function makes it easy to capture phrases or musical ideas that come to mind Simply select an appropriate rhythm pattern and set the tempo gt Using the rhythm guide p 116 12 Before you begin u D as 12 x 4 lt e O D voy A diverse array of connectors The CDX 1 provides four type of input jacks Since a high impedance phone jack GUITAR BASS is also provided a guitar or bass can be connected directly RCA phone type MASTER jacks stereo are provided Both coaxial type and optical type digital I O connectors are provided allowing digital connections to audio devices e g CD players DAT recorders MD recorders MIDI connectors IN OUT THRU are provided You can synchronize the performance with an external MIDI sequencer or play the rhythm guide p 116 on an external MIDI sound module gt Using the CDX 1 with other MIDI devices p 151 Digital audio workstation All processes are fu
267. lizer This parameter sets the central frequency for the low midrange equalizer This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by Low Mid Freq A larger value results in a narrower range of change This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the high midrange equalizer This parameter sets the central frequency for the high midrange equalizer This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by High Mid Freq A larger value results in a narrower range of change This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the treble equalizer This parameter adjusts the volume after the equalizer stage WAH Wah The wah effect creates a unique tone by changing the frequency response characteristics of a filter Effect On Off Effect On Off Polarity Polarity Sensitivity Sens Frequency Frequency Peak Peak Level Level OFF ON UP DOWN 0 100 0 100 0 100 0 100 This parameter turns the wah effect on off The frequency of the filter will rise The frequency of the filter will fall This adjusts the sensitivity at which the filter will change in the direction determined by the polarity setting Higher values will result in a stronger response With a setting of 0 the strength of picking will have no effect This adjusts the center frequency of the Wah effect Adjusts the way in which the wah effect applies to the area ar
268. lizer A 4 band equalizer Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the equalizer effect on off Low Gain Low Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the bass equalizer Low Mid Gain Low Mid Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the low midrange equalizer Low Mid Freq Low Mid Freq 100 10 0 kHz This parameter sets the central frequency for the low midrange equalizer Low Mid Q Low Mid Q 0 5 16 This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by Low Mid Freq A larger value results in a narrower range of change High Mid Gain High Mid Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the high midrange equalizer High Mid Freq High Mid Freq 100 10 0 kHz This parameter sets the central frequency for the high midrange equalizer High Mid Q High Mid Q 0 5 16 This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by High Mid Freq A larger value results in a narrower range of change High Gain High Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the treble equalizer Level Output Level 20 20 dB This parameter adjusts the volume after the equalizer stage WAH Wah The wah effect creates a unique tone by changing the frequency response characteristics of a filter Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the wah ef
269. ll size of the display The units indicated can be switched Measure Beat Tick or Hour Minute Second Frame gt Refer to Switching the Big Time display p 38 Sequence Play List screen SER FLA List eO Tr 3EL4 OA Oo _ BR of toe Pr mT dh ai ee Fa Oe me This screen shows the status of the sequence p 88 The location and length of the boxes rectangles indicates how phrases are arranged in the sequence track Song Information screen at the time of using CD RW disc INFORMATION Remain SMG 15Mm125 S TANDARDS BHEO1 This screen shows information about the song CD RW disc gt Refer to Viewing information on the song CD RW disc Song Information screen p 39 37 Basic operation of the CDX 1 If you are confused about operations or screens Going back to the Basic screen While you are still unfamiliar with operation you may come upon a screen you do not recognize If this occurs you can press DISPLAY to return to one of the Basic screens the most recently selected one Refer to The Basic screens above Adjusting the brightness of the screen display Conitrast 4 5 The contrast of the display will change depending on the viewing angle and the temperature If you have difficulty reading the display use the following procedure to adjust the contrast Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon Make sure that the cursor is loca
270. ll lose PAD SEQ data during Diagnosis Sure Pad Sequence data will be lost if you execute DIMM checking OK to execute You ll lose PAD SEQ data Are you sure Pad Sequence data will be lost OK z B z D 1 sp pad Q D E n a Rhythm Pattern List Beat 1 1 2 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 Beat 172 2 A 272 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 Beat 1 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 172 No 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 No 01 01 02 01 01 01 01 01 01 No 01 01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Name Metronom Metronom Metronom Metronom Metronom Metronom Metronom Metronom Name Metronom Rockbly Metronom Metronom Metronom Metronom Metronom Metronom Metronom Name Metronom Bossa 1 Bossa 2 Bossa 3 Metronom Rock 1 Rock 2 Rock 3 Jazz Ballad Gospel Metronom Measure Measure 1 eS et et e Measure 1 AINI gt NI N N AININ Name Rock 1 Rock 2 Rock 3 Rock 4 Rock 5 Rock 6 Rock 7 Rock 8 Rock 9 Rock 10 Rock 11 Rock 12 Rock 13 Rock 14 Rock 15 Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Heavy 3 Ballad 1 Ballad 2 Blues 1 Blues 2 Blues 3 Shuffle LtnRock 1 LtnRock 2 Bluegras Country Fusion Jazz 1 Jazz 2 Gospel Soul 1 Soul 2 Soul 3 Soul 4 Soul 5 Soul 6 Soul 7 Soul 8 Measure 2 ejeje NI N NI eleiNINI NINI NI RPT eleleiNINININ elei MT NINININI e NI NTE AIN
271. ll volume level Display Section Various information regarding operation will be displayed here ABCD BNK TIME SONG POSITION MARK Roland cox 1 IF e TIME SONG POSITION lt When the CD Player is in use gt Indicates the current time location of the song in Current track number Minute Second lt When the multitrack is in use gt Indicates the current time location of the song in Hour Minute Second Frame Frame display The number displayed after the current time indicates the number of frames for the current location in the song At the factory settings one second is set to 30 frames non drop This is one type of a specification known as MTC MIDI Time Code and when you use the CDX 1 to play in synchronization with another MIDI device you will need to set both devices to the same MTC type gt Using MTC Master p 154 lt When the sequence is in use gt Indicates the current time location of the song in Measure Beat Tick MARK This shows the number of the marker at the current location If no marker is registered at the current location the number of the marker immediately before the current location will be displayed If the current location is earlier than marker number 001 or if J no marker has been registered the display will indicate gt Assigning markers withi
272. llows an operation performed in error to be cancelled returning to the state before that operation was performed Redo is a function that cancels the Undo operation WAVE file The WAVE file is the standard form file of the audio data that be able to use it with Microsoft Windows The file name has WAV Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation XLR Jack The collective name for the XLR series jacks developed by Cannon Electric Corporation USA and compatible jacks manufactured by other companies Also called Cannon On the CDX 1 3 pin XLR jacks are used for the mic inputs 1 2 207 Q e 0p i pad S lt Parameter List in e The setting of the Tuner parameter LCD Contrast parameter System parameter and MIDI parameter are stored in internal memory e When you operate saving the setting of Song the settings of parameters with symbol are stored on a CD RW disc E Mixer Parameter Parameter name Input Level Audio Track Fader Level Pad Sequence Fader Level Master Fader Level Input Select Pan Equalizer Stereo Link Equalizer On Off Equalizer Low Gain Equalizer Low Frequency Equalizer High Gain Equalizer High Frequency Chorus Delay Doubling Send Level Reverb Send Level Reverb Return Level Chorus Delay Doubling Parameter name Effect Type Chorus Rate Depth Pre Delay Effect Level Delay Delay Time Feedback
273. lly digital In addition to a digital mixer and digital disc recorder the CDX 1 contains two digital effects processors Bounce recording p 125 effect processing mixdown p 133 and completing your original CD since a CD R RW drive is built in all processes of the music production process including editing are performed in full digital form preventing any loss of audio signal quality Two versatile digital effects processors The CDX 1 contains two types of effect unit One type is for recording insert effect p 141 and the other type is independent send return effects loop effect p 145 These two types can be used simultaneously This means that the CDX 1 is all you need to produce a sophisticated song without using external effect devices A variety of simulations and effects are provided as insert effects including amp simulations generated using COSM technology In addition to effects for guitar COSM p 204 numerous multi effects for vocals or keyboard are also provided TER As loop effects you can use a broad range of spatial type effects in stereo including chorus delay and reverb effects that are indispensable for mixdown p 133 By using insert effects and loop effects simultaneously you can perform all effect processing at once from creative sound making to placement in the sound field Undo Redo function The Undo Redo function lets you cancel the results of an editing and a recording mistake gt Undoing
274. ls 101 Inserting a phrase in another location InSerl iciciinmercened T 102 Dividing the phrase at the current location Spi i srsesriusiori anete 103 Finely Adjusting the Timing of Each Phrase Adjust Timing cccccccsseseneeseeeeseeeesees 104 Adjusting the volume setting for Gach phrase scsi acess enorer inair 105 Edit on sequence Play List Screen Quick Ed buena ann ecg arcana coteeseseteueeaiveaan ee 106 Deleting a sequence rack icien dence taciaducsctusuas sweatin ue dpevadan E 107 Recording the sequence playback sound On audio track e seessessoeseeseossoeseoseossessesssessessesssessessses 108 Creating AN audio CD sssssss 2 LOQ Prepare for recording Multitrack recording cssccsscsssseenseeeeenees 110 What is multitrack recording aioir eia a aa E E 110 Preparing a CD RW disc for use FormMat eesseeseeseessesseessessoeseessossessooseoeseesecesessessocsseeseessessessses 110 Preparing anew CD RW dise lor USE siina e eye scenes 110 Erasing the entire contents of a CD RW diSCeriaeletnurersaskossin anin a 112 Monitoring the sound of a connected instrument e seeseessosseessessosseeseoseoeseosooesesseessesseesesssessessses 113 DE CCHING TNS UA il SOULCE sueits E est dasa ahistunscetbstabanres ty xababent naa uaniseheauaiuesnleebiines 113 PA GJUSUMe UNE I PULSENSIMVILY ann tenn Aree rnen ical e aia eden 113 Momtorin etie SO UIC ist wasan seainacte a T S 113 Setting
275. m e If you operate the operating section controlling section and drive section of this device in irregular manners harmful ray may be radiated Laser beam radiated from the optical pickup is harmful to your eyes and body Please observe the following O Do not attempt to open the optical pickup unit O When you need repair service call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country Before Using Compact Discs Handling the CD RW Drive e Install the unit on a solid level surface in an area free from vibration e Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been moved to a location with a level of humidity that is greatly different than its former location Rapid changes in the environment can cause condensation to form inside the drive which will adversely affect the operation of the drive and or damage discs When the unit has been moved allow it to become accustomed to the new environment allow a few hours before operating it e Remove any disc from the drive before powering up or down e To avoid the risk of malfunction and or damage insert only discs with GIS into the CD RW drive Never insert any other type of disc Avoid getting paper clips coins or any other foreign objects inside the drive e When you carry CDX 1 remove the disc from the loading tray Do not carry the device with the loading tray downward e Avoid vibration and shock during operating Do not carry wit
276. making the final output sound thicker and broader O PHASER Phaser By adding varied phase portions the phaser effect gives a whooshing swirling character to the sound O P SHIFT Pitch Shifter This effect changes the pitch of the original sound up or down within a range of two octaves O DOUBL N Doubling An effect of multiple sounds heard together a doubling effect is produced O TRM PAN Tremolo Pan Tremolo is an effect that creates a cyclic change in volume Pan cyclically moves the stereo position between left and right when stereo output is used In case of Phase output will become monaural DLY Delay This creates a thicker sound by applying a delayed sound to the direct sound Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the delay effect on off Effect Type Type SINGLE This is a simple delay TAP The delayed sound is panned across the left and right channels This will be effective when stereo output is used Delay Time Delay Time SINGLE 1 1400 mS This parameter adjusts the delay time i e the interval for which sound is delayed TAP 1 700 mS Feedback Feedback 0 100 This parameter adjusts the amount of feedback Changing the amount of feedback causes the number of time the delayed sound is repeated to change as well Effect Level Effect Level 0 120 This adjusts the volume of the delay sound 2 99 a 9 a Q 2 D D 3 D 201
277. me of the delay sound E Preamp Models the preamp section of a guitar amp Set the desired type for Amp Type JC 120 The sound of the Roland JC 120 Jazz Chorus 120 a favorite of pro musicians around the world CLEAN The sound of a conventional built in tube amp CRUNCH Allows you to obtain a crunch effect that creates a natural distortion MATCH A modeling of the latest tube amp widely used in styles from blues and rock VO DRV Allows you to obtain the Liverpool sound of the 60 s BLUES A lead sound with a rich middle ideal for Blues BG LEAD The sound of a tube amp typical of the late 70s to 80s characterized by a distinctive mid range MS 1 2 1 2 The sound of a large tube amp stack that was indispensable to the British hard rock of the 70 s and is used to this day by many hard rock guitarists MS 1 A trebly sound created by using input of the guitar amp MS 2 A mild sound created by using input II of the guitar amp MS 1 2 The sound of connecting inputs and II of the guitar amp in parallel creating a sound with a stronger low end than I SLDN A tube amp sound with versatile distortion usable in a wide range of styles METAL The sound of a large tube amp suitable for heavy metal METAL D A high gain and powerful metal sound E Speaker modeling The characters of the following types of speakers can be modeled Set the desired type for Speaker Type Microphone Well matched Speaker Ty
278. mfontein Johannesbourg Republic of SOUTH AFRICA P O Box 32918 Braamfontein 2017 Republic of SOUTH AFRICA TEL 011 403 4105 Paul Bothner PTY Ltd 17 Werdmuller Centre Claremont 7700 Republic of SOUTH AFRICA P O Box 23032 Claremont Cape Town SOUTH AFRICA 7735 TEL 021 674 4030 CHINA Beijing Xinghai Musical Instruments Co Ltd 6 Huangmuchang Chao Yang District Beijing CHINA TEL 010 6774 7491 Shanghai Xingtong Acoustics Equipment CO Ltd Rm 1108 No 2240 Pudong South Road Shanghai CHINA TEL 021 6873 4123 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co Ltd Service Division 22 32 Pun Shan Street Tsuen Wan New Territories HONG KONG TEL 2415 0911 INDIA Rivera Digitec India Pvt Ltd 409 Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off Dr Edwin Moses Road Mumbai 400011 INDIA TEL 022 498 3079 INDONESIA PT Citra IntiRama J1 Cideng Timur No 15J 150 Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA TEL 021 6324170 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461 9 Seocho Dong Seocho Ku Seoul KOREA TEL 02 3486 8855 MALAYSIA BENTLEY MUSIC SDN BHD 140 amp 142 Jalan Bukit Bintang 55100 Kuala Lumpur MALAYSIA TEL 03 2144 3333 PHILIPPINES G A Yupangco amp Co Inc 339 Gil J Puyat Avenue Makati Metro Manila 1200 PHILIPPINES TEL 02 899 9801 SINGAPORE Swee Lee Company 150 Sims Drive SINGAPORE 387381 TEL 846 3676 CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE LTD Blk 3014 Bedok Industrial Park E 02 21
279. multaneously p 97 MEMO In step 4 if you press 3 Press CREATE STOP W CREATE will Recording will begin and at the same time the audio track s you selected in step 2 blink recording standby will play Press pads to record them mode Then press CREATE once again recording will 4 When you are finished recording press PAD SEQUENCING CREATE begin CREATE goes out extinguished and the display returns to the Basic screen 5 Return to the location where you begin recording and press PLAY gt to play EMD back your performance and listen to the result After recording you can press UNDO REDO p 138 to return to the previous conditions 91 Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence Correcting timing inaccuracies while you record Quantize 92 Pad operations are recorded on the track with a timing precision of 1 96th of a beat This means that it is rather difficult to record pad operations exactly at precise measure beginnings quarter notes or eighth notes when you are using realtime recording This is why the CDX 1 provides a Quantize function that can correct the timing of your pad operations while you record In step 7 of Realtime recording p 90 change the Quantize setting Sets the timing resolution in terms of notes The timing at which the sound begins will be adjusted to the beginning of measures or beats MEAS Beginning of the measure ee T 19
280. mum The level specified is indicated by a small symbol f at both side of the level meter sampling screen It is best to set this while actually playing ELHA REMAIN _ FmMEZS sounds and watching the movement of the Data sre date aii Y Start with A level meter Prepare the audio source for sampling so that it can be played immediately 4 Press PAD REC The display will indicate Waiting trigger and the CDX 1 will be in sampling ready mode To abort the procedure from this state press PAD REC 5 Play the audio source that you wish to sample When audio input is detected the display will indicate Now recording and sampling will begin 6 When sampling is completed press PAD REC When sampling is completed the Basic screen reappears What the Start with setting does This determines how sampling will begin MANUAL Sampling can be started manually LEV 1 LEV 8 Sampling will be triggered by audio input PAD Sampling will begin when you press any pad gt Sampling from a pad to another pad Resampling p 63 gt Sampling will begin when you press PLAY P gt Sampling from a CD audio clip collection inserted in the CDX 1 p 57 Recording a sound to a pad Sampling Making sure to capture the beginning of the sound Pre Trigger 62 Depending on the sampling conditions the beginning of the sampled sound may not be captured By setting the p
281. n Off Effect On Off OFF ON Low Gain Low Gain 20 20 dB Low Mid Gain Low Mid Gain 20 20 dB Low Mid Freg Low Mid Freq 100 10 0 kHz Low Mid Q Low Mid Q 0 5 16 High Mid Gain High Mid Gain 20 20 dB High Mid Freq High Mid Freq 100 10 0 kHz High Mid Q High Mid Q 0 5 16 High Gain High Gain 20 20 dB Level Output Level 20 20 dB This parameter turns the compressor effects on off Adjusts the range time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain Adjusts the strength of the attack Larger values will result in a sharper attack creating a more clearly defined sound Adjusts the volume This parameter turns the equalizer effect on off This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the bass equalizer This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the low midrange equalizer This parameter sets the central frequency for the low midrange equalizer This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by Low Mid Freq A larger value results in a narrower range of change This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the high midrange equalizer This parameter sets the central frequency for the high midrange equalizer This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by High Mid Freq A larger value results in a narrower range of change This parameter sets the gain
282. n a song Marker p 129 G SEQ TR Sequence Track This indicates t symbol the sequence track that is selected as the playback destination gt Playing a sequence track p 96 BNK Pad Bank This indicates the number of the currently selected pad bank gt Switching pad banks p 54 29 A Oo J D n O o 5 D Panel Descriptions Front Panel Disc Tray Place the CD to be loaded on this tray Emergency eject hole Disc Tray Emergency eject hole This hole allows the disc tray to be opened in case of emergency gt If the disc tray does not open p 36 O The jack and button marked by the symbol cannot be used Rear Panel MASTER Jack PHONES Jack 7 COAXIAL connectors Q LINE Jack OPTICAL connectors GUITAR BASS Jack AGATA Jh hi D AC ADAPTOR Pele S ae BTE i ac NE i oP Pe a ae A FO mci jack more TOUR ce nase one con fl aor CUE 0 CY lt QG Earth Connector FOOT SWICH Jack 2 MIC2 jack MIDI Connectors AC ADAPTOR Jack 3 Earth Connector Connect the supplied AC adaptor to this jack re You must use only the included PSB 2U AC adaptor Use of any other adaptor may cause overheating or malfunctions Cord Hook Wrap the cable around this hook so that the AC adaptor cable is not pulled out accidentally Ifthe AC adapto
283. n be applied to the sound of the rhythm guide This is convenient when you are applying a loop effect to the audio tracks since it lets you apply the same character to the sound of the rhythm guide gt Refer to Using the loop effects p 93 Prepare for recording Multitrack recording Changing the rhythm pattern 1 4 Press RHYTHM GUIDE PATTERN TEMPO The Rhythm Guide Setting screen appears Press CURSOR to move the cursor to Pattern line RH Y THH GUIDE Lene 100 Beat PatLerr TeMFO Turn the TIME V ALUE dial to select the desired rhythm pattern Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Changing the tempo 1 3 4 Press RHYTHM GUIDE PATTERN TEMPO The Rhythm Guide Setting screen appears Press CURSOR LU to move the cursor to AALAN Leue 100 Tempo line Beat 4 4 Pattern Rock 1 Tempra a FE 00 Turn the TIME V ALUE dial to select the desired tempo Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Setting the tempo and rhythm pattern of the song Tempo Map The tempo map specifies tempo changes in units of a measure It contains data indicating the time signature and tempo that are to be applied at a specified measure The tempo map can be used to switch not only the tempo of the rhythm guide but also the rhythm pattern Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon Press CURSOR gt to select the Tempo Map icon Press YES ENT
284. n you arrange samples to create a song p 90 93 7 If you wish to make settings for another sample press the appropriate pad and repeat steps 4 6 8 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Editing the sample of a pad Displaying the correct tempo of a sample The upper right of the Pad Parameter screen displays the t fth le in units of C EErEE isplays the empo of the sample in units o Soa Roe lt BPM Beats Per Minute the number of beats LoorF Mode in one minute MEM Initially this is set to J x8 OFF Start Point 00000000 However for this to be displayed accurately you must tell the CDX 1 the number of beats in that sample and the note value of each beat quarter note x 8 notes The tempo BPM display is always calculated as 1 beat quarter note For example an eighth note is calculated and displayed as half a beat and a half note as double the length of one beat In the case of a long sample such as a narration for which it is difficult to determine a tempo BPM you should set the number of beats in x_ as 0 This produces the best results for the Time Stretch function p 81 1 Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice Alternatively press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt Q n co pes J 4p op fed 3 d 4 eo o fed O fed Q The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons FAD FARAHETER hiap a Be eae TR
285. n you raise the volume of the pad for playback noise may be more obtrusive If necessary press a pad to change the sampling destination If the specified pad already contains a sample you will be asked Overwrite If it is OK to delete the existing sample press YES ENTER If you wish to keep that sample specify a different pad that is unused If necessary press PAD BANKS to change the pad bank gt Switching pad banks p 54 At the appropriate moment of the performance press PAD REC The display will indicate Now recording and sampling will begin When sampling is completed press PAD REC When sampling is completed the Basic screen reappears SAM LIMG REMAIN Y mSs5 DatLaTsre bealeiielsan wT Start With MANUAL The meter moves high level as possible without exceeding the limit shown as dotted line Ene ity REMAIN AnZo DataT3Fe Berea Start with MANUAL Be NEM e For details on the jack to use for connections and on the INPUT SELECT buttons refer to Panel Descriptions Rear Panel p 30 and panel descriptions INPUT section p 21 e At the factory settings the CDX 1 cannot record the output of a digital audio device via the OPTICAL IN or COAXIAL IN connectors You must change the settings as described in In order to make a Digital recording with CD player p 148 e Use the MASTER fader to adjust the monitoring volume of the synthesizer
286. ns be sure that the power of all equipment is turned off Stereo Headphones Foot Switch DP 2 etc DAT MD Recorder etc O 00000 00000 O CITT CHOO o0 p00 O00000 Electric Guitar Electric Bass Mica DC IN 12V 2 8A oeo USE Roland PSB 2U ADAPTOR ONI y ror SWIT AC Adaptor PSB 2U Note e To prevent malfunction and or damage to speakers or other devices always turn down the volume and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections Audio Set etc The pin assignment for the XLR type connectors is as shown below Before making any connections make sure that this pin assignment is compatible with that of all your other devices COLD eN ae HOT V e Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers This can be remedied by GND 1 Changing the orientation of the microphone s 2 Relocating microphone s at a greater distance from speakers 3 Lowering volume levels OUTPUT GUITAR PHONES 8 CD Player etc Keyboard Rhythm Machine etc e To prevent the inadvertent disruption of power to your unit should the plug be pulled out accidentally and to avoid applying undue stress to the AC adaptor jack anchor the power cord u
287. nu A mini menu disappears di isappears 6 Use the REW 44 FF PP or the TIME VALUE dial to select the phrase that you wish to paste The currently selected phrase will be highlighted in black 7 After you have specified the paste phrase and press YES ENTER It displays where to paste You can adjust the FASTE PHRASE HOHN destination iO TrA E Faste To o005 02 Rg 8 Use the REW lt q FF PP or the TIME V ALUE dial to set the move destination to NOW 9 After you have specified the paste destination press YES ENTER The specified phrase is pasted 10 When you are finished editing the sequence track press DISPLAY MEMO EDIT goes out extinguished and the display returns to the Basic screen To cancel the paste press UNDO REDO p 138 after step 9 99 Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence Cutting a phrase Cut 100 When you cut a phrase subsequent phrases will be moved forward Press PAD SEQUENCING EDIT EDIT lights and the Sequence Edit menu are displayed as icons Press CURSOR __ gt to select the Cut icon SEG EDIT Beare Press YES ENTER The Cut Phrase screen appears CLIT PHRASE HA TeA ne Beart 0004 01 0549 Duration 12 05 Press CURSOR Q A sequence track select mini menu appears CUT PHRASE Ec TA StL 1 059 a TRE Tur 7 Oso roy Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the sequence track A D that you wish to edit and
288. o delete The sample is deleted You wish to cancel to delete a sample press UNDO REDO p 138 Deleting all samples of a pad bank Bank Erase 1 Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice Alternatively press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons FAD FARAMETER a ge af D Gest nhc a CAS altel OFTIM DIVIDE TRIM J 9 e al Q Q pad id e a e pad xe Q a 2 Press CURSOR gt to select the Bank Erase icon SERS EAE ERASE N a CE C REYRS HAVE E FRMH NiS 3 Press YES ENTER The Erase Bank screen appears TRAE ERASE Bark COrumLoori J 4 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to specify the pad bank to be deleted NOYE If you carry on bank erase a 5 Press YES ENTER A message of Are you sure appears remained without a erasing pad bank name p 55 will be 6 Press YES ENTER once again All samples of the specified pad bank will be erased 7 If you wish to erase other pad banks repeat steps 4 and 6 8 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 65 Recording a sound to a pad Sampling Preventing accidental erasure of pads Bank Protect The samples assigned to the pads can be protected against accidental erasure so that they are not lost by unintended operations or by inadvertently overwriting them A protected pad bank and its samples are handled as follows e If you att
289. o source directly to a CD R without using the audio tracks Nore iSe MISE You must use CD R discs that carry these logos DIGITAL AUDIO e The CDX 1 writes song data to a CD R using Track At Once As long as the disc has not yet been finalized additional song data can be added to a music CD R that has been written using Track At Once However the disc cannot be played in a 2 conventional CD player until it has been finalized gt Finalizing a CD R disc Track at once p 18 p 136 Finalize p 204 No further data can be added to a CD R that has been finalized e Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a copyright held by a third party Roland assumes no responsibility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of third party copyrights arising through your use of this unit e The CDX 1 and its CD R capability are designed to allow you to reproduce material to which you have copyright or material which the copyright owner has granted you permission to copy Accordingly reproduction of Music CD or other copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner avoiding technical prohibiting features of second generation and later copying like SCMS or others constitutes copyright infringement and may incur penalties even in case such reproduction is for your own personal use and enjoyment private use Consult a copyright specialist or special publications for more detailed information on obtaining such
290. o the mastering tool settings you ve edited and save your settings This procedure is a continuation of Editing the mastering tool settings above Your edited patch can be saved at one of twenty one patch numbers U01 U21 and recalled at any time just like a preset patch 1 Inthe mastering tools effect block screen z press CURSOR lJ to select NAME j 2 Press YES ENTER MEMO The Patch Name input screen appears HTE FATCH HAHE You can input a patch name of up to eight characters 3 Press CURSOR lt _ gt to move to the desired character location and turn the TIME V ALUE dial to input patch name 4 When you are finished inputting the patch name and editing the settings of each effect press NO EXIT to return to the effect block screen 5 Press CURSOR gt to select WRITE HAME 6 Press YES ENTER MEMO The Patch save screen appears Maxdour amam Patches are stored in internal CEMTERS memory 7 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the patch save destination U01 U21 8 After you have specified the patch save destination press YES ENTER When the data has been saved you re returned to the Mastering track screen 19 Mastering Tools parameter list The Mastering Tools is compressor that splits sounds into different frequency band to unify their volumes Bass Cut Equalizer Filter Enhancer Input Expander Compressor Mixer Limiter Output Pa
291. o verify that the sample sounds Hold down CLIP BOARD and press the destination pad CLIP BOARD goes out and the destination pad lights If the destination pad already contains a sample you cannot copy a sample Press the destination pad to verify that the sample sounds Deleting a sample of CLIP BOARD If you wish to delete a sample of CLIP BOARD hold DELETE and press CLIP BOARD Note The sample of the PAD are unable to be played back simultaneously while playing the sample of CLIP BOARD Editing the sample of a pad Spliting a sample among several pads Divide Sample Sometimes after sampling an extended performance you may wish to divide the sample into two parts and assign them to separate pads as new samples The Divide Sample function lets you do this This is convenient when you wish to record a sample without pausing and then later divide it into shorter samples and assign them to pads Specifying a division point and dividing a sample in two 1 Set the end point of the original sample at the location where you wish to divide the sample gt Setting the points p 78 Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice Alternatively you can press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons FAD FARAMETER F Se apa CEO lela OFTIM DIVIDE TRIM Press CURSOR __ gt to select the Divide Seep DIVIDE N a ra Er leita F
292. ocation of that marker in steps 1 and 3 before you register the repeat start end points gt Moving to a location of a marker p 129 hrs There must be at least one second between the repeat start A and end B points Is not possible to set the end point less than one second away from the start point Recording playing back a performance Assigning markers within a song Marker The Marker function lets you assign a marker at desired locations in the song When this function is used you can move instantly to the location of a marker that you registered simply by specifying the appropriate marker number This is also a great convenience for editing Markers are assigned a number in the range of 001 100 starting at the beginning of the song and you can assign up to 100 markers This means that if you register a new marker between existing markers subsequent markers will be renumbered upward by one For example if you add the following marker after marker number 2 the numbers will change as shown below Marker1 Marker2 Marker3 Marker4 gt t y gt Time Markeri Marker2 1 Marker4 Marker5 Ly i Time Assigning a marker NOTE There must be at least one Press MARK A marker is assigned at the location where you pressed the button Bea ae naae rare Ties Markers can be registered regardless of whether you are recording playing or stopped not possible to assign a marker J D O A oQ OD a
293. oduce sounds similar to those of an acoustic guitar Acoustic Guitar Modeling Compressor Equalizer Noise Suppressor Parameter full name Setting 2 Chorus can be replaced one of the following effects ELG Flanger Phaser Lis EL 3 TES rc site ADELE souin TRH Tremolo Pan Function A MDL Acoustic Guitar Modeling This models the sound of an acoustic guitar Effect On Off Effect On Off Pick Up Type Pick Up Type Character Character Top Hi Top Hi Top Mid Top Mid Body Body Level Level re Tf Top H1 Top Mid and Body are all set to 100 there will be no sound NEM If you set the pickup selector of your guitar to the front position the desired effect will be easier to achieve OFF ON SINGLE HUMBUCK STD JUMBO ENHANCE PIEZO 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 100 This parameter turns the acoustic guitar modeling effect on off Set this to the type of pickup on the connected guitar This is a normal acoustic guitar This is an acoustic guitar with a body that is bigger than STANDARD The bass sound is powerful This is an acoustic guitar that with a more responsive attack so the guitar will retain more of its prominence in almost any situation This models the sound you would get from a pickup installed on an electric acoustic guitar During the attack a certain amount of compression will be applied Adjust the level of the
294. of the remaining samples are written to the last pad as a single sample HINT If you turn Trim on the beginning of the next sample are set to the point at which the volume first rises from silence to exceed the Threshold By setting Threshold to the desired level you can cause the sample to be divided automatically according to the level you specify NEM If you want only the results of the division to be neatly arranged in the pad bank select pad 1 of the pad bank as the destination 1 Editing the sample of a pad Dividing a sample at the timing that you press a button Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice Alternatively press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons FAD FARAMETER gi a AM Be eae TRIM Press CURSOR gt to select the Divide iata DIVICe icon Press YES ENTER The Divide Sample screen appears MANUAL Bank 1i 3 Bank i 7 Make sure that the cursor is located at the Type line and turn the TIME VALUE dial to set it to MANUAL Use CURSOR Q 1 1 lt C gt to select the Source original sample and To destination pad bank number and pad number and specify the sample for each Specify the pad bank number by turning the TIME VALUE dial Specify the pad number by pressing a pad or by turning the TIME VALUE dial Press YES ENTER and the original sample beg
295. of the package The CDX 1 is packaged with the following items Please make sure that you have all of them J CDX 1 one unit J CD RW blank disc one J Demo disc Songs Samples one J CDX 1 Owner s Manual this document J Effect Patch List J AC Adopter USB 2U About the included disc NOTE DO NOT play the d di Demo disc multitrack recording be E ee ee on a conventional audio CD This is a demo disc containing a multitrack recording When you play it back the player The resulting sound state of the multitrack recording will be reproduced gt Listening to the demo may be of a level that could disc p 45 cause permanent hearing loss Damage to speakers or other system components may Main features of the CDX 1 result Easy operation from recording editing to audio CD production The CDX 1 is designed to be operated as easily as a cassette tape recorder even by beginners From recording and editing to producing an audio CD you can experience the power of digital recording from the day you first take it out of the box The liquid crystal display shows icons to indicate various types of information Sampling functionality The CDX 1 s Sampling function lets you record your favorite audio material to a pad p 53 You can freely edit the sampled materials Since edited samples can be added to the instrumental performances that you record this function gives you a wide range of possibi
296. ometimes need to make fine adjustments to the sample s start loop points or to its length By For details on the Start Loop point and Length refer to adjustments while listening to the sound What are the Start Loop using the Preview function or Scrub function you can make precise and detailed point and Length Owner s Specifying a point while you listen to the sound Manual p 78 before and after it Preview The preview button TO means To Now to the point Each time you press TO a brief region of sound one second ending at that point will be played By turning the TIME VALUE dial to move the point back and forth while listening to this sound you can easily make accurate adjustments to the point MEMO The sample waveform will not be displayed for PREVIEW TO FROM operations When you press the preview button FROM the preview function will play From Now from the point allowing you to hear a brief region of sound one second beginning at that point 1 Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice Alternatively press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons FAD FARAMETER F eg DA Ey bia SE Sallal OFTIH DIVIDE TRIM 2 Press CURSOR lt lL gt to select the J AD EDIT FAD FARAMETER Pad Parameter icon ca Gy C om aalsa OFTIM DIVIDE TRIM 3 Press YES ENTER The Pad Parameter screen appears 4 Press C
297. on TEMFO MARE sohG Eee 3 Press YES ENTER The System Parameter screen appears 4 Press CURSOR J to move the cursor to SYSTEM PARAM Wer i 50 wy wy w D CORY Protect Or X Fade Time line Wave Preview 4560 Fage Time Etec 5 Turn the TIME V ALUE dial to select the crossfade time 1sec 10sec units second 6 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Exchange Track Exchanging the contents of sequence tracks A sequence track and its corresponding audio track cannot be played back at the same time For example sequence track A and audio tracks 1 2 cannot be played back simultaneously In such cases you can exchange the contents of the sequencer track with another track so that the sequence track and audio tracks can be played simultaneously Press PAD SEQUENCING EDIT EDIT lights and the Sequence Edit menu are displayed as icons Press CURSOR lt IL gt to select the A RACE Exchange Track icon FR A PE E Fu he Real Sace see EA CHAHGE Press YES ENTER The Exchange Track screen appears k Exchange af oe A Press CURSOR Q LU to move the cursor and turn the TIME V ALUE dial to specify the two sequence tracks that are exchanged Press YES ENTER The two sequence tracks are exchanged Press DISPLAY return to the Basic screen For details refer to Playing sequence tracks and audio tracks simultaneously
298. ons in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display Note however that your unit may incorporate a newer enhanced version of the system e g includes newer sounds so what you actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual POWER switch may not work right after you connect the AC adaptor to CDX 1 In this case try again to turn the power on after a few seconds 33 uJ pad D e O 4 gt 3 pad a 5 pr D O Q O gt lt Basic operation of the CDX 1 Turning Off the Power O To turn off the power of the CDX 1 you must use the POWER switch rather than unplugging the AC adaptor from the outlet or disconnecting the AC ADAPTOR jack O Ifyou turn off the power without using the POWER switch while the internal CD RW drive is operating the CD RW drive may malfunction O Ifthe power supply is interrupted due to an unexpected power failure or other cause avoid moving the CDX 1 and turn the power on once again when the power resumes CDX 1 saves some parameters like system setting when power turned off For this reason if you simply unplug the AC adaptor without using the POWER switch the mixer settings effect patch data and unsaved sample data will all be lost Please use caution 1 Turn off the power of the connected equipment in the opposite order from which they were turned on p 33 2 Pre
299. or cut for the treble equalizer Level Output Level 20 20 dB This parameter adjusts the volume after the equalizer stage WAH Wah The wah effect creates a unique tone by changing the frequency response characteristics of a filter Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the wah effect on off Polarity Polarity UP The frequency of the filter will rise DOWN The frequency of the filter will fall Sensitivity Sens 0 100 This adjusts the sensitivity at which the filter will change in the direction determined by the polarity setting Higher values will result in a stronger response With a setting of 0 the strength of picking will have no effect Frequency Frequency 0 100 This adjusts the center frequency of the Wah effect Peak Peak 0 100 Adjusts the way in which the wah effect applies to the area around the center frequency Lower values will produce a wah effect over a wide area around the center frequency Higher values will produce a wah effect in a narrow area around the center frequency With a value of 50 a standard wah sound will be produced Level Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume NS Noise Suppressor This effect reduces the noise and hum Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the noise suppressor effect on off Threshold Threshold 0 100 Adjust this parameter as appropriate for the volume of the noise If the noise level is high a higher setting is appropri
300. or is located at the Type row and turn the TIME VALUE dial to set AUTO Values of AUTO 0 5 AUTO 1 0 AUTO 1 5 and AUTO 2 0 specify the length in seconds of the silent portion that are the standard for dividing the sample For example if you set this to AUTO 1 0 silent portions longer than one second are the boundaries of the divided samples Use CURSOR Q 1 1 lt C gt IJ to select the Source original sample and To destination pad bank number and pad number and specify the sample for each Specify the pad bank number by turning the TIME VALUE dial Specify the pad number by pressing a pad or by turning the TIME VALUE dial Press YES ENTER The sample are divided If the destination pad already contains a sample the Overwrite message appears If it is OK to overwrite the existing sample press YES ENTER If you do not wish to overwrite the existing sample press NO EXIT Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Dividing destinations when AUTO is used 84 The divided samples are assigned successively starting with the pad you specified for TO Pads that already contain a sample are skipped If there are not enough vacant pads for all of the divided samples a message of PADs are Full Use Next Bank appears If you press YES ENTER the process of division continues with the next pad bank If you press NO EXIT all
301. or of your guitar to the front position the desired effect will be easier to achieve COMP Compressor Compressor the entire output signals when the input volume exceeds a specified value For details on the parameters refer to COMP on the preceding page NS Noise Suppressor This effect reduces the noise and hum For details on the parameters refer to NS on the preceding page DLY Delay This creates a thicker sound by applying a delayed sound to the direct sound For details on the parameters refer to DLY above 183 5 02 99 49 z 9 e r Q a F 3 n Insert effect algorithm list 5 VO ACOUSTIC Vocal Acousitc Guitar This algorithm is for use when simultaneously recording a vocal and acoustic guitar For the guitar you can produce a warm sound as though a mic were being used even when an electric acoustic is connected by a direct line Noise Compressor Suppressor COMP COMP HS Acoustic Compressor Noise Processor Suppressor E MIC Parameter full name Setting Function COMP Compressor Compressor the entire output signals when the input volume exceeds a specified value Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the compressor effects on off Sustain Sustain 0 100 Adjusts the range time over which low level signals are boosted Larger values will result in longer sustain Attack Attack 0 100 Adjusts the strength of the att
302. ory and sampling stops This indication disappears when you press any button such as DISPLAY or NO EXIT the sounds recorded up to that point is kept on in the internal memory If such instances execute the Optimize Sample function This deletes wasted space being consumed on the memory and may secure new memory For details on Optimize Sample read Increasing the Remaining Memory Optimize Sample on this page Increasing the Remaining Memory Optimize Sample By executing Optimize Sample you can erase the unwanted data from the internal memory may increase the amount of available space in the internal memory O imi le will del follows Optimize Sample will delete data as follows Sees a nnniz e As much as possible data including partial waveforms used in samples and on Sample it is not possible to tracks except for those portions actually sounded used is deleted press UNDO REDO p 138 to revert to the state e Waveform data in each phrase on the tracks from the beginning of the waveforms l a before executing Optimize to where they start playing as well as data after points specified by Wave End e After you execute Optimize Point p 105 are erased a Sample editing to be the start points earlier and the 1 Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice end points later p 78 b i ible Alternatively you can press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt aac a e While th ing b The P
303. osses 158 How the rhythm guide sounds correspond to note numbers sessssessssesessesessesesesseseseeses 158 CD direct recording sitainisanceevanraienetevelacsassderanitacntinneee O Recording to a CD R disc CD Recorder ccceceseeneneeeeeeeeeeeeenenees 160 Recording an external audio source to a CD R disc sesseeseessosseossessosseeseossoeseoseossessesssessessesssessessses 161 Recording samples played using Pad Crossfade on a CD R diSC 0 sccscesseeeseesseeccsesseeeoseees 162 Recording the sequence playback on a CD R disc sesseeseessossoossessosseeseoseoeseoseossessesssessessesssessessses 163 ADDCNGICES siiiiciciivirciveatvndieriiincnenttnntendi ee LOS Troubleshooting iesies sis cs cece as ta cacctet ase estes iaciaasl oe at Aaa a a a aa 166 Major Message Lisl osnon rno a E E E E eees uses Moves descent 170 Rhythim Pattern Listenin a i a ae s 172 Mixer effectparameter fUNCHONS saionis isere cote peeuh takkanthcs whi cases dee Teina ia aR KEREN 174 liser effectalgorithin listones ei a asastoneosties 175 Glossary oai A E A 204 FParameter Lis ere mr e E E EE E Terre 208 MPL Implementation se R NRA 212 Mixer Block DidgraMriessiicreanieni a E ANE a E 217 Specifications criari enaA E E A T E a TN ANO 218 LEATS e E E E NN E EEE A E EE E retro roe eer rere 220 IMPORTANT NOTES In addition to the items listed under USING THE UNIT SAFELY on p 2 3 please read and observe the following Power Supply
304. ound A sound with a subtly shifted pitch is added to the direct sound making the final output sound thicker and broader By adding varied phase portions the phaser effect gives a whooshing swirling character to the sound This effect changes the pitch of the original sound up or down within a range of two octaves An effect of multiple sounds heard together a doubling effect is produced Tremolo is an effect that creates a cyclic change in volume Pan cyclically moves the stereo position between left and right when stereo output is used This produces a volume swell effect violin like sound In case of Phase and Slow Attack output will become monaural Insert effect algorithm list DLY Delay This creates a thicker sound by applying a delayed sound to the direct sound Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the delay effect on off Effect Type Type SINGLE This is a simple delay TAP The delayed sound is panned across the left and right channels This will be effective when stereo output is used Delay Time Delay Time SINGLE 1 1400 mS This parameter adjusts the delay time i e the interval for which sound is delayed TAP 1 700 mS Feedback Feedback 0 100 This parameter adjusts the amount of feedback Changing the amount of feedback causes the number of time the delayed sound is repeated to change as well Effect Level Effect Level 0 120 This adjusts the volu
305. ound the center frequency Lower values will produce a wah effect over a wide area around the center frequency Higher values will produce a wah effect in a narrow area around the center frequency With a value of 50 a standard wah sound will be produced Adjusts the volume NS Noise Suppressor This effect reduces the noise and hum Effect On Off Effect On Off Threshold Threshold Release Release are Modulation effect type OFF ON 0 100 0 100 This parameter turns the noise suppressor effect on off Adjust this parameter as appropriate for the volume of the noise If the noise level is high a higher setting is appropriate If the noise level is low a lower setting is appropriate Adjust this value until the decay of the sound is as natural as possible Adjusts the time from when the noise suppressor begins to function until volume reaches 0 High settings for the Threshold parameter may result in there being no sound when you play with your instruments volume turned down The Modulation effect type can be selected from the following effects For details on each effect refer to Available types of modulation and their effect p 202 O FLANGER Flanger O CHORUS Chorus O PHASER Phaser O P SHIFT Pitch Shifter O DOUBL N Doubling O TRM PAN Tremolo Pan O SLO ATK Slow Attack 186 The flanger effect gives a twisting jet airplane like character to the s
306. out extinguished and the display returns to the Basic screen p 138 after step 5 6 When you are finished editing the sequence track press DISPLAY 107 Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence Recording the sequence playback sound on audio track When you have created a sequence that you like you can record the playback sound of the sequence on an audio track You can even play back all three sequence tracks and combine them into two audio track stereo 1 Press PAD SEQUENCING SEQ PLAY SEQ PLAY lights and the Sequence Play SS ero List screen appears Pa 8 At this time the STATUS of all audio tracks dh W aan pigu will go dark 2 Select sequence tracks you wish to play back It is possible to select three sequence tracks gt Playing sequence tracks and audio tracks simultaneously p 96 3 Press PLAY gt to play back and use the PAD SEQ LEVEL faders to adjust the volume balance of a sequence track 4 Use the MASTER fader to adjust the recording level At this time raise the volume as high as possible without allowing the sound to distort aed MEMO 5 When you adjust the volume press STOP W You can record simultaneously audio tracks and input source 6 Press BOUNCE to get it to light 7 Press audio track STATUS that you wish to use as the recording destination The STATUS of audio tracks will blink in red and now the selected audio tr
307. ove to a location immediately before the area you wish to re record Press AUTO PUNCH The button will light and auto punch in out will be AUTO SASA C n O O O O Press REC EJ to enter record ready mode Press PLAY gt to play it back At the point you specified for re recording punch in will occur automatically Play your instrument to re record the performance At the point you specified for punch out the track will automatically change back to play mode Press STOP W to stop playback A message of Keep take NO YES Do you wish to save the take on CD RW disc appears If you wish to save the take press YES ENTER If you press NO EXIT saving to CD RW discs will be cancelled Listen to the result of the re recording Return the song to a point earlier than you re recorded and play it back 10 Press AUTO PUNCH AUTO PUNCH will go out and auto punch in out will be turned off re There must be at least one second between the punch in and punch out points It is not possible to set the punch out point less than one second after the punch in point NEM If you wish to punch in out at the location of a marker move to the marker location in steps 1 and 3 before you register the punch in out locations gt Moving to the location of a marker p 129 HINT Once you have registered the punch out location you can press AUTO PUNCH IN OUT to move
308. pe Cabinet Speaker Unit Setting preamp type SMALL Small open back enclosure 10 inch On Mic MIDDLE Open back enclosure 12 inch On Mic Clean Crunch Blues JC 120 Open back enclosure 12 inch two units On Mic JC 120 TWIN Open back enclosure 12 inch two units On Mic Clean Crunch twin Open back enclosure 12 inch two units Off Mic Clean Crunch MATCH Open back enclosure 12 inch two units On Mic Match Blues match Open back enclosure 12 inch two units Off Mic Match Blues BG Lead VO DRV Open back enclosure 12 inch two units On Mic Vo drv vo drv Open back enclosure 12 inch two units Off Mic Vo drv BG STK Large Sealed enclosure 12 inch two units On Mic BG Lead bg stk Large Sealed enclosure 12 inch two units Off Mic BG Lead MS STK Large Sealed enclosure 12 inch four units On Mic MS 1 MS 2 MS 1 2 Sldn Metal Meal D ms stk Large Sealed enclosure 12 inch four units Off Mic MS 1 MS 2 MS 1 2 Sldn Metal Meal D METAL Large dual stack 12 inch four units Off Mic MS 1 MS 2 MS 1 2 Sldn 1 On Mic models sound when a dynamic microphone is used Off Mic models sound when a condenser microphone is used 2 Roland JC 120 Modeling Metal Meal D 187 e W 49 E 49 z 9 QO Q e A F 3 n Insert effect algorithm list 7 ACOUSTIC MDL Acoustic Guitar Modeling This is a multi effect designed for electric guitar It allows you to use an electric guitar to pr
309. ple e In case the expanding expanding level is in excess of 130 or less than 70 the sample will not be made correct tempo Editing the sample of a pad Expanding compressing by a specified percentage or A tem po fTi me St retc h Compression expansion Since this function needs to accurately calculate the tempo in order to perform a Stretch requires more high quality compression or expansion you must first perform the procedure of processing time than other Displaying the correct tempo of a sample p 77 to specify the number of sample editing operations beats in the original sample Also the audio quality of the stretched sample may be In the case of samples for which it is difficult to calculate a tempo such as a ee ae inferior to that of the original narration vocal part or a long sustained sound set the number of beats to 0 sample 1 Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice Alternatively press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons FAD FARAMETER Ae rs ie gi AM Be eae TRIM 2 Press CURSOR _ gt to select the Time iaa STRETCH TIME N Stretch icon Q n co pes J 4p op fed 3 d 4 eo o fed O fed Q 3 Press YES ENTER The Time Stretch screen appears TIHE STRETCH 4 Use CURSOR 11 lt E gt I to select the pad bank number and pad number for each item and specify the desired number for each
310. pling Switching of preview length of Windows WAVE files Preview length of WAVE files imported on Loading a Windows WAVE file p 58 can be switched 1 Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon Press CURSOR gt to select the System icon TEMFO MARKE soNG Bees Press YES ENTER The System setting screen appears Press CURSOR to move the cursor to Wave Preview line 3S TEM PARAM Ier i 1 a CD Diaital REC OFF D CoP Protect JH Have Preview Etec Turn the TIME V ALUE dial to select the preview time W Isec 10sec units second Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Using free audio sources from the Internet If you have a computer that can connect to the Internet and a CD R drive you can NOTE load free audio sources Windows WAVE files from the Internet CDX enoa ble obe recorded to a CD R disc connect directly to the 1 Connect to the Internet and download the desired free Windows WAVE files 2 Using a CD R drive connected to or installed in your computer write the personal computer downloaded Windows WAVE file s to a CD R disc Insert the above CD R disc into the CDX 1 4 Follow the procedure described in steps 2 10 of Loading a Windows WAVE file 59 D D p x gt Q pad id gt Q pad O fab Q Recording a sound to a pad Sampling Making settings in the Sampling screen The Sam
311. pling screen appears in step 3 of Sampling an external sound p 56 or step 2 of Sampling from a CD audio clip collection inserted in the CDX 1 p 57 As necessary make settings for the various items in the Sampling screen to modify the sampling settings Selecting the audio quality and sampling time appropriate for the material Data Type 2 60 You can set the data type each time you sample This allows you to select the audio quality and recording time appropriate for the audio material you are sampling Make sure that the cursor is located at the SAMPLING REMAIN Fm2 Data Type line aes LEHTORI T4 Start With ate Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the data type Data Type HIGH Of the four types this allows the highest quality recording STANDRD This type maintains high quality while allowing longer recording time than HIGH Normally you should select this type LONG1 This type allows longer recording than STANDARD It is suitable for recording live performances LONG2 This allows the longest recording time of the four types Data type and sampling time If you limit your selection to one data type the available sampling time will be as follows Sampling Time Data Type Using standard memory Using expansion memory STANDARD 58 minutes LONGI 69 minutes LONG 87 minutes The above sampling times are approximations for when only one data type is used The data
312. press YES ENTER A mini menu disappears Use the REW lt q FF PP or the TIME VALUE dial to select the phrase that you wish to cut The currently selected phrase will be highlighted in black After you have specified the cut phrase and press YES ENTER The specified phrase is cut When you are finished editing the sequence track press DISPLAY EDIT goes out extinguished and the display returns to the Basic screen MEM If SEQ PLAY is off press EDIT and it will be turned on lit automatically Also the STATUS of all audio tracks will go dark MEM In step 5 also press NO EXIT a mini menu disappears NEM To cancel the cut press UNDO REDO p 138 after step 7 Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence Erasing Phrases Erase The phrase that you cut will be silent Even if there are phrases following it they will not be moved forward fa Es pa 1 Press PAD SEQUENCING EDIT EDIT lights and the Sequence Edit menu are displayed as icons I l i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i 2 Press CURSOR _ gt to select the Erase icon SAA ERASE PHRASE u 2u ELE E cee 3 Press YES ENTER The Erase Phrase screen appears ERASE PHRASE co TA et Start 0004 01 0859 Duration 12 089 4 Press CURSOR Q A sequence track select mini menu appears ERASE PHRASE Shor FO TEA F F 5ta
313. r is disconnected during operation your important recorded data may be lost Connect the ground cable here ore In some cases a Electric Guitar etc is connected the metallic part of the panel may sometimes feel rough and grainy This is due to an infinitesimal electrical charge which is absolutely harmless However if you are concerned about this connect the ground terminal see figure with an external ground When the unit is grounded a slight hum may occur depending on the particulars of your installation If you are unsure of the connection method contact the nearest Roland Service Center or an authorized Roland distributor as listed on the Information page Unsuitable places for connection e Water pipes may result in shock or electrocution e Gas pipes may result in fire or explosion e Telephone line ground or lightning rod may be dangerous in the event of lightning Panel Descriptions MIDI Connectors IN OUT THRU Connect an external MIDI device e g MIDI controller or MIDI sequencer here IN Receives MIDI messages from another MIDI device Connect this to the MIDI OUT connector of your external MIDI device e OUT THRU This connector transmits MIDI messages Connect it to the MIDI IN connector of your external MIDI device NEM On the CDX 1 a single connector doubles in use for MIDI OUT and MIDI THRU At the factory settings this functions as a MIDI OUT connector You may change th
314. racks are playing pressing a pad will not sound its sample the pads will be extinguished If you wish to play back audio tracks and add samples played from the pads the STATUS of at least two audio tracks must be extinguished muted In this case you must turn off the audio track STATUS in a combination of 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 8 Playing pads while you play back an audio CD Sample data assigned to pads will remain in the internal memory of the CDX 1 unless mixdown p 133 is performed or the power is turned off p 34 Here s how you can use the Pad Sequence in internal memory to play the pads while an audio CD plays back 1 With samples assigned to the pads pads lit insert an audio CD 2 Press PLAY gt The audio CD plays 3 When you press a pad its sample will play At this time you can play up to three pads simultaneously Can layer samples from another pad bank When you switch pad banks the samples of the previous pad bank will stop However samples to which Hold p 72 is applied will continue to sound until Hold is defeated You can press other pads to layer samples from another sample bank Even in this case it is not possible to exceed the limit of four stereo notes A Depending on the status of the audio tracks even pads that contain samples may be extinguished and will not be playable For details refer to Playing pads while audio tracks play back on this page yore
315. rameter full name Setting EQ Equalizer A 4 band equalizer Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON Input Gain Input Gain 24 12 dB Low Type Low Type SHELV PEAKING Low Gain Low Gain 12 12 dB 20 Hz 2 00 kHz 0 3 16 0 Low Freq Low Frequency Low Q Low Q 1 Low Mid Gain Low Middle Gain 12 12 dB Low Mid Freq Low Middle Frequency 20 Hz 8 00 kHz Low Mid Q Low Middle Q 0 3 16 0 High Mid Gain High Middle Gain 2 412 dB High Mid Freq High Middle Frequency 20 Hz 8 00 kHz High Mid Q High Middle Q 0 3 16 0 High Type High Type SHELV PEAKING High Gain High Gain 12 12 dB High Freq High Frequency 1 40 2 00 kHz High Q High Q 1 0 3 16 0 Output Level Output Level 24 12 dB B CUT Bass Cut Filter Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON Bass Cut Freq Bass Cut Frequency THRU 20 Hz 2 00 kHz Below shows the signal form INPUT to MIXER Expander Compressor COMP Hoh Fea i oo Function This parameter turns the equalizer effect on off This parameter sets the overall volume before passing through the equalizer This parameter sets the type of the low frequency band equalizer Shelving type or peaking type This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the bass equalizer This parameter sets the central frequency for the low equalizer This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by Low Freq A larger
316. range set by Frequency that is to be mixed with the input Low Mix Level Low Mix Level 0 100 Adjusts the amount of phase shifted sound of the lower range that is to be mixed with the input Level Level 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the enhanced sound EQ Equalizer A 4 band equalizer Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the equalizer effect on off Low Gain Low Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the bass equalizer Low Mid Gain Low Mid Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the low midrange equalizer Low Mid Freq Low Mid Freq 100 10 0 kHz This parameter sets the central frequency for the low midrange equalizer Low Mid Q Low Mid Q 0 5 16 This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by Low Mid Freq A larger value results in a narrower range of change 194 Insert effect algorithm list High Mid Gain High Mid Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost or cut for the high midrange equalizer High Mid Freq High Mid Freq 100 10 0 kHz This parameter sets the central frequency for the high midrange equalizer High Mid Q High Mid Q 0 5 16 This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by High Mid Freq A larger value results in a narrower range of change High Gain High Gain 20 20 dB This parameter sets the gain amount of boost
317. rately Collecting audio material Recording a sound to a pad Sampling What is sampling Sampling refers to the process by which audio sources such as instruments or vocals can be digitally recorded Audio sources that you ve sampled by actually playing an instrument or by cutting part of an existing performance are referred to by the CDX 1 as audio samples subsequently called samples Today the method of creating music by repeatedly playing back sampled materials samples and by using a sequencer to freely combine samples has become one of the most commonly used methods Since the CDX 1 provides a Sequencer function p 88 you can freely arrange samples to create a song For example you might start by sampling a favorite drum pattern or bass pattern Then you might modify the tempo of these samples and use effects to change the character of the sound while you create anew accompaniment Finally you can layer vocal or instrumental performances to create a new song This method of music production via sampling originated in hip hop and house music but today has become widely used in all popular music Pads and banks Eight pads and 64 pad banks The panel buttons with numbers from 1 to 8 are pads Samples can be assigned to these pads and played A set of eight samples assigned to the panel is called a pad bank By switching pad banks you can use up to 512 samples 64 pad banks x 8
318. rding p 95 A Even if you repeatedly press gt Tie to record what appears to be a long phrase in the track the playback will not exceed the length of the sample itself However in the case of a pad for which Loop playback p 73 is specified the result of step recording will also be looped and a single long phrase will be recorded on the track MEMO If you want to over record this press UNDO REDO p 138 Return to the previous conditions Arranging audio samples to create a song Sequence Parameter settings for step recording Step SMPL sample Advance by a number of ticks of the current tempo corresponding to the length of the pad sample MEAS measure Advance to the beginning of the next measure Advance 192 ticks Advance 96 ticks Advance 64 ticks Advance 48 ticks Advance 32 ticks Advance 24 ticks Advance 16 ticks Advance 12 ticks If MEAS Measure is selected the input location where recording will first begin is usually the beginning of the next measure However recording will begin from the current location if it is the beginning of a measure If you select SMPL Sample the length of a step will depend on the pad you press This is convenient when you wish to pack the pad samples exactly together without being concerned with the performance tempo or the bar lines In this case even if the length of the sample is numeric
319. rding and fast forward you must also use MIDI Clock or MTC to achieve time based synchronization gt MIDI Clock gt MTC 205 Q e 0p sp pad lt Monitor The action of auditioning or listening to an audio signal What a recording engineer does when listening to the sound that is being recorded or what a performer does when listening to other parts Multitrack Having multiple tracks such as 4 8 16 or 24 etc Multitrack recorder gt Track Multitrack recording The process of using a multitrack recorder to record each part or instrument on a separate track Mute To silence something On the CDX 1 you can mute individual audio tracks by pressing the relevant STATUS button extinguishing its light Note number A number included in a MIDI note message to specify the note location on a keyboard A number of 0 127 is assigned to each semitone of the keyboard with middle C C4 as number 60 NTSC format The color television format used in the United States and Japan Tapes recorded in NTSC format cannot be played on a SECAM format or PAL format video deck gt SECAM format PAL format Optical A type of digital audio connector to which an optical cable can be connected In contrast a type of digital audio connector to which a coaxial cable can be connected are referred to as coaxial The CDX 1 s digital audio connector conforms to S P DIF gt S P DIF gt Coaxial Pad
320. re trigger time appropriately you can avoid this problem by causing sampling to begin slightly ahead of the time when you initiated sampling or when the audio input was detected Press CURSOR to move the cursor to REMAIN FmEZS Pre Trigger line ae TFE HOHO Sharh with LENM 5 Pre Trigger Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select the pre trigger time OFF 20ms 40msms 80ms 160ms or 320ms units milliseconds A In order to set Pre Trigger the Start with setting must be Lev 1 Lev 8 Recording a sound to a pad Sampling Sampling from a pad to another pad Resampling You can press one or more pads to play their samples and re sample the result This is called resampling Press PAD RECORDING PAD REC PAD REC indicator begins flashing and the Sampling screen appears Seis FEMAIN YmSs5_ DataTyre Eee Tare MOHD Y Start with MANUAL If all pads already contain samples a message of Overwrite appears In this case press YES ENTER a message disappears Press CURSOR to move the cursor to the Start with line Seis REMAIN YmSs5_ TataTyrFe STANDARD TYFe MOC FT SLSrt With Will Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select PAD Press the source pad s and watch the meter gga S ss at the right edge of the screen while you te Ouerwrite I I lates use the PAD SEQ LEVEL fader to adjust F st 1 EEE the level
321. reen appears et a TRACE HTE Patch MEEA tela dG INFULLeve Use CURSOR Q V to move the cursor to the line of the parameter that you wish to adjust Turn the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the value MTK Patch mastering tools patch Mixdown Tools for audio CD production PreMastr Tools for video pre mastering LiveMix Tools for final mix of a live recording PopMix Tools for pop music DanceMix Tools for dance music JinglMix Tools for FM broadcast jingles HardComp Heavy compressor SoftComp Light compressor ClnComp Cut background noise to clean up the overall sound DnceComp Compressor for dance music OrchComp Compressor for orchestra VocalCmp Compressor for vocals Acoustic Tools for acoustic guitar RockBand Tools for rock band Orchestr Tools for orchestra LoBoost Tools to emphasize the low frequency Brighten Tools to emphasize the high frequency DJsVoice Tools for a DJ voice PhoneVox Tools to model a telephone voice Cassette Suitable for cassette Tapes Phono Suitable for analog record disks Input Level Adjust the volume level 24 12 dB that is sent to the mastering tools The default setting is 0 dB MEMO If you are in CD BURNING mode MASTERING TOOLS will be turned on lit automatically NEM You can select the mastering tools patch and adjust the input level in CD burning screen However you can not test listening Editing a recorded performance to create an audio C
322. ress RHYTHM GUIDE PATTERN TEMPO The Rhythm Guide Setting screen appears 2 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to Beat 3 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select TEMPO MAP The rhythm guide will play according to the tempo map 4 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 118 A It is not possible to change the MEAS value 1 of the tempo map 1 Rhythm Pattern List p 172 NEM Up to fifty tempo maps can be created Ore Tempo map 1 cannot be deleted Recording playing back a performance Recording a Performance Here s how a performance on a connected instrument can be recorded on an audio track The input source selected by the INPUT SELECT button can be recorded in mono or stereo Select the audio track for recording 1 Press STATUS for the audio track on which you wish to record so that it blinks in red Now the selected audio track is ready for recording AUDIO TRACKS STATUS The state of each audio track is shown by the color of its STATUS button e Dark An audio track that has been muted silenced e Lit in green An audio track is ready for playback e Litin red An audio track being recorded e Blinking in red An audio track selected as the recording destination Record in mono When the input is mono you will normally use one audio track to record the sound in mono Press a STATUS to select one of the audio tracks 1 8 WOoOd0
323. ressing the REC EJ button 1 Connect an optional foot switch DP 2 BOSS FS 5U etc to the FOOT SWITCH jack 2 Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon 3 PressCURSOR gt to select the System icon 4 Press YES ENTER The System settings screen appears 5 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to SYSTEM PARAM Wer i Di Foot SW Time Dise TIME Y Augi CD Fader 6 Turn the VALUE dial to select PUNCH I O FSW Func Foot Switch PLAY STOP Each time you press the foot switch the song will alternately play back P and stop Ml PUNCH I O It will perform the same function as REC R Use this to switch between punch in recording and playback SAMPLER TRIG The samples specified for each pad bank will play gt Playing a sample from a connected foot switch p 75 7 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen This changes the settings so that the foot switch will perform punch in out operations Perform punch in out as described in Using the Record button to punch in out p 121 At this time press the foot switch instead of pressing REC EJ Automatically punching in out at a specified location Auto Punch in out Auto punch in out is a function that automatically performs punch in out at the time locations that you specify beforehand This is convenient when you wish to punch in out at precise times Specifying the area for recording Be
324. rocessed correctly Fade in Fade out Fade in means to gradually raise the volume for example at the beginning of a song Fade out means to gradually lower the volume until silence is reached Fader Faders are the sliders that are arranged on the panel of the console and used mainly to adjust the volume Formant A fixed frequency region of emphasis that is determined by the size of the vocal cords and which determines the character of a human voice When a recorded voice is simply lowered in pitch the location of the formants is also changed For example when the pitch is raised the resulting duck voice sounds as though the singer has smaller vocal cords Lowering the pitch produces a giant voice that sounds as though the singer has larger vocal cords Format When used as a verb format refers to the act of re writing the data storage divisions on a magnetic disk or memory card etc so that it conforms to the storage methods used by a particular device On the CDX 1 a newly purchased CD RW disc or one that has been used by a different device must be formatted by this system before it can be used When a storage medium is formatted any data previously existing on that medium will normally be lost Finalize This is the operation that writes the TOC to a prepared audio disc Whereas additions and changes can be made to discs that have not yet been finalized such discs are not playable on regular CD players
325. roprietary Roland technology for combining sound models of various types to produce sound Some of the effect algorithms of the CDX 1 are implemented using this technology DAT Short for Digital Audio Tape This refers both to the system of recording digitized sound to magnetic tape as well as to the tapes themselves Besides digital audio signals all song information is recorded on the tape including starts and track data information to allow or prevent copying etc Dynamic microphone A type of microphone that uses the same principle as an electrical generator It operates without a power source The most common types are quite durable and are widely used as vocal and instrument mics Effects Special processes that modify or enhance the sound in some way such as causing it to distort adding reverberation or delaying it etc Also used to refer to the device or processor that produces the effect Effect patch A state or settings that specifies an effect stored under a number or name By recalling an effect patch you can reproduce the state of the effect at any time Effect processor A device that adds an acoustical effect such as reverberation distortion or modulation The CDX 1 contains a built in effect processor This manual may refer to the effect processor simply as effect Error message A message that appears in the display when an incorrect operation has been performed or when data could not be p
326. s begins Set this when you want to loop from a location other than the Start point Length This is the length from the Start or Loop point to the End point where the sound stops By adjusting this you can skip an unintended silent portion at the end of a sample This also determines the length of the looped area when the sample is played back repeatedly p 73 Setting each point 1 Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice Alternatively press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt FAD FARAMETER bie oe aes ie ee Be eae TRIM The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons 2 Make sure that the cursor is located at the JEAD E Stee FAD PARAMETER Pad Parameter icon y E bikam TT FARAH OFTIM DIVIDE TRIM 3 Press YES ENTER The Pad Parameter screen appears 4 Press CURSOR to select the screen with the three items StartPoint LoopPoint and Length gt End EFM iiv7 i A Start Point ooo 0000 LoorF Point FT Lensth Ends 00009615 5 Use CURSOR Q V to move the cursor to the item you wish to set 6 Press the pad to play the sample you are editing and turn the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the setting 7 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 78 NEM e The location of the End point where the sound stops is determined indirectly by the Length the length from the Start point to the End point e Set the Loop mode Playing repeatedly
327. s 40 What you need to do to create your OWN CD s sssssssssssennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 42 Steps taken in producing an Original CD csiccccnccccnssscsccsceasssnscsssscensseassetcarsoesasscasessecsanss sesssancdsvesensees 42 Listenine tothedemo distispssscssigs disie a a Eaa aaa 45 Play me Medeno CISC sediar a E E AO sted avaaabaassb aes 45 Playing an udio CD iissatinisccintnninsietinereinininiviniiisiee 7 How to play an audio CD the CD Player ccssscceeseeeeeseeeeseeeeneeees 48 PR DOUE GNC Display ciestets socks cast tieatecunteatiecd axa sustani rsaaee Sota E A 48 ED PAY Ob STE nn E T NN 48 WATE MING UO TINS SPIA Y seara a A 48 Playing dand stoppino a SOM siecnissosipn iaa a aa ota aiei 49 Playing stoppinc arnaudi CD sisese E N 49 Changing the play back locatiotcsimiseasa nannan ae E aE AEE 50 Moving tothe previo s next lack caksassssnussasiisauceneassasaraevegiasiobandesaiioncadeedsasavateantcnaued oeandeietdatiocs 50 To g back to the beginning of an audio CD cserieiecraeien ia E 50 Rewind Tast OWAN es a 50 Repeatedly playing a specified region the Repeat function eseeseesseeseesecssesseeseossossoeseossessesses 51 Registering the repeak TOT ION seeng a a AEA 51 Canceino the repeal Tenio eroaa r NA 51 Changing the way in which audio CD volume is adjusted e oeoseeseessosseessessosseeseoseosseesesssessessses 52 Collecting audio material sssssss DD Recording a soun
328. s fixed at 100 Status Second Third 9nH mmH WH n MIDI Channel No mm Note No ll Velocity 00H 0FH ch 1 ch 16 00H 7FH 0 127 01H 7FH 1 127 00H NOTE OFF Program Change Works as bank switch in the MIDI channel number which is designated with Pads Rx Ch in the UTILITY MIDI Status Second CnH ppH n MIDI Channel No pp Program No 00H OFH ch 1 ch 16 00H 3FH 0 63 E System Common Messages MIDI Time Code Quarter Frame Messages MIDI Time Code Quarter Frame Messages can be transmitted while the CDX 1 is running Playing or Recording if the SONG parameter Sync Out is MTC Status Second F1H mmH Onnndddd 0 Frame count LS nibble 1 Frame count MS nibble 2 Seconds count LS nibble 3 Seconds count MS nibble 4 Minutes count LS nibble 5 Minutes count MS nibble 6 Hours count LS nibble 7 Hours count MS nibble dddd 4 bit nibble data 0H FH 0 15 nnn Message type If the upper and lower 4 bits of the count are combined these bit fields are assigned as follows Frame Count XXXVVYVV XXX Reserved 000 yyyyy Frame No 0 29 Seconds Count XXVVVVVY XX Reserved 00 yyyyyy Seconds Count 0 59 Minutes Count xxyyyyyy XX Reserved 00 yyyyyy Minutes Count 0 59 Hours Count XYVYZZZZZ x Reserved 0 yy Time Code type 0 24 Frames Sec 1 25 Frames Sec 2 30 Frames Sec Drop Frame 3 30 Frames Sec Non Drop Frame ZZZZZ Hours Count 0
329. s playing Press SEARCH KX to move to the beginning of the currently playing track Press SEARCH gt D to move to the previous track To go back to the beginning of an audio CD Press ZERO 44 to move to the beginning Track 1 of an audio CD Rewind fast forward E Rewind While you hold down REW 4 the song will rewind E Fast forward While you hold down FF PP the song will fast forward These operations can be used regardless of whether the song is playing or stopped 50 How to play an audio CD the CD Player Repeatedly playing a specified region the Repeat function You can specify a region that you wish to hear and hear it repeatedly Registering the repeat region 1 Use REW lt q FF PP to move to the location where you wish to begin repeating 2 Press REPEAT A lt gt B REPEAT A lt gt B will blink indicating that the current location has been registered as the repeat start point A Bere ZERO STOP PLAY JOJN CD RECORDER If you wish to re do the registration you can cancel the registered location by pressing REPEAT A 4 gt B when the current location is the same as the repeat start point A If the current location is beyond the repeat start point A press REPEAT A 4 gt B twice to cancel the registration 3 Use REW lt q FF PP to move to the location where you wish to stop repeating 4 Press REPEAT A4P gt B O REPEAT A 4 g
330. s which supports S P DIF TOC Short for Table of Contents This is the region on the CD R disc that handles information such as song times end times sequence and so on Although the songs on a disc and their playing time can be displayed when an audio CD is placed in a CD player this is because they can be read automatically from the TOC The TOC is recorded differently than music data with its main characteristic being disc access such as the ability to go to the start of any song instantly Track Multitrack recorders disk recorders and sequencers etc have multiple tracks on which the parts that make up a song can be independently recorded and managed Each track can record and play back audio or performance data in the case of a MIDI sequencer along a time axis The CDX 1 provides multitrack recorder tracks 1 8 and sequence tracks A D TRS type Tip Ring Sleeve plug A special type of quarter inch phone plug and jack that has three contacts Widely known from its use as a headphone plug Balanced connection Value The setting of a parameter gt Parameter Redo After using Undo to cancel a setting or operation you can use Redo to go back to the settings that were in effect before you used Undo Unbalanced connection A method of transmitting a signal using two electrical conductors Broadly used on electric instruments and consumer audio devices Balanced connection Undo A function that a
331. scteseunczshaneubiyiverceereatiecnccsseteaes 21 Top Pani el ca sicetvsscatactentccrssmasiienscaaascsabtedoniaesoucats cocpeiesasaetianeesacestsbsstneiecsbuacsoueavansaucistat aduiaabbet Adeauostentenonsan 21 Front Tane Esaoe o E AA E E 30 Rear Pane benenniioesni nap E 30 Basic operation of the CDX 1 as assnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 32 Connecting peripheral egquipme tissisasciainini ien neeaaea n anaa aa ana araa aaa anad 32 Turning the Power On and Off roisses n aiee e aaa aE a a 33 Turnor Onie POW eGL orar ann E A A AEA E R UR tar hanememacaunss 33 Tun ne ONET POWE orrena n S 34 Insenting removing a distiid iae aara a a SEa Ee asa a aaa a i 35 TS CE HIN ACIS Case a E E A a A a iar essa anna 35 RENOV DO Gl SC sas aces arate E T T sa A E E S 36 Switching among the Basic screens iisssisscscascandasnsascasoncaucsssaeronscnerdeausseeudsceendaptsacnsnsenscdoassstnaucduudsvaseaiens 37 TOE ASIC S E EN asta het a A E E 37 If you are confused about operations or screens Going back to the Basic screen 38 Adjusting the brightness of the screen display Contrast ccceeeceeseeseeseceecsseeeeesetaeeseens 38 SWwitchime te Bie Time Cis play aesa N E N 38 Viewing information on the CD RW disc Song Information screen ceceeeeereeeee 39 Naming a sone CDV GS arare aa a E N S A 39 Returning the CDX 1 to the factory settings Imitialize seeseoseossoeseossesseesecssosscsssossosseeseessessesse
332. select the MIDI em MID PARAMETER N The Pads Tx Ch parameter icon i Es T pedias the MIDI channel that ue will be used to control another MARE SO0HG 5V STE pI MIDI device when you press 3 Press YES ENTER the pads of the CDX 1 The MIDI settings screen appears 4 Make sure that the cursor is located at the IDI Pads Rx Ch line Pags Tx Ch as Pads Rx Cha WREHOLE Padls 45 00 22 5 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select a channel in the range of 1 16 MEMO Eight consecutive MIDI note If you select OFF samples cannot be played by any MIDI channel numbers are used according 6 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen o Mine pa nunne koa free to specify which note At the factory settings the pads correspond to MIDI note numbers numbers that number will be the first i e indicate keyboard locations as follows pad 1 see the following section EATA TESETEREA a C3 C 3 D3 D 3 E3 F3 F 3 EE Note 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 Changing the correspondence between pads and note numbers S 9 A P AIIN 18440 D S 4 O o E 5 1 Press UTILITY 2 Press CURSOR gt to select the MIDI icon and press YES ENTER The MIDI settings screen appears Press CURSOR to move the cursor to Rx Note Pad1 4 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to specify the note number 5 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Swi
333. sing the cord hook as shown in the illustration DC 12V 2 8A o e E Roland PSB 2U DAPTOR ONLY e Do not use identically numbered phone type and XLR type MIC jacks simultaneously e Please connect or disconnect the foot switch after you turn off the power 32 Basic operation of the CDX 1 Turning the Power On and Off Once the connections have been completed p 32 turn on power to your various devices in the order specified By turning on devices in the wrong order you risk causing malfunction and or damage to speakers and other devices Turning On the Power 1 2 3 Turn the volume of the connected equipment down to the minimum level Lower the MASTER fader to the lowest position Turn on the power of the equipment connected to the INPUT jacks Press the POWER switch to turn on the power of the CDX 1 After several seconds the CDX 1 will start up MARE normally and the post fader screen appears TEMPO d 20 DD IH 1232456785 LR Turn on the power of the equipment connected to the OUTPUT jack Raise the volume of the connected equipment to appropriate levels This unit is equipped with a protection circuit a brief interval a few seconds after power up is required before the unit will operate normally Be careful that the AC adaptor does not become disconnected during use If the AC adaptor is disconnected the recorded data may be destroyed The explanati
334. splayed as icon 3 PressCURSOR gt to select the System MFA ESTEN FARAH STERN icon TEMFO MARE 1 OHG Bey 4 Press YES ENTER The System settings screen appears I pad Q r O xe pad Qa i ped 0 02 5 Press CURSOR LU to move the cursor to SYSTEM PARAM eF i Di Time Dise TIME CODE Foot SW line F T Ww Augi CO Fader For details on Foot SW 6 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select SAMPLER TRIG parameter refer to step 6 of Using a foot switch to punch 7 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen in out p 122 When you press the foot switch the sample of the specified pad will sound Specifying the pad sample that will be played by the foot switch 1 Press PAD RECORDING TEMPO MATCH twice Alternatively press TEMPO MATCH and then press CURSOR gt The Pad Edit menu are displayed as icons FAD FARAMETER ot i AH Be eae TRIM 2 Press CURSOR _ gt to select the Bank Parameter icon 3 Press YES ENTER The pad bank parameter screen appears BANE PARAH Harme C Foot Switch PAD 4 Make sure that the cursor is located at the Bank line and use TIME V ALUE dial to witch to the pad bank for which you wish to make settings 5 Press CURSOR to move the cursor to Foot Switch PAD line 6 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select a pad number 1 8 7 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen
335. ss the Power Switch The message Shutdown appears in the HO aan display 7 Shutdown 3 If you are ready to turn off the power press YES ENTER The power will turn off Press NO EXIT shutdown will be canceled If the display asks You ll lose PAD SEQ data during shutdown Sure If any pad sequence is held in internal memory of CDX 1 when you carry out shutdown the massage You ll lose PAD SEQ data during shutdown Sure appears 1 If you are ready to turn off the power press YES ENTER The power will turn off Ifa CD RW disc ts inserted in CDX 1 a message Save SONG before shutdown appears In this case see following process of If the display asks Save SONG before shutdown Press NO EXIT shutdown will be canceled Ifthe display asks Save SONG before shutdown When the CD RW disc is inserted in CDX 1 the massage Save SONG before shutdown appears in the display 1 If you wish to save the song data press YES ENTER A message Processing appears and CDX 1 saves setting of SONG Parameter of Mixer effects etc in CD RW disc When saving is completed the power will turn off If you press NO EXIT power will be turned off without saving of data All the settings Mixer effects etc after inserting CD RW disc will be lost 34 MED Once you carry out turning off the power pad sequence held in internal memory of CDX 1 will be lost If
336. ssages the data handled by MIDI is transferred using the following three types of connector MIDI IN This connector receives MIDI messages from another MIDI device MIDI OUT This connector sends MIDI messages from the CDX 1 MIDI THRU MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN connector are re transmitted without change from this connector The CDX 1 provides a single connector that can be used either as MIDI OUT or MIDI THRU At the factory settings it functions as MIDI OUT You can change this setting as necessary Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon Use CURSOR gt to select the MIDI bei MIDI FARAMETER N icon 4 EE HARKE SOG Press YES ENTER The MIDI settings screen appears Press CURSOR to move the cursor to ya amp SSM Ot Out Thru line MTC Ture OU TAU Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select either OUT or THRU Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Using the CDX 1 with other MIDI devices Using MIDI to control the CDX 1 from another device The CDX 1 can be controlled in the following ways by MIDI messages from another MIDI device Play samples By sending MIDI note messages from a keyboard or drum pad to the CDX 1 you can play the eight samples of the selected pad bank To play the samples of the CDX 1 you can choose one MIDI channel from channels 1 16 1 Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon MEMO 2 Press CURSOR __ gt to
337. ssor effect on off Adjust this parameter as appropriate for the volume of the noise If the noise level is high a higher setting is appropriate If the noise level is low a lower setting is appropriate Adjust this value until the decay of the sound is as natural as possible Adjusts the time from when the noise suppressor begins to function until volume reaches 0 High settings for the Threshold parameter may result in there being no sound when you play with your instruments volume turned down The Modulation effect type can be selected from the following effects For details on each effect refer to Available types of modulation and their effect p 202 O FLANGER Flanger The flanger effect gives a twisting jet airplane like character to the sound O CHORUS Chorus A sound with a subtly shifted pitch is added to the direct sound making the final output sound thicker and broader O PHASER Phaser By adding varied phase portions the phaser effect gives a whooshing swirling character to the sound O P SHIFT Pitch Shifter This effect changes the pitch of the original sound up or down within a range of two octaves O DOUBL N Doubling An effect of multiple sounds heard together a doubling effect is produced O TRM PAN Tremolo Pan Tremolo is an effect that creates a cyclic change in volume Pan cyclically moves the stereo position between left and right when stereo output is used In case
338. st Shutdown Do you want to shutdown Song end The end of the song has been reached Stop recorder Please stop the recorder This is a blank disc Do you want to format This is a new disc Do you wish to format it This is nota MTR disc Insert a Destination disc This disc is not for MTR Please insert the correct backup destination disc This is nota MTR disc Insert a Source disc This disc is not an MTR disc Please insert the correct backup source disc This PAD contains data Cannot overwrite This pad already exists There is no data on the PADS in this Bank There is no pad in this bank Unknown disc This is an unknown type of disc Waiting trigger Waiting for input level to trigger recording Waiting for PAD to start Waiting for pad input to trigger recording Waiting play Waiting for sequence start to trigger recording Waiting eject Waiting for the disc to be ejected Waiting for PAD Waiting for pad input Write error An error occurred while writing Writing Now writing Please wait You ll lose MASTER TR Are you sure The master track data will be lost if you execute OK to execute You ll lose PAD SEQ data Go to MIXDOWN Mode Pad Sequence data will be lost if you move to Mixdown mode Is this OK You ll lose PAD SEQ data during Shutdown Sure Pad Sequence data will be lost if you shutdown OK to shutdown You
339. standby mode RECORD EXIT Status Data Bytes Status FOH 7FH Dev 06H 07H F7H Byte Description FOH Status of System Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header Dev Device ID 10H or 7FH 06H MMC Command Message 07H RECORD EXIT F7H EOX End of System Exclusive Message If the device ID on the message was as same as that of the receiving 10H or 7FH the CDX 1 exits from the record condition LOCATE MCP O Format 2 LOCATE TARGET Status Data Bytes Status FOH 7FH Dev 06H 44H 06H 01H hrH mnH scH frH ffH F7H Byte Description FOH Status of System Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header Dev Device ID 10H or 7FH 06H MMC Command Message 44H LOCATE MCP 06H Number of Bytes 01H TARGET sub command hrH mnH scH frH ffH Standard Time with Sub Frame F7H EOX End of System Exclusive Message If the device ID on the message was as same as that of the receiving 10H or 7FH the CDX 1 locates the specified time location received from the command 3 TRANSMITTED DATA E Channel Voice Message Note On Off Transmit the number velocity which is designated in the MIDI channel number 1 16 which is designated with Rhythm Ch in the UTILITY MIDI The MIDI Channel number specified in Pads Tx Ch in the UTILITY MIDI and the Note number specified in RxNote Pad1 are output In this case Velocity i
340. stopped 2 Modifying the pitch of a sample to create a new sample Pitch Change 00c000 3 Making fine adjustments to the location at which a sample starts ends c s0ecceeee 4 Adjusting the crossfade time sci scice cscenetecaex duasaceinannarceibeiteesic dee Ueteciccwed anes cussneneaiecanickesesiseeeycenss 6 Sequence Track Exchanging the contents of sequence tracks Exchange Track c sccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 Copying the contents of a sequence track Copy Track seceececeeeseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeaeas 8 Editing a specified region of a sequence track Region In Out ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 9 Multitrack Recorder Muting silencing A SPECIFIC audio trACK ccccceseeeceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeesaeeeessaeeeeeeas 13 Using STATUS to select the track whose parameters you want to adjust 14 Preventing tempo data from being read from a CD RW diSC cccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 15 Using the tempo of a sample to modify the tempo map ccccsseeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeens 16 Using Pads Sequences while YOU MIX GOWN ccccccccsseseeeeceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseessaaaseeeess 17 Effect Editing the Mastering Tool settings cccccssccceceeeeeeeceeeeeeceeeseeeesaeeeessaeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeeas 18 Saving the mastering tool settings cccccccccesseeececeeceeeeseceeeeceeeseeececeeeeeceeeeseaeseeeeeeeas 1
341. sveaeessueadscaoeabesseucceesucavexceseceeesanes 88 A o tth eseduence racks A ctasnststastviasdvsssesueseys 88 About the tempo tihe seguen En sis sactcs cals ahutosantapsinsassanatasvsdasauenmnatenetianraadilijoeaaacata aise bhues 88 Recording pad operations as you play pads Realtime Recording eeseesesssoesosseossosseessossossesses 90 IREAMEHG FOCOLG LING aE E O lineman voit Maatsaien aides 90 Recording while you listen to the playback of another sequence track eee 91 Recording while you listen to the playback of the audio tracks eee eeeeteeeens 91 Correcting timing inaccuracies while you record Quantize sessesesessesessesesresesesseseseeseses 92 Recording pad operations at the specified interval Step Recording eesseeseessossoeseeseossossesses 93 B tton functions Curing Step recording seuittie ete niasnata adic extern d tigen neato 93 DUE POCO LCIING iora a E T Siete sb tokelates deta heseareii eats 94 Addin dy Naimics WHE yost p F Onl o anae A 95 Playing a sedgnence trac RKeniirnecen aen E E E 96 Playing sequence tracks and audio tracks simultaneously eeseeeseeseessessoeseessoesosseossoesoeseoesessesses 97 Editing a seguence MaCKeaescnioara aa e E E E 98 Movie BINT SC NL OW Cc nas es aaa T a A A 98 Pasting a phrase at a different OCA ON Paste ssia a a T 99 CUTLIP a SOC UE soe a E 100 Brastine PM rases Era Cyna tab sSathnd satel daapatiastiae inet ace nauen tas Bich st baa ates eeteats nani sie
342. t B will light indicating that the current location has been registered as the repeat end point B There must be at least one second between repeat start REPEAT ZERO STOP point A and repeat end point G C B It is not possible to set the end point less than one second CD RECORDER If you wish to re do the registration press REPEAT A 4 gt B to cancel the registered location Then re register from the repeat start point A away from the start point 5 When you press PLAY P the region between the A and B points you registered will be played back repeatedly HINT Specifying the repeat region while the song plays You can specify the repeat region while the song is playing To do so use the following procedure to Press PLAY gt to play the song When you come to the point where you wish to begin repeating press REPEAT A 4 gt B REPEAT A 4 gt B will blink indicating that the repeat start point A has been registered When you come to the point where you wish to stop repeating press REPEAT A lt gt B REPEAT A lt gt B will light indicating that the repeat end point B has been registered When the end point B has been registered the region between the A and B points will be played back repeatedly Canceling the repeat region 1 When REPEAT A 4 gt PB is lit press REPEAT A 4 gt B REPEAT A lt gt B will go out The Repeat function will be defea
343. t which the sound begins As necessaty press TO or FROM to switch the region that will be played back repeatedly TO is convenient when you wish to set the current location to the beginning of a sound and FROM is convenient when you wish to set the current location to the end of a sound TO Repeatedly play from a point 45 milliseconds before the current location up to the current location FROM Repeatedly play from the current location up to a point 45 milliseconds after the current location When you have found the precise location at which the sound begins press SCRUB once again SCRUB will go out and Scrub Preview will be turned off NEM For an audio track you can press MARK to assign a marker at the current location so that it will be easy to find again gt Assigning a marker p 129 More functions for the CDX 1 Using the insert effects The CDX 1 comes with two onboard effects processors an insert effect and loop effects These two types can be used simultaneously and you can make settings for TTR 1 Using the loop effects each effect as desired p 145 What is an insert effect An insert effect is an effect that is applied directly to a specific signal line in the case What is a loop effect p 145 of the CDX 1 an input instrument or an audio track being played back The effect pedals that a guitarist connects between his guitar and amp are a type of insert
344. tch the pad bank The eight samples of the selected pad bank are the only the samples that can be played by MIDI note messages To switch the pad bank use program change messages Of the program numbers sent to the CDX 1 only 1 64 are valid These select pad banks 1 through 64 respectively Program numbers 65 128 will be ignored 153 Using the CDX 1 with other MIDI devices Synchronized playback with the CDX 1 as the master The CDX 1 can operate in synchronization with a MIDI sequencer Synchronization m can be accomplished using MTC MIDI Time Code MTC p 205 Master and slave MEMO When the CDX 1 plays in synchronization with a MIDI sequencer the device that For details on operation of transmits the time data is called the master The device that receives the time data your MIDI sequencer refer to transmitted by the reference device master and follows this data is called the slave a operating manual for your evice When playing in synchronization with a MIDI sequencer the CDX 1 can be used as the master transmitting device but not as the slave receiving device Also the MIDI sequencer must be set as the slave receiving device Using MTC master 1 Use a MIDI cable to connect the CDX 1 and your MIDI sequencer as shown in the diagram MIDI IN f MIDI OUT
345. tected The operation cannot be executed since the pad bank is protected Canceled The operation was canceled Can t execute Cannot execute this operation Can t insert to this point Cannot insert to this point Can t UNDO Undo is not possible Can t use PAD SEQ now Pad Sequence cannot be used CD ROM is not ready The CD ROM from which to load the WAVE file is not ready Checking disc Checking Now checking the disc Please wait Coaxial input locked Locked to digital input coaxial Coaxial input unlocked Could not lock to digital input coaxial Completed The operation has been completed Convert data Are you sure Do you want to convert the WAVE file DIMM error An error occurred while checking the DIMM Disc is not for audio This disc is not made for audio Disc full The disc is full Do you want to burn a CD Do you want to burn the CD Do you want to finalize a CD Do you want to finalize the CD R Do you want to initialize the disc The data will be initialized when you execute the format operation Do you want to execute Eject disc not saved Do you want to eject the disc without saving the song Finalize failed Failed to finalized the disc Format failed Failed to format the disc Initialize All param Are you sure OK to initialize all parameters Initialize Effects param Are you sure OK to init
346. ted and the repeat start A and end B points you registered will also be cleared 51 Ig j O D lt v 5 w z 2 O J How to play an audio CD the CD Player Changing the way in which audio CD volume is adjusted 52 At the factory settings the audio CD volume is set to be adjusted by the AUDIO CD fader AUDIO TRACK 7 8 fader and the MASTER fader If you wish to adjust the volume of audio CDs by using only the MASTER fader without using the AUDIO CD fader use the following procedure to change the setting Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon Press CURSOR gt to select the System icon Press YES ENTER The System settings screen appears Press CURSOR to move the cursor to STEM PARGh ver di 0i Audio CD Fader Timne Diser TIME COLE Foot Sb PLAY STOP Y Audio CO Fader OM Turn the TIME VALUE dial to select OFF Audio CD Fader This turns the audio CD fader on off for when an audio CD is played ON The audio CD fader AUDIO TRACK 7 8 fader and Master fader will be used OFF The volume will be adjusted only by the MASTER fader Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen NEM If you wish to play the pads while listening to an audio CD p 69 it is convenient to make settings so that the AUDIO CD fader AUDIO TRACK 7 8 fader adjusts the volume since this will allow you to adjust the pad volume and audio CD volume sepa
347. ted at the LCD Contrast icon Meni SCO CONTRAST e Om Co DISC LOAD ZAME Press YES ENTER The LCD Contrast Setting screen appears LCD CONTRAST CONTRAST Bey Turn the TIME VALUE dial to adjust the contrast Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Switching the Big Time display 38 The units indicated can be switched Measure Beat Tick or Hour Minute Second Frame Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon Press CURSOR gt to select the System icon TEMHFO HARE SOR aS TEM Press YES ENTER The System settings screen appears Press CURSOR Q L to move the cursor to Time Disp Turn the TIME V ALUE dial to select TIME CODE or MEASURE Time Disp TIME CODE Display Hour Minute Second Frame 00 07 07 24 MEASURE Display Measure Beat Tick 0214 04 08 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen MEMO Hold down UTILITY and turn the TIME VALUE dial the contrast of display will be changed Basic operation of the CDX 1 Viewing information on the CD RW disc Song Information screen You can view information about the CD RW disc song inserted in the CDX 1 WO pad D e O 4 gt 3 pad a 5 pr D O Q O gt lt 1 Press DISPLAY to switch among the Basic screen The Information screen appears Remaining capacity for editing different from remaining IMFORK
348. the copyright holder is prohibited by law Additionally this data must not be copied nor used in a secondary copyrighted work without the permission of the copyright holder e DO NOT play the demo disc on a conventional audio CD player The resulting sound may be of a level that could cause permanent hearing loss Damage to speakers or other system components may result HINT You can play rhythm guide according to demo song If you switch the PATTERN of tempo map you can play various rhythm patterns that matches the song gt Using the rhythm guide p 116 MEM Using marker stop function p 131 the play back from demo CD stops at the end of first song Press PLAY P to do play back of next song Adjusting the overall volume balance Master Balance p 132 45 P lt D pad ca lt e Oo 0 Op 0 peau NOA PYM What you need to do to create your own CD Adjusting the volume of each audio track AUDIO TRACK faders The volume of audio tracks 1 8 is adjusted with the AUDIO TRACK faders 1 8 Tf the STATUS of an audio track is extinguished no sound will be heard regardless of the position of the AUDIO TRACK fader To play back the track press STATUS enough times to get it to light in green Press pads to play back audio samples O G i GY Gx oe
349. the sounds you are playing and will not record the sound of the audio tracks that are playing back HINT Overdubbing tip When you record new material while listening to a recorded performance your playing may tend to be buried in the existing performances making it difficult for you to play In such cases you can slightly lower the faders of the audio tracks that are playing or pan the playback tracks to the left or right and your own new performance to the right or left to make it easier to distinguish your own playing Nore If at this time you select an audio track that has already been recorded the new performance will be overwritten onto the previously recorded performance replacing it 2 For the audio tracks that you wish to play back press STATUS to get them to light in green Setting the left right position pan of each audio track p 132 Setting the left right position pan of the input sound p 113 Recording playing back a performance Combining the performances of multiple audio tracks Bounce Recording Depending on the number of instruments that you wish to record eight audio tracks may not be sufficient In such cases you can combine performances that were recorded on multiple audio tracks and re record them onto another track This process is called bounce recording By combining multiple performances in this way you can free up other audio tracks in order to re
350. the left right position pan of the input sound oo cece eerste tsetse eteeeeeeeetees 113 Toning an instrument Pan ei ece E E 114 Aduse De TUNIS ath cease pice nese estat N Pele ales incall ane enna 114 Setin The Telerence PItelrOl TNE LUMEN iseis aa a T 115 Usine the rhythm otide sinoni E a a a aaeain 116 Playing stoppi Thiet yuh ode aripa a T ated aanisaacatan ies 116 Adj stingthe Volume of the Rhy thin Guid i sice ss atnishaen eh ae 116 Chan eine etines nature saesae RTO 116 Chane gtean alee gyi nI PAO e E TE E O aan iee nay arma rE SS 117 Chano ne ETEND Oae a A 117 Setting the tempo and rhythm pattern of the song Tempo Map sssesessesesessererserrrsrrererse 117 Deletie a tempo Map aen a obumnabags taatuabsoketenias ata acebatens 118 Playing the rhythm guide according to the tempo map essesessssssssesssessssesesesensssesesesesesses 118 Recording playing back a performance sssesesssseseeeeeeeeeneneenenes 119 Recording a Performan eainiie a coaseitedee canta cactaaassseatvons 119 Select The audi0 mack for recording erea a A 119 KECO dusain E A A ES 120 Re recording only a mistake Punch in 0ut seeseeseesseeseessossossseseossesseoseoeseosesssessesssessessesesessessses 121 Usine the Record putton to punch in OU Ea at ccuaseta ee ANT 121 Usine a footswitch tO punch In Out neal ete cellbawteuesiceeantanasecednaulss 122 Automatically punching in out at a specified location Auto Punch in out 122 Recording an
351. the other hand a lower sample rate will allow longer recording playback with the same memory capacity tape length disk size SECAM format PAL format Color television formats used in Europe etc Tapes recorded in SECAM format or PAL format cannot be played on a NTSC format video deck NTSC format Send Return type effect gt Loop effect Slave When two or more devices are operated in synchronization one device the master transmits tempo or time data and the other devices the slaves receive this data and follow it Sync Synchronization These terms refer to linking the time progression of two or more recorders sequencers video devices or rhythm machines One of the devices must be set to be the master and will transmit synchronization data The remaining devices slaves will receive this data and will align their own time accordingly gt MIDI time code gt MIDI clock SMPTE time code A signal format defined by the Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers United States for the purpose of synchronizing multiple video audio devices The time location is expressed as hours minutes seconds frames and is widely used on professional equipment to manage absolute time S P DIF S P DIF stands for Sony Philips Digital Interface Format This is a specifications for transmitting and receiving stereo digital audio signals between digital audio devices The CDX 1 provides coaxial and optical connector
352. the power p 34 Then remove the memory as described in Removing the memory p 16 If any pad sequence is held in internal memory of CDX 1 when you carry out DIMM diagnosis the massage You ll lose PAD SEQ by diagnosis Sure appears If you are ready to execute the check press YES ENTER Press NO EXIT DIMM diagnosis will be canceled Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen NEM Diagnosis means that the DIMM has not been diagnosed Even if the memory has been diagnosed the result of diagnosis will be lost when the power is off and Diagnosis appears when you turn the power on next time Ore If the internal memory of the CDX 1 already contains pad sequence it will be lost when this procedure is performed If you wish to keep the pad sequence you must save it on a CD RW disc gt Saving Pad Sequence p 67 17 F x 2 Ko gt D 3 D 3 Sal SS Learning about CD R RW discs What is a CD R RW disc The CDX 1 lets you record your performances on a CD RW disc and finally use a CD R disc to create an original audio CD First here s some basic information on CD R discs and CD RW discs What is a CD R disc CD R Compact Disc Recordable is a CD to which data can be written Data can be written only once to a CD R disc It is not possible to erase or move the data that has been written However you make up to 99 a
353. the treble equalizer Level Output Level 20 20 dB This parameter adjusts the volume after the equalizer stage 192 Insert effect algorithm list NS Noise Suppressor This effect reduces the noise and hum Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the noise suppressor effect on off Threshold Threshold 0 100 Adjust this parameter as appropriate for the volume of the noise If the noise level is high a higher setting is appropriate If the noise level is low a lower setting is appropriate Adjust this value until the decay of the sound is as natural as possible Release Release 0 100 Adjusts the time from when the noise suppressor begins to function until volume reaches 0 High settings for the Threshold parameter may result in there being no sound when you play with your instruments volume turned down DLY Delay This creates a thicker sound by applying a delayed sound to the direct sound Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the delay effect on off Effect Type Type SINGLE This is a simple delay TAP The delayed sound is panned across the left and right channels This will be effective when stereo output is used Delay Time Delay Time SINGLE 1 1400 mS This parameter adjusts the delay time i e the interval for which sound is delayed TAP 1 700 mS Feedback Feedback 0 100 This parameter adjusts the amount of feedback Changing the amount of feedback causes
354. the volume in the High frequency band after passing through the expander and compressor LMT Limiter Prevents distortion by suppressing signals at High levels Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON Threshold Threshold 24 0 dB Attack Attack 0 100 ms Release Release 50 5000 ms This parameter turns the limiter effects on off This parameter sets the volume at which the limiter starts working This parameter sets the time until when the limiter starts working after the input level has exceeded threshold level This parameter sets the time until when the limiter stops working after the input level drops below the threshold level OUT Output Provides settings concerning overall output Level Level 80 6 dB Soft Clip Soft Clip OFF ON Dither Dither OFF 8 24 bit ar This parameter sets the overall volume after passing through the limiter By turning this ON suppresses conspicuous distortion that may occur when the effect of compressor limiter has been applied excessively This parameter smooths the transition where the sound disappears 1 If Low Type or High Type is set to SHELV Shelving Type the setting for Lo Q or High Q is invalid 2 With Compressor COMP the level is automatically adjusted to the optimal with the settings for Threshold and Ratio Setting Attack to a relatively long time may cause distortion For this reason a margin of 6 dB
355. thm Ch Pads Rx Channel Pads Rx Ch Pads Note Number RxNote Pad1 Pads Tx Channel Pads Tx Ch MMC Mode MMC Mode Sync Out Sync Out MTC Type MTC Type Out Thru Select Out Thru E CD RW Disc Format Parameter Parameter name Display Data Type Data Type Format Type Format Type E Marker Parameter Parameter name Display Marker Number No Marker Name Name Marker Location Loc Initial Value OFF 1 48 C3 OFF OFF OFF 30 OUT Initial Value STANDARD STANDARD Initial Value 1 The settable range for Mark Location will change slightly on the MTC Type MIDI parameter E Temp Map Parameter Parameter name Display Measure MEAS Tempo TEMPO Beat BEAT Pattern PATTERN The settable range for Pattern will change depending on the Beat E Effects Location Parameter Parameter name Display Insert Mode Insert Mode E Mastering Tools Parameter Parameter name Display Mastering Toll Patch MTK Patch Input Level Input Level E Master Parameter Parameter name Display Master Balance Balance Initial Value 1 120 00 4 4 Rock 1 Initial Value INPUT NORMAL Initial Value Mixdown 0 dB Initial Value 0 Value OFF 1 16 OFF 1 16 0 C 120 C9 OFF 1 16 OFF MASTER SLAVE OFF MTC 30 29N 29D 25 24 OUT THRU Value STANDARD LONG1 LONG2 STANDARD FULL Value 1 100 8 characters 00 00 00 00 23 59 59 Value 1 9999 20 00 250 00 1 1 8 1 1 2 8 2 1 4 8 4
356. ting with a digital audio device p 148 Connect the digital in jack of the CDX 1 to the digital out jack of your external MD recorder Make sure that the type of jack is correct e g Optical Conection MD Recorder Ebel Digital Out Digital In A OU SWITCH COAXIAL our n MASTER OPTICAL GND COLD SLEEVE RING Corporation ADE IN JAPAN M Insert an unused CD R disc or a CD R disc that has been written by the CDX 1 When insert an CD R disc written audio data CD player screen appears When insert an unused CD R disc CD recording screen step 3 appears You cannot record on a CD R disc that has been finalized Press CD RECORDER EE I CD recording screen appears CO RECORDER REMAIN 74 40 me oOo CD RECORDER EJ J will blink recording standby mode PTE ieee L OE Press INPUT SELECT DIGITAL Turn the INPUT REC LEVEL knob to adjust the level so that level meter moves as far as possible without exceeding the dotted line in the upper portion If INPUT REC LEVEL knob is set at cm in case of Digital In input level will be 0 dB MIN MAX Ready a MD mini disk into your external MD recorder for immediate play Press PLAY gt to begin recording and then start playback on your external MD recorder To stop recording press STOP W If you wish to finalize the CD R that you recorded use the procedure described in
357. tion and turn the TIME VALUE dial to input characters 6 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 39 Basic operation of the CDX 1 Returning the CDX 1 to the factory settings Initialize 40 The current settings of the CDX 1 can be returned initialized to the factory settings The following parameters can be initialized For details on each parameter and its default value refer to Global Parameter Parameter list p 208 e Tuner parameters e System parameters e MIDI parameters e Marker parameters e Tempo map parameters Effect patch data All user patches U001 U100 Mixer parameters PAN EQ DELAY REVERB Effects location Master balance Here we will describe the procedure for initializing the Global parameters Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon MEMO To initialize other parameters Press CURSOR gt to select an bei INITIALIZE select the icon for the ope yes i parameters you wish to AEON pa initialize in step 3 For the HIDI TUHER Falor meaning of the Initialize icons refer to the separate column Press YES ENTER The meaning of each Initialize The Initialize Menu are displayed as icon appears icon p 41 Make sure that the cursor is located at the A aN SLOEAL Initialize Global Parameters icon Press YES ENTER The display will ask Initialize Global Param Are you sure When you wish to initialize press the YES ENTER
358. to adjust the input sensitivity so that there is no difference in volume between the two 4 After you have adjusted the input sensitivity turn the TIME VALUE dial to move to a location immediately before the area you wish to re record 5 Press PLAY to play back the audio track 6 At the moment you wish to begin recording press REC Hi Punch in will occur and recording will begin During recording you can press REC R to alternately punch in and punch out If there are other locations that you wish to re record repeat this procedure 7 When you are finished recording press STOP ff to stop the playback A message of Keep take NO YES Do you wish to save the take on CD RW disc appears MEMO If you wish to save the take press YES ENTER Youcamuce he Undo metava sical If you press NO EXIT saving to CD RW discs will be cancelled p 138 to revert to the condition before re recording 8 Listen to the re recorded results Return to a location immediately before the re recorded area and play back 121 Recording playing back a performance Using a foot switch to punch in out If you are playing an instrument at the same time that you operate the controls of the recorder it will be difficult for you to perform punch in out operations using the REC El button In such cases it is more convenient to press a separately sold foot switch such as the DP 2 or BOSS FS 5U instead of p
359. to the registration locations For details on adjusting the input sensitivity of an input source refer to Adjusting the input sensitivity p 113 NEM Even after auto punch in out has been turned off you can press AUTO PUNCH IN or OUT to move instantly to those specified locations 123 J D O oQ OD Xo o 3 D lt 3 a o jab Q jab Recording playing back a performance Recording an additional performance while listening to an existing performance Overdubbing The process of listening to a previously recorded performance while you record additional material on another audio track is called overdubbing If you record drums bass guitar keyboard guitar and vocal parts on separate audio tracks you can then adjust the volume balance between instruments and set the left right position pan Select the audio track to record 1 For the audio track that you wish to record press STATUS to get it to blink in red With these settings you are ready to record while listening to the performances of the audio tracks you selected for playback Recording while you listen to the playback 124 Record using the same procedure as in Recording a performance p 119 If you wish to adjust the volume of the audio tracks that are playing adjust the appropriate AUDIO TRACK fader At this time the audio track selected as the recording destination will record only
360. ton e Fxtinguished Sound will not be output i e muted e Litin green The track is ready for playback Blinking in red The track is selected as a recording destination e Lit in red The track is now being recorded AUDIO TRACK faders These adjust the volume of each audio track TRACK EDIT section PAN button EQ button EQ TRACK EDIT S G PAN Button This displays a screen where you can set pan left right positioning of the sound for each audio track gt Setting the left right position pan of an input sound p 113 Setting the left right position of each audio track p 132 EQ Equalizer Button This accesses a screen where you can make equalizer settings to modify the tone of each audio track gt Adjusting the tone of each audio track Equalizer p 132 RHYTHM GUIDE section Here you can make settings for the Rhythm Guide function gt Using the rhythm guide p 116 ON OFF button PATTERN TEMPO button PATTERN ON OFF TEMPO RHYTHM GUIDE ON OFF button Pressed to cycle the Rhythm Guide function through the available selections Auto gt On Off PATTERN TEMPO button This accesses a screen where you can set the rhythm pattern and tempo 23 S Oo J D n O 1 5 n Panel Descriptions DISPLA
361. tops working after the input level has dropped below the High threshold level 21 Mastering Tools parameter list COMP Compressor 2 Compressor the entire output signals when the input volume exceeds a specified value Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON Low Threshold Low Threshold 24 0 dB Mid Threshold Middle Threshold 24 0 dB Hi Threshold High Threshold 24 0 dB Low Ratio Low Ratio 1 1 0 1 16 0 1 INF Mid Ratio Middle Ratio 1 1 0 1 16 0 1 INF High Ratio High Ratio 1 1 0 1 16 0 1 INF Low Attack Low Attack 0 100 ms Mid Attack Middle Attack 0 100 ms High Attack High Attack 0 100 ms Low Release Low Release 50 5000 ms Mid Release Middle Release 50 5000 ms High Release High Release 50 5000 ms This parameter turns the compressor effects on off This parameter sets the volume at which the compressor for the low frequency band starts working This parameter sets the volume at which the compressor for the middle frequency band starts working This parameter sets the volume at which the compressor for the high frequency band starts working This parameter sets the ratio at which the output in the low frequency band is Suppressed when the input level has exceeded the low threshold level This parameter sets the ratio at which the output in the middle frequency band is Suppressed when the input level has exceeded the middle threshold level This parameter sets the ratio at which the outp
362. tortion and tone of the guitar sound Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON Turns the preamp effect on off Amp Type Amp Type 1 Refer to the column on page 187 Selects the type of the guitar amplifier that will be modeled Volume Volume 0 100 Adjusts the volume and distortion of the amp Bass Bass 0 100 Adjusts the tone for the low frequency range Middle Middle 2 0 100 Adjusts the tone for the middle frequency range Treble Treble 0 100 Adjusts the tone for the high frequency range Presence Presence 3 0 100 Adjusts the tone for the ultra high frequency range Master Master 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the entire preamp Bright Bright 4 OFF ON Turns the bright setting on off Bright is switched on to create a lighter and crisper tone Gain Gain 5 LOW MIDDLE HIGH Adjusts the distortion of the amp Distortion will successively increase for settings of LOW MIDDLE and HIGH 1 When all Bass Middle and Treble are set to O no sound may be produced depending on the Amp Type setting NOTE 2 If you have selected MATCH as the type the middle control will have no effect 3 If you have selected MATCH or VO DRV as the type raising presence will cut the high range the value will change from 0 to 100 4 Depending on the Amp Type setting this may not be displayed 5 successively increase for settings of LOW MIDDLE and set to MIDDLE
363. transport switch REC was pressed while recording the CDX 1 transmits as the device ID 7FH If the time locate is operated effectively the CDX 1 transmits as the device ID 7FH LOCATE MCP O MIDI Machine Control Commands O Format 2 LOCATE TARGET Status Data Bytes Status Status Data Bytes Status FOH 7FH Dev 06H aaH bb F7H FOH 7FH Dev 06H 44H 06H 01H hrH mnH scH frH ffH F7H Byte Description Byte Description FOH Status of System Exclusive Message FOH Status of System Exclusive Message 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header 7FH Universal System Exclusive Message Realtime Header Dev Device ID Dev Device ID 06H MMC Command Message 06H MMC Command Message aaH Command 44H LOCATE MCP 06H Number of Bytes bbH Command 01H TARGET sub command F7H EOX End of System Exclusive Message hrH mnH scH frH ffH Standard Time with Sub Frame F7H EOX End of System Exclusive Message See 4 MIDI Machine Control section If the time locate is operated effectively the CDX 1 transmits as the device ID 7FH 214 MIDI Implementation 5 Appendices MIDI Machine Control MMC Command Decimal and Hexadecimal table Commands Recognized Hexadecimal number is shown with H Command Achan In MIDI documentation data values and addresses sizes of system exclusive messages etc OU roe STOR 02H PLAY PLAY are expressed as hexadecimal values for each 7 bits The following table
364. ts orientation and try again 14 MEMO If you add 128 MB of separately sold memory the standard 32 MB of memory will no longer be used A In case of expanding memory other than 128 MB of memory turn on the power a message Wrong DIMM Type Turn off the power and replace w correct one appears and At this time the CDX 1 will not operate normally Expanding the memory How to expand the memory 1 Turn off the power to the CDX 1 and any connected equipment and then disconnect all cables attached to the CDX 1 2 Turn the CDX 1 upside down and remove the expanding memory cover NOTE When turning the unit upside down get a bunch of the expanding memory cover newspapers or magazines and place them under the four O screws to be removed two Q corners or at both ends to prevent damage to the buttons and controls Also you should try to orient the unit so no buttons or controls get damaged 3 Press outward the white clips at either end of the socket should be in the downward position 4 Paying attention to the location of the tch on th dule and th notch on the memory module and the HINT orientation insert it vertically within the ps guides at either side of the socket Hr rout ners iiaa pete the memory module try tilting it a bit and inserting one end at a time 5 Move the white clips upward and press them until the memory module is locked in place 6 Return the C
365. ts the time from when the noise suppressor begins to function until volume reaches 0 High settings for the Threshold parameter may result in there being no sound when you play with your instruments volume turned down 180 Insert effect algorithm list DLY Delay This creates a thicker sound by applying a delayed sound to the direct sound Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the delay effect on off Delay Time Delay Time SINGLE 1 1400 mS This parameter adjusts the delay time i e the interval for which sound is delayed TAP 1 700 mS Feedback Feedback 0 100 This parameter adjusts the amount of feedback Changing the amount of feedback causes the number of time the delayed sound is repeated to change as well Effect Level Effect Level 0 120 This adjusts the volume of the delay sound E GUITAR Parameter full name Setting Function COMP Compressor Compressor the entire output signals when the input volume exceeds a specified value For details on the parameters refer to COMP on the preceding page P AMP Preamp Adjust the distortion and tone of the guitar sound Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the preamp effect on off Amp Type Amp Type 1 Refer to the column on page 187 Selects the type of the guitar amplifier that will be modeled Volume Volume 0 100 Adjusts the volume and distortion of the amp Bass Bass 0 100 Adjusts the tone for the lo
366. uently will fade in and begin sounding gt Crossfading the pads you play Pad Crossfade p 71 AUDIO SAMPLE PADS FROM INPUTS TRACKS CD 3 1 8 button PAD BANKS Button This displays a list of the 64 pad banks gt Switching pad banks p 54 24 Panel Descriptions STATUS Button The color of the button will indicate the current status Lit in green Play back samples and the sequence track Litinred Record to the pads or sequence track In order to play back a sequence track turn PAD SEQUENCING SEQ PLAY on lit CLIPBOARD Button Use this when you want to copy a sample from one pad to another gt Copying a sample to another pad Clipboard p 82 PAD SEQ LEVEL fader This adjusts the volume of the pad samples and sequence PAD REC pad recording button This button starts ends sampling gt Sampling to a pad p 56 TEMPO MATCH PAD EDIT button Pressed to toggle between the Tempo Match setting screen and the Sample Edit screen DELETE button This button deletes the sample of a pad gt Deleting samples individually p 65 SEQ PLAY sequence play button Turns the Sequencing function on off Turn this on lit when you wish to edit or play a sequence track CREATE Button Use this when you wish to create a sequence i e to record a sequence of pads gt R
367. uick Edit refer to Edit on Sequence Play List screen Quick Edit Owner s Manual p 106 MEMO If a region has already been specified in step 4 press CURSOR VU to select SET REGION IN nz oH oo Press YES ENTER in step 5 the specified region will be cancelled and the In point will be newly set Editing a specified region of a sequence track Canceling an editing region To cancel an editing region that you ve specified perform the following 1 Press PAD SEQUENCING SEQ PLAY SEQ PLAY lights and the Sequence Play SEG PLAY LIST eee ieee List screen appears Tr sale tS 2 Press YES ENTER A mini menu appears 3 Press CURSOR to select the CLEAR REGION Tr 3 EL E Az ae ECD 4 Press YES ENTER The specified region are canceled Editing the specified region Erasing Segments Erase This operation erases the phrases of the specified region creating silence If phrases exist following the region they will not move forward 1 Specify the region that you want to erase SEG FLAY LISTET TET as described in Specifying the editing te SEL region p 9 of this booklet 2 Press YES ENTER A mini menu appears 3 Press CURSOR L to select the REGION ERASE TrSEL a8 PERE E sa See CUT 7 ee REGION MOVE 4 ik 4 Press YES ENTER The specified region are erased SS ero 10 Editing a specifie
368. uiinrissi itini a 78 DSCNS GACH PON IU sivsssacashtons E E R A askedammeynseeanaseaaunienass 78 Automatically removing Empty Portion at the Beginnings and Ends of Samples 79 Expanding and Compressing a sample to modify the length or tempo ccsscsssessseesseeoees 80 Matching the tempo to another sample Tempo Match cccccceceessessesssceesseeseessesseeseens 80 Expanding compressing by a specified percentage or tempo Time Stretch 81 Copying a sample to another pad Clipboatrd sesseseoesoeseoseossessesssossesssessoeseeseossesseossessossesssessessess 82 Splitting a sample among several pads Divide Sample sssscsssccsecssccssecsssessesssssesssesseees 83 Specifying a division point and dividing a sample in two ou eee ee eee eseee cee eseeeeeeseteeeaeens 83 Automatically dividing a sample at silent POrtions ccccceccseeeseeeeeesseseseesseessesseseeeseens 84 Dividing a sample at the timing that you press a DUttON cece eee cseeteeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeees 85 Creating a reverse tape style sample Create Reversal eeseesseeseessesseeseeseosseeseoseossessesssessessess 86 Boosting the sample level as high as possible NormaliZe sscsssssssscssscsseecsesssssesseseseseoess 87 Arranging audio samples to create a SONGQ SEqQUENCE ceeesee 88 What isaseguence 2 ses ceiccicheccahcecetece saccades tascscoaeccoeesnesuscesaaescucecenchesnuas
369. ut in the High frequency band is suppressed when the input level has exceeded the High threshold level This parameter sets the time until when the low frequency band compressor starts working after the input level has exceeded the low threshold level This parameter sets the time until when the middle frequency band compressor starts working after the input level has exceeded the middle threshold level This parameter sets the time until when the High frequency band compressor starts working after the input level has exceeded the High threshold level This parameter sets the time until when the low frequency band compressor stops working after the input level has dropped below the low threshold level This parameter sets the time until when the middle frequency band compressor stops working after the input level has dropped below the middle threshold level This parameter sets the time until when the High frequency band compressor stops working after the input level has dropped below the High threshold level MIX Mixer Adjust the volume of the low mid and high frequency ranges and mix them Low Level Low Level 80 6 dB Mid Level Middle Level 80 6 dB High Level High Level 80 6 dB This parameter sets the volume in the low frequency band after passing through the expander and compressor This parameter sets the middle frequency band volume after passing through the expander and compressor This parameter sets
370. varied phase portions the phaser effect gives a whooshing swirling character to the sound Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the phaser effect on off Rate Rate 0 100 This sets the rate of the Phaser effect Depth Depth 0 100 Determines the depth of the Phaser effect Manual Manual 0 100 Adjusts the center frequency of the phaser effect Resonance Resonance 0 100 Determines the amount of resonance feedback Increasing the value will emphasize the effect creating a more unusual sound Setting it to a minus value will create resonance having a reversed phase PS P SHIFT Pitch Shifter This effect changes the pitch of the original sound up or down within a range of two octaves Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the pitch shifter effect on off Pitch Pitch 24 DETUNE 24 Adjusts the amount of pitch shift the amount of pitch change in semitone steps By selecting DETUNE you can add a slightly pitch shifted sound to the input sound producing a detune effect D E Balance Effect Balance 100 0 0 100 This adjusts the volume balance of the direct and effect sounds Separation Separation 100 100 Adjusts the diffusion The panning of the direct sound and effect sound can be spread to left and right Effective when stereo output is used DBL DOUBL N Doubling An effect of multiple sounds heard together a doubling effect is produced Effect On Off
371. ver handle the AC adaptor or its plugs with q wet hands when plugging into or unplugging W from an outlet or this unit e Before moving the unit disconnect the AC adaptor and all cords coming from external devices e Before cleaning the unit turn off the power and unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet p 34 e Ifthe power plug is damaged or if the plug is loose when plugged into the outlet do not use the S AC power adapter Doing so could cause electric shock short circuit or fire e Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area disconnect the AC adaptor from the outlet e Install only the specified memory DIMM board Remove only the specified screws p 14 e Should you remove ground screws and screws fastening the expanding memory cover make sure to put them in a safe place out of children s reach so there is no chance of them being swallowed accidentally Contents IMPOR WANT INO VES seica 9 TaLegete les 0 g eh ee se ee eae ee ee eae aioe fa BCTOFS VOU DCG IMs riis iaaa aaa 12 Check the Contents Of NG pack ae sass euseenssatcvoskeahcescatannnsiaa aiaa aa eao a Tai iai 12 Main features Of the CDX leeri secs enserssahonsavonsacasaucosssnaedseccdesssancetunsstevoussoaCesaceaes 12 Expanding the Memory ornica gies necevesatnccesanannscs 14 Precautions 1OP Gx pancin amp Memor cadheativs mene ncaeneia A 14 Howto expand e memory ayci E E E oda aanstcaussusdessavedesavaas
372. vocal on audio track 1 and the guitar on audio track 2 The process of recording parts on separate audio tracks is called multitrack recording Preparing a CD RW disc for use Format Nore You must use high speed compatible CD RW discs MEE When performing multitrack recording you must use high speed compatible CD RW discs that bear this logo It is not possible to perform multitrack recording using a CD R disc or CD RW disc not compatible with high speed write It is not possible to format either If you wish to use a new CD RW disc you must prepare that CD RW disc for use by the CDX 1 This process is called formatting Preparing a new CD RW disc for use 110 1 Insert a new CD RW disc as described in Inserting a disc p 35 A message of This is blank disc Do you wont to format appears in the screen If you wish to format the disc press YES ENTER The CD RW Format screen appears If you press NO EXIT format will be canceled CI RH FORMAT Format Tare SEEMA STAHDARD Data TYF Make sure that the cursor is locates at the Format Type line Turn the TIME V ALUE dial to select the format type Format Type FULL The entire data area of the disc will be physically erased to make it completely blank This will increase the reliability of a disc that has been previously used by another device Normally you should select this Approximately 20 minutes will be required
373. w a message of Completed 5 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 67 Recording a sound to a pad Sampling Loading Pad Sequence from a CD RW disc 68 To load Pad Sequence saved in CD RW disc carry out the following process 1 Press UTILITY The Menu are displayed as icon Press CURSOR __ gt to select the Load PAD SEQ icon Press YES ENTER A message of Load PAD SEQ data appears Press YES ENTER The display will indicate Loading PAD SEQ and the data will be loaded When loading is completed the display will show a message of Completed and the Basic screen will reappear If the display asks Load PAD SEQ data If you insert a CD RW disc containing Pad Sequence when internal memory contains Pad Sequence a message of Load PAD SEQ data will be displayed In this case use the following procedure E Use the Pad Sequence that are stored in internal memory In response to the Load PAD SEQ data message press NO EXIT The Pad Sequence stored in internal memory will continue to be available E Use the Pad Sequence from the CD RW disc In response to the Load PAD SEQ data message press YES ENTER The Pad Sequence from the CD RW disc will be assigned to the pads At this time the Pad Sequence stored in internal memory will be replaced This means that the sample that was previously in internal memory will be lost If necessary save the
374. w frequency range Middle Middle 2 0 100 Adjusts the tone for the middle frequency range Treble Treble 0 100 Adjusts the tone for the high frequency range Presence Presence 3 0 100 Adjusts the tone for the ultra high frequency range Master Master 0 100 Adjusts the volume of the entire preamp Bright Bright 4 OFF ON Turns the bright setting on off Bright is switched on to create a lighter and crisper tone Gain Gain 5 LOW MIDDLE HIGH Adjusts the distortion of the amp Distortion will successively increase for settings of LOW MIDDLE and HIGH NONE 1 When all Bass Middle and Treble are set to 0 no sound may be produced depending on the Amp Type setting 2 If you have selected MATCH as the type the middle control will have no effect 3 If you have selected MATCH or VO DRV as the type raising presence will cut the high range the value will change from 0 to 100 4 Depending on the Amp Type setting this may not be displayed 5 successively increase for settings of LOW MIDDLE and set to MIDDLE So normally set it to MIDDLE SP Speaker modeling This models the characteristics of various types of speakers Effect On Off Effect On Off OFF ON This parameter turns the speaker modeling effect on off Speaker Type Speaker Type Refer to the column on page 187 Selects the type of speaker that will be modeled Mic Setting M
375. when you wish to try various effects after recording the direct AUDIO TRACK sound i e the sound not processed by the PLAY effect or when you wish to apply an effect to a specific audio track e MASTER Use this setting when you wish to adjust the AUDIO TRACK 1 PLAY AUDIO TRACK 2 PLAY AUDIO TRACK 8 PLAY PAD 1 PLAY PAD 2 PLAY PAD 8 PLAY tone during mixdown or when you wish to apply an effect to the entire sound such as during resampling p 63 5 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen 144 NEM By default the insert effect is inserted immediately after the input source INPUT NORMAL Ore Input level is always same regardless to the position of REC LEVEL knob in case of INPUT REC DRY is selected yore It is not possible to apply the insert effect to the sound played by the pads More functions for the CDX 1 Using the loop effects What is a loop effect The method of sending a signal from a mixer to an effect the send and then returning the output of the effect back to the mixer the return is called loop effect When a loop effect is used its output is generally mixed with the original sound The mixer section of the CDX 1 provides chorus delay doubling and reverb as loop effects By using these you can add spaciousness to the sound Since the send level is independent for each au
376. y copyright law Please refer to the owner s manual for details Optical input locked Locked to digital input optical Optical input unlocked Unable to lock to digital input optical Optimize failed Failed to optimize Overwrite Overwrite OK The specified pad already contains a sample which will be lost if overwritten Do you want to overwrite anyway PAD SEQ does not exist There is no pad sequence data PADs are Full Use next bank The pads of the bank are full Do you want to use the next bank Patch write failed Was not able to write the effect patch Please insert the Destination disc Insert the backup destination disc Please insert the Source disc Insert the backup source disc Press ENTER Press YES ENTER at the timing you wish to set Read error An error occurred while reading Read only disc This disc is a read only disc Reading Now reading Please wait Reading Disc Information Now reading disc information Please wait Recordable CD R not ready A recordable CD R is not ready Save error An error occurred while saving Save PAD SEQ data Do you want to save the pad sequence data Save SONG before eject Do you want to save the song before ejecting Save SONG before shutdown Do you want to save the song before shutdown Saving PAD SEQ Now saving the pad sequence data 171 Major Message Li
377. y deleting them This makes it easy to make corrections to entire phrases without re recording Moving a phrase Move This function moves the specified phrase to another location The place from which the phrase was moved will be blank silent and if there was already a phrase at the move destination it will be overwritten by the moved phrase Press PAD SEQUENCING EDIT EDIT will light and the Sequence Edit menu will be displayed as icons Press CURSOR __ gt to select the Move icon Press YES ENTER The Move Phrase screen appears Press CURSOR Q A sequence track select mini menu appears EQ ELIT HE FHE FF AODITUST ERASE CUT MOVE PHRASE ero wo TrA ene Beart 0004 01 05 Duration 12 08 HOWE PHRASE Brow Tr A ae Sta 1 559 a TRK Jur Llback A oss Turn the TIME V ALUE dial to select the sequence track A D that you wish to edit and press YES ENTER A mini menu disappears Use the REW lt q FF PP or the TIME V ALUE dial to select the phrase that you wish to move The currently selected phrase will be highlighted in black After you have specified the move phrase press YES ENTER It displays where to move You can adjust the destination MOWE PHRASE HIN e Tr A E m Move To 0005 02 00 Use the REW lt q FF PP or the TIME VALUE dial to set the move destination to NOW After you have specified
378. yback sound of the sequence 3 Press CURSOR Q to move the cursor to the Tr SEL track select box of the sequence track A D that you wish to play 4 PressCURSOR _ gt The Tr SEL track select box will be SEG FLAY highlighted in black indicating that it will play back To cancel your selection press CURSOR lt 5 If you wish to record other sequence tracks as well repeat steps 3 4 6 Press PLAY P to play back sequence track 7 Use the PAD SEQ LEVEL fader to adjust the recording level NOTE At this time raise the volume as high as possible without allowing the sound to distort In step 7 set master fader at iti f O dB t ke th 8 When you adjust the volume press STOP W eee o make the recording level moderate 9 Press ZERO 4 to set SONG POSITION to 0001 01 000 the beginning Alternatively you can move to a desired location so that recording will start from that point 10 Insert an unused CD R disc or a CD R disc that has been written by the CDX 1 When insert a CD R disc written audio data CD player screen appears When insert an unused CD R disc CD recording screen step 11 appears You cannot record on a CD R that has been finalized 11 Press CD RECORDER HE J CD recording screen appears CO RECORDER REMAIN 74 40 CD RECORDER EJ J will blink recording Q i kia OQ Oo J Q 4 O e D F Q
379. yback press STATUS for the audio track that you want to mute silence STATUS will change from green to blinking and the sound of that audio track will be muted silenced 2 Once again press the STATUS key that you caused to blink in step 1 STATUS will change from blinking to lighting solidly in green and that audio track will resume playing rs An audio track whose STATUS was dark when playback began cannot be switched to Play status by pressing STATUS during playback STATUS will not light in green 13 Using STATUS to select the track whose parameters you want to adjust When you want to adjust an audio track s mixer settings pan equalizer or loop effect settings you can also press STATUS for that audio track to select it directly Setting the left right position pan of each audio track 1 Hold down TRACK EDIT PAN and press AUDIO TRACK STATUS that you want to adjust The pan setting screen appears Gil TRACK D OVOOOOOO x 5 4 35 6 YY amp 2 Turn the TIME VALUE dial to set the pan 3 Press DISPLAY to return to the Basic screen Adjusting the tone of each audio track 1 Hold down TRACK EDIT EQ and press AUDIO TRACK STATUS that you want to adjust The equalizer setting screen appears Ga TRACK EQ SterecLinL Bia Fa On OF fF YT LoW Gain OnE 2 Press CURSOR Q U to move the cursor to the line of the parameter you want to adjust 3 Turn t
380. you wish to keep the pad sequence you must save it on a CD RW disc before shutdown Saving Pad Sequence p 67 For details of saved Song settings refer to Saving Song settings on a CD RW disc p 126 NEM This message appears even in case you have not changed setting of Song Basic operation of the CDX 1 Inserting removing a disc OU jab ee O O D Q Oo gt Oo v D gt lt Inserting a disc yore De If you transport the CDX 1 with a CD left in the disc tray the CD or drive may be damaged Before transporting or moving the CDX 1 you must remove the CD from the es disc tray EJECT button 1 Press the EJECT button The disc tray will open 2 Place the disc on the disc tray 3 Press the EJECT button once more The disc tray will close The disc tray will also close if you press lightly on the front of the tray Time to mount disc CDX 1 carries out the followings when mounting the discs e Inspecting CD RW disc to improve preciseness of writing e Optimize CD RW drive e Load various data like audio files Thus it take some time to complete mounting od discs The time length to mount disc is varied depending on amount of Pad Sequence data Mounting of discs including no Pad Sequence data completes in approximately 3 minutes Mounting takes approximately 8 minutes at most 35 Basic operation of the CDX 1 Removing a
381. ype disc is inserted BUSY indicator This indicator will light in red when the inserted CD is being read or written Eject button EJECT button Eject button This button opens or closes the CD disc tray hrs If you need to remove the CD after the power has been turned off you must turn on the power once again and press EJECT to remove the CD If you attempt to remove the CD by force you may damage the disc tray 28 Panel Descriptions MASTER Section MASTERING TOOLS O MASTERING TOOLS button _ EDIT button STATUS O STATUS button MASTER 4 MASTER fader MASTERING TOOLS Button This button switches mastering tools kit p 134 effect on and off If CD BURNING mode is selected this will be turned on automatically EDIT Button Access a screen where you can set the master balance gt Adjusting the overall volume balance Master balance p 132 STATUS Button Shows the status of the Master track The current state is shown by the color of the button gt Mixdown p 133 CD Burning p 135 e Blinking in red Indicates currently in recording standby mode e Lit in red Indicates currently recording e Lit in green Recorded Master track data is being played back MASTER fader You can adjust the overa

Roland CDX-1 user manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents